ArcCHECK Reference Guide RevP July

Title
ArcCHECK® 7JKJWJSHJ Guide

The Ultimate QA Solution
Model 1220
5FWY3ZRGJW8TKY\FWJ;
Reference Guide, ArcCHECK®
© Copyright 2009-2017 by Sun Nuclear Corporation. All rights reserved.
The information contained in this manual and the accompanying software program are copy-
righted and all rights are reserved by Sun Nuclear Corporation. No part of this manual may be
translated, reproduced, sold, or otherwise distributed without the prior written consent of Sun
Nuclear Corporation.
This manual is an integral part of the ArcCHECK and should always be kept nearby. Read this man-
ual before using the ArcCHECK. Observance of the manual is required for proper performance and
correct operation of the ArcCHECK.
The ArcCHECK Intended Use statement is on page iii of this manual. Sun Nuclear does not accept
liability for injury to personnel or damage to equipment that may result from misuse of the instru-
ment, failure to observe the warnings and cautions in this manual, or failure to observe local health
and safety regulations.
Sun Nuclear Corporation reserves the right to make periodic modifications to this manual without
obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision.
This manual is written for:
Software version: 6.7
Firmware version: Model 1220 (shipped before November 2014): 2.2.2
Model 1220 (shipped after November 2014): 1.0.0.5
FPGA firmware version: Model 1220 (shipped after November 2014): 1.0.6
Import DLL: 2.1.0
The user is restricted to installing the licensed software updates only on machines that are in the
user’s facility and those machines being used during measurement and/or interpretation of data
from the device associated with the software.
ArcCHECK®, ArcCHECK®-MR, MapCHECK®, MapCHECK® 2, 3DVH®, SunPoint® Diode
Detectors, Virtual Inclinometer™, EPIDose™, SNC Patient™, Planned Dose Perturbation™, PDP™,
SNCPDP™, AC-PDP™, MC-PDP™, HeliGrid™, CavityPlug™, MultiPlug™, Wide Field Calibration™,
and WFC™ are trademarks of Sun Nuclear Corporation. Other trademarks or trade names are the
property of their respective owners.
The ArcCHECK instrument is protected by U.S. Patent No. 8,044,359.
The wide field array calibration procedure is protected by U.S. Patent No. 6,125,335.
The EPIDose software is protected by U.S. Patent No. 8,130,905.
The 3DVH software is protected by U.S Patent No. 7,945,022.
Document 1220011, Rev P, 10 July 2017
Sun Nuclear Corporation

3275 Suntree Boulevard.
Melbourne, FL 32940 USA
+1-321-259-6862
www.sunnuclear.com
ii
Preface
Intended Use
ArcCHECK, Model 1220 is a three-dimensional (3D) ionizing radiation measurement device

intended for radiotherapy quality assurance.
CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a qualified
radiation therapy professional, such as a medical dosimetrist, medical physicist, or
radiation oncologist, for use in radiation oncology QA.
Application
The ArcCHECK is a Quality Assurance device that tests a radiotherapy system’s ability, along with
its accessories, to successfully deliver a planned QA dose distribution in a 3D phantom. The
planned QA dose map is a recalculation, on a phantom, of the dose resulting from the beam
fluence that has been defined by the planning system and which must be delivered by the
accelerator and its accessory parts. The ArcCHECK measurement is also a Quality Assurance test
much like the MapCHECK 2 or even a daily QA device. If a QA test device indicates a problem, an
investigation of the problem is undertaken. The treatment plan is not modified with the ArcCHECK
comparison results; instead an investigation is suggested that will look into the cause of the
discrepancy.
WARNING: Do not modify a patient’s treatment plan based only on the results from a
single QA device, but DO investigate the source of the error in the treatment delivery
device (TDD) or treatment planning system (TPS).
Specific applications of Model 1220 ArcCHECK include external beam radiotherapy delivered:
• by a linear accelerator
• by one or more Cobalt-60 sources
• from one or more static angles
• rotationally
• with intensity-modulated beams
• with non-modulated beams
The Model 1220 ArcCHECK has not been qualified for use with a radiotherapy electron beam.
Quality and Regulatory Systems
Sun Nuclear meets worldwide standards, including ISO 13485, FDA 21 CFR 820 Quality System
Regulations, Health Canada's Medical Device Regulations, European Medical Device Directive 93/
42/EEC, and all other relevant country regulations.
Sun Nuclear is certified and authorized to affix the CE mark on products for marketing and
distribution in the Member States of the European Union.
Sun Nuclear’s quality systems registrar and European Notified Body for Class II medical products
is BSI. Sun Nuclear’s Class I medical products are listed in Europe with the Competent Authority
of the Netherlands.
Sun Nuclear Corporation is an ISO 13485 certifiedcompany
Preface iii
MRI Safety Information
WARNING: The Model 1220 ArcCHECK is MR Unsafe and must not be used in any
MR Unsafe
Do not use strong magnetic fields.
this equip-
ment in the
MRI scan
room.
Health and Safety Instructions
Follow these health and safety instructions when using the equipment. To report health or safety
related concerns, see Reporting Health or Safety Related Issues or Concerns on page 230.
WARNING: To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected
to a supply mains with protective earth (ground).
CAUTION: Keep ArcCHECK electronics out of the direct beam. Exposing the
ArcCHECK electronics to direct radiation could void the warranty!
WARNING: The instrument can only be connected to external computer equipment

that is compliant with IEC 60950-1, Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
• Use only the power supply that is provided with the instrument; it is a medical grade power
supply.
• Ensure the power source matches the power ratings printed on the power supply.
• Never pull on a cable to disconnect it. Always grasp the plug or connector.
• Do not route cables under or through the treatment room door in a way that would present a
trip hazard or damage the cables.
• Do not permit liquid to flow on the instrument or any associated parts or accessories.
• The instrument is not intended to be used in an oxygen rich environment.
iv Preface
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Step K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Step L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Examine Profile and Apply Calibration. . . . . 27
Quality and Regulatory Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Loading an Array Calibration File . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MRI Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Selecting a Default Array Calibration File . . . . . 28
Health and Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Recalibration Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Section 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Absolute Dose Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions . . . . . . . 29
Model 1220 ArcCHECK Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Absolute Dose Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . 30
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration . . . . . . . 32
New Model 1220 ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Applying an Absolute Dose Calibration . . . . . . 32
Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Selecting a Default Absolute Dose
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power/Data Interface (PDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Deleting an Absolute Dose Calibration. . . . . . . 32
Power/Data Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 5. Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
PDI Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Loading an Array Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Applying Array Calibration to an Existing
New Model 1220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Original Model 1220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration . . . . . . . . . 33
ArcCHECK Quick Start Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Acquiring a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Section 2. Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Inherent Buildup and Physical Depth . . . . . . . . 33
Install and License Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Device Measured Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Generate Software License and Download Section 6. Import Planned Dose . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Multiple Instruments or Computers . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exporting DICOM Files from the TPS . . . . . . . . . . 37
Install Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Importing Planned Dose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connect Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TomoTherapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connect and Launch Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
If the ArcCHECK is Not Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SunCOM Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Check Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ArcCHECK Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SNC Patient Software License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ArcCHECK Images From Sun Nuclear . . . . . . . 40
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PMMA and Air, Densities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Section 3. Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Collecting Your Own ArcCHECK Images . . . . . 41
Initial Position for Measurement or  ArcCHECK Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Virtual Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 The Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inclinometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 The Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Section 4. Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Electron Density Correction for Monaco . . . . . 45
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Collecting Background Manually . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Array Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Factory Array Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Array Calibration Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Section 7. Comparing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Array Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Comparing Device Measured with Planned . . . . . 51
Initial Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Selecting Relative or Absolute Dose . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Step A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Calculated Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Step B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Comparing ArcCHECK Measurements . . . . . . . . . 53
Step C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Analysis Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Step D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Threshold (TH %) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Step E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Percent Difference (Diff %). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Step F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Distance (Dist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Step G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Step H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Jump to Corresponding Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Step I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Step J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Save a Session File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Contents v
Open a Session File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Section 8. Software Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Select Analysis Options and Compare . . . . 83
Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Multiple Arcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Beam Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Load Device Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Control Point Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Load Planned Dose Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Control Point Dose Analysis User Interface . . . 87
Clear Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Maximizing/Minimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Control Point Dose Analysis Program
Maximize and Minimize a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Navigate to Other Maximized Panels . . . . . . . . 60 Apply Weight Function on Low Dose
Selecting Chart Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chart/Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Absolute Dose Local Percent 
Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Show Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Analysis Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Edit Contour/Select Graph Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Analysis Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Shift/Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Dose Difference Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Display Dose at Selected Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 ArcCHECK Dose Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Normalize to a Detector or Maximum  Planned Dose Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Analysis Histogram Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Polar Graph Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Zoom Control - Profile/Histogram  Resizing Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 About Control Point Dose Analysis
Profile Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Profile Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Control Point Dose Analysis Data Handling . . 101
Zoom the Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ArcCHECK Movie File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ArcCHECK Dose Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Dose Summary/Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Plan Dose Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Absolute Dose Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Calculated Dose Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gamma Index Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Control Point Dose Analysis Report . . . . . . . . 102
Percent Difference Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA (Per Control Point). . . . 105
Data Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Histogram Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 RT Plan and Measured Data
Histogram Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Adjusting Histogram Bin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Dose Distribution in ArcCHECK Per
Histogram Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Estimated Dose Distribution in 
Section 9. Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ArcCHECK Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Measured and Estimated Dose
Creating a New Patient Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Opening the File Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fault Likelihood Analysis Summary . . . . . . 109
Adding Files to a Patient Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Patient Plan Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Merge (for Longer Field Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Deleting or Renaming Files in File  Merge (for Higher Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Concatenate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Selecting a Network Location for Patient Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Split Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Batch Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Batch Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Machine QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis . . . . . . . . 80 Beam Delivery System Reproducibility . . . . . 117
Notes about Sub Arc Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Analysis Criteria and Results Panels . . . . . 119
Dose Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Comparison and Reference Panels . . . . . . 119
DICOM RT Dose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Charts and Histograms Panels. . . . . . . . . . 120
DICOM RT Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Display Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Minimum Arc Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 PDF Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Polar Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Measurement Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Time Gamma Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Load Data in Control Point Dose Analysis . . . . 82 Time Analysis for a Selected Detector . . . 125
vi Contents
Gantry QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Cavity Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Phantom Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Gantry Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Diode Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Gantry Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Electronics Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Gantry Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Generate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
MLC/Collimator QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ArcCHECK Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Cradle Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Analysis Results Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing Support Arms for Scatter
Analysis Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Penumbra Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Cradle Rod and Spacer - Density . . . . . . . . . . 167
PDF Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ArcCHECK Storage Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Flatness & Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Case Unpacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Case Packing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Flatness & Symmetry Results Display . . . . 139 Section 13. Software Reference . . . . . . . . . 171
Analysis Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3DVH Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Main Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Panel Toolbars - Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Section 10. Post Measurement  Context Menu Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Program Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Files Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Heterogeneity Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Detectors Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Angular Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Reports Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Angular Dependence (AD) and  Other Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Individual Deviation (ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Array Calibration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Virtual Inclinometer (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Dose Calibration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Field Size Dependence (FS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 File Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Field Size Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Manage Files Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Field Size Correction Factor Calculation. . . . . 148 Batch Analysis Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Out of Beam Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Patient Information Dialog Box Details . . . . . . . . 186
Out of Beam Correction Test for Original Measurement Parameters Dialog Box 
Model 1220 ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Post Measurement Processing Calculations . . . 151 About SNC Patient Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Section 11. Interpreting Results . . . . . . . . . 153 ArcCHECK File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Eliminating Sources of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Text File (*.txt). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Sources of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Movie File (*.acm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Steps to Eliminate Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Beam On Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Ion Chamber Measurements in CavityPlug  Suspended Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
or MultiPlug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Movie Lite File (*.acml) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Dose-to-Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 SunCOM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dose-to-Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 SunCOM Header Information (Optional) . . . . 194
Recommendations for 6 MV and 10 MV SunCOM Required Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Example SunCOM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Gamma Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Section 14. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Detailed Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Solid Cavity Insert Required for 3DVH
3D Gamma Analysis for ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . 157 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Distance to Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 CavityPlug Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3D DTA for ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CavityPlug Radiation Detector Adapters . . . . 198
Relative/Absolute DTA Comparison . . . . . . . . 159 Using the CavityPlug Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Global % (Van Dyk %) Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 MultiPlug Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Global % Difference for DTA Analysis . . . . . . 160 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Global % Difference for Gamma Analysis . . . 160 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Measurement Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Percentage Acceptance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Positioning of Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Gradient Compensation (GC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Heterogeneity Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Radiation Detector Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Section 12. Hardware Reference. . . . . . . . . 163 MultiPlug Storage Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ArcCHECK Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Film Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Using Films with SNC Patient™ Software . . . 205
Contents vii
Using the MultiPlug Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Obtaining the Latest Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Scatter Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Upgrading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Upgrading Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 New Model 1220 ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK . . . . . . . . 223
Storing the Scatter Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Removing SNC Patient Software . . . . . . . . . . 224
ArcCHECK Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Software Removal (Windows 10 or
Prerequisite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Windows 8.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Using the ArcCHECK Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Software Removal (Windows 7) . . . . . . . . 224
Initial Placement of ArcCHECK on  Shutting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Moving ArcCHECK from Trolley to  SNC Patient Software Troubleshooting . . . . . 224
Couch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 TPS Filter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Moving ArcCHECK from Couch to  License Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ArcCHECK LED (Original Model 1220
Trolley Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ArcCHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Cradle Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ArcCHECK LEDs (New Model 1220
Installing Optional Storage Shelf . . . . . . . . . . 213 ArcCHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
40 Meter Power/Data Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Inclinometer LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Section 15. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 PDI Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Manually Disabling Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ArcCHECK Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Enable or Disable Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
ArcCHECK Storage Case Specifications . . . . . . . 216 Device Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
CavityPlug Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Contacting Sun Nuclear Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MultiPlug Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Support Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Scatter Accessory Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Section 16. Support and Maintenance . . . . 219 Appendix A: Regulatory Supplement . . . . . 229
Minimizing Radiation Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Sun Nuclear Corporation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Maintaining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Operator Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Reporting Health or Safety Related Issues 
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 or Concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Modifications to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Storage and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Regulatory Testing/Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Disposal and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Interaction with Other Electrical Equipment . . . . 231
Maintaining Software and Firmware. . . . . . . . . . 220 EMC Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Determining Software and Firmware Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
viii Contents
1 Introduction
Description
The ArcCHECK is a water-equivalent phantom with a three-dimensional array of SunPoint® Diode

Detectors on a 21 cm diameter cylinder, 21 cm in length. The diode detectors are arranged in a
spiral pattern with 10 mm detector spacing on the cylinder. The phantom cavity (15 cm diameter)
is designed to accommodate various accessories such as a solid homogeneous core, a dosimetric
core with ion chamber(s), an imaging QA core, a core with heterogeneous materials for dose
studies, etc. Dose measurements from each sensor are updated every 50 ms; there is no limit of
time or dose for a measurement. The proprietary SNC Patient™ software1 is used to compare the
device measured dose distribution to that calculated by the planning system.
Model 1220 ArcCHECK Versions
A new version of the Model 1220 ArcCHECK was released in November 2014. The new Model
1220 ArcCHECK contains a different analog-to-digital converter than the original Model 1220
ArcCHECK. A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be identified by the serial number on the product
label (starts with ‘1222’) and the text on the electronics panel which states that the instrument
must be used with a PDI 3.0 and a blue PDI (power/data) cable.
The new Model 1220 ArcCHECK has higher power requirements than the original ArcCHECK,
therefore several of the parts provided with the instrument, such as the power data interface (PDI)
device, power/data cable, and power supply, have been modified to support the higher power
requirements. For details, see Power/Data Interface (PDI) on page 3 and PDI Power Supply on
page 4.
Both the original and new Model 1220 ArcCHECKs use the same software interface and work flow
with the exception of the firmware interface. The new Model 1220 ArcCHECK uses a different
firmware version than original Model 1220 ArcCHECK, and contains a field-programmable gate
array (FPGA) integrated circuit. To support upgrade of both the firmware and FPGA, a new
firmware upgrade utility has been added to SNC Patient software. The software automatically
detects which ArcCHECK version is connected and then launches the appropriate firmware
upgrade utility based on the connected instrument. For details, see Upgrading Firmware on
page 220.
Parts
This section identifies the parts included with the ArcCHECK instrument.
New Model 1220 ArcCHECK

Note: New Model 1220 ArcCHECKs must be used with the provided Power Data
Interface (PDI) 3.0 device and the blue power/data cable, or the ArcCHECK will not
power on. A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be identified by the serial number on
the product label (starts with ‘1222’) and the text on the electronics panel which states
that the instrument must be used with a PDI 3.0.
1 In software version 6.0, the software name was changed from “MapCHECK” to “SNC Patient”.
Description 1
1
5
7
4 2
No. Part Number Qty. Description

1 1222300Z 1 ArcCHECK (Model 1220)
2 1220800Z 1 ArcCHECK Cradle Assembly
3 801073Z 1 Power/data cable (blue), 8-pin DIN, 25 m
4 0224502Z 1 Power supply, switching, filtered, 110-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz to 18 VDC
5 801008Z 1 Line power cord, IEC Plug to USA style
6 801041Z 1 USB Cable, 2 m
7 0224500Z 1 Power Data Interface (PDI) 3.0
--- 1220150 1 ArcCHECK packing set (includes ArcCHECK shipping and storage
case) (not shown)
--- 1220492Z 1 ArcCHECK Scatter Accessory (not shown)
--- 1220012 1 ArcCHECK User’s Guide (not shown)
--- 1220029 1 Application Note 05-12, ArcCHECK Density
--- 0224011 1 Technical Bulletin 02-09, Power Data Interface (not shown)
Figure 1-1. Parts Included with New Model 1220 ArcCHECK
Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK
3
7
5
4 2

1 1220700 1 ArcCHECK (Model 1220)
2 1220800Z 1 ArcCHECK Cradle Assembly
Figure 1-2. Parts Included with Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK
2 Section 1. Introduction
3 801038Z 1 Power/data cable (gray), 8-pin DIN, 25 m
4 0224502Z 1 Power supply, switching, filtered, 110-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz to 18 VDC
5 801008Z 1 Line power cord, IEC Plug to USA style
6 801041Z 1 USB Cable, 2 m
7 0224500Z 1 Power Data Interface (PDI) 3.0
--- 850058 1 ArcCHECK shipping and storage case (not shown)
--- 1220492Z 1 ArcCHECK Scatter Accessory (not shown)
--- 1220012 1 ArcCHECK User’s Guide (not shown)
--- 1220029 1 Application Note 05-12, ArcCHECK Density
--- 0224011 1 Technical Bulletin 02-09, Power Data Interface (not shown)
Figure 1-2. Parts Included with Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK (Continued)
Options and Accessories

The following options and accessories can be used with ArcCHECK. For details and usage
instructions, see Accessories on page 197.
• CavityPlug™ Accessory, P/N 1220000-1Z
• MultiPlug™ Accessory, P/N 1220000-3Z
• Scatter Accessory, P/N 1220492Z
• ArcCHECK Trolley, P/N 1220200Z
• 40 meter blue power/data cable, P/N 801074Z
Power/Data Interface (PDI)
The ArcCHECK uses a high speed Power Data Interface (PDI) device to route power to the
instrument and translate communications between the instrument and a personal computer. An
external power converter automatically adapts to any power source within the range of 100-240
VAC, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz.
A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK must be used with the provided PDI 3.0 and a blue power/data
cable (25 meter or 40 meter). If a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK is used with an earlier PDI, such
as PDI 2.0, it will not power on. A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be identified by the serial
number on the product label (starts with ‘1222’) and the text on the electronics panel which states
that the instrument must be used with a PDI 3.0 and a blue PDI (power/data) cable.
Figure 1-3. PDI 3.0

For more information about PDI 3.0, see Technical Bulletin 02-09, Power Data Interface. This
Technical Bulletin is included with each PDI device and is also available on the Sun Nuclear
Support website (see Support Website on page 228.)
Power/Data Interface (PDI) 3

Power/Data Cable
The power/data cable connects the ArcCHECK to the PDI 3.0 located in the control room. The
original ArcCHECK is shipped with a gray power/data cable, P/N 801038Z. The new ArcCHECK is
shipped with a blue power/data cable, P/N 801073Z. Both cables use the same 8-pin DIN
connectors.
The gray power/data cable is only available in 25 meter length. The blue power/data cable is
available in 25 and 40 meter lengths.
A new model 1220 ArcCHECK must be used with the provided PDI 3.0 and a blue power/data
cable (25 meter or 40 meter). A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be identified by the serial number
on the product label (starts with ‘1222’) and the text on the electronics panel which states that the
instrument must be used with a PDI 3.0 and a blue PDI (power/data) cable.
The gray power/data cable can be used with PDI 2.0 or PDI 3.0. If using a gray power/data cable
with the PDI 3.0, do not connect a new model 1220 ArcCHECK.
The blue power/data cable features heavier gauge wire to reduce resistive loss, improve
impedance control, and increase communication speed. It is easily identified by the blue jacket,
the larger diameter (approximately 8.75 mm), and the connector overmold. The blue power/data
cable is compatible with PDI 3.0 or PDI 2.0.
Gray Power/Data Cable Blue Power/Data Cable
Figure 1-4. Power/Data Cables
For more information about the power/data cable, see Technical Bulletin 02-09, Power Data
Interface. This Technical Bulletin is included with each PDI device and is also available on the Sun
Nuclear Support website (see Support Website on page 228.)
PDI Power Supply
The ArcCHECK uses a GlobTek® Model GTM21089-1818-T3 medically rated power supply, P/N
0224502Z, to supply power to the PDI device. The PDI power supply is rated for 110-240 VAC,
50-60 Hz to 18 VDC., and it is fused at 1 Amp.
Cables
New Model 1220

Three cables are included with a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK.
• Power cord, P/N 801008Z— a standard 3-wire, grounded power cord; connects to wall socket
and power supply.
• Power/Data cable, P/N 801073Z— Blue 25-meter round cable with two 8-pin DIN connectors.
Connects the PDI 3.0 to the ArcCHECK. The connector pins are 1:1 and either end of the cable
can be connected to the PDI 3.0 or ArcCHECK.
• USB cable, P/N 801041Z — a standard Universal Serial Bus cable to connect the PDI 3.0 to
the computer.
Original Model 1220
Three cables are included with the original Model 1220 ArcCHECK.
• Power cord, P/N 801008Z — a standard 3-wire, grounded power cord; connects to wall socket
and power supply.
• Power/Data cable, P/N 801038Z— Gray 25-meter round cable with two 8-pin DIN connectors.
Connects the PDI 3.0 to the ArcCHECK. The connector pins are 1:1 and either end of the cable
can be connected to the PDI 3.0 or ArcCHECK.
• USB cable, P/N 801041Z — a standard Universal Serial Bus cable to connect the PDI 3.0 to
the computer.
ArcCHECK Quick Start Instructions
Perform the following steps to begin using your ArcCHECK. For additional information about a
step, follow the link provided next to the step.
1 Log in to the Sun Nuclear Support site at www.sunnuclear.com/support (see Support Web-
site on page 228), navigate to the product panel for your ArcCHECK (by serial number), and
then do the following:
a. Select Generate Software License and follow the on-screen instructions. See Generate
Software License and Download Software on page 7.
b. Select Download calibration file and follow the on-screen instructions. See Factory
Array Calibration on page 18.
c. Download the current version of SNC Patient software. See Generate Software License
and Download Software on page 7.
d. Download CT scans of the ArcCHECK phantom. See ArcCHECK Images on page 40.
e. Download the current ArcCHECK Reference Guide. See Support Website on page 228.
2 Install SNC Patient software (see Install and License Software on page 7). The software will
prompt you for the location of the license file. Navigate to the directory where you stored the
license file, or move the license file into the default directory displayed on-screen.
3 In your TPS, set the bulk density override for the ArcCHECK phantom to the density value
appropriate for your TPS. See ArcCHECK Density on page 43.
4 Load the factory array calibration file. See Factory Array Calibration on page 18.
You can collect measurements using the factory array calibration, or you can perform your
own array calibration (see Array Calibration on page 18.)
Important! The factory array calibration file must be loaded before starting the array
calibration process. The software copies correction factors from the factory array calibration
file to the new array calibration file.
5 If desired, insert a CavityPlug or MultiPlug in the ArcCHECK center cavity to replace the air
cavity with a heterogeneous density. If using MultiPlug, use the solid PMMA inserts to
simulate a solid PMMA plug.
6 Perform absolute dose calibration. See Absolute Dose Calibration on page 29.
There are three ways to determine the dose at the ArcCHECK calibration depth (described in
Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions on page 29).
• Set up a water-equivalent flat phantom with an ionization chamber at the calibration
depth.
• Model the water-equivalent flat phantom in the TPS and identify the dose at the
calibration depth.
• Model the ArcCHECK phantom in the TPS and identify the dose at the calibration depth.
Ideally, the result for all three methods should be within 0.5%. If so, the result of any of the
three methods can be used, but it is recommended to use the phantom with ionization
chamber result. If the results for these three methods disagree by more than 1%, identify the
cause of disagreement (model density, daily variation, ion chamber calibration).
7 Plan a 10x10 static field in your TPS on the ArcCHECK phantom.
ArcCHECK Quick Start Instructions 5

8 Deliver the beam. See Acquiring a Measurement on page 33.
9 Load the RT Dose and RT Plan in Set 2. See Importing Planned Dose on page 37.
Compare the device measured results to the planned dose results.See Comparing Device
Measured with Planned on page 51.
10 Compare entrance and exit doses. Ideally, there will be good agreement between planned
and measured (dose at both entrance and exit within 0.5%). If not, the problem will likely be
either the density override (if the entrance/exit ratio is incorrect) or the absolute dose
calibration (if both entrance and exit are incorrect by the same percentage). Correct the
density or absolute dose calibration, if necessary, by repeating steps 3 or 6.
11 If desired, a radiation detector can be inserted in the center of the CavityPlug or MultiPlug
accessory to verify that the TPS is properly calculating dose distribution in the ArcCHECK
phantom volume. For more information, see CavityPlug Accessory on page 197 or MultiPlug
Accessory on page 199.
Treatment planning system calculations can be either dose-to-water or dose-to-medium. The
difference between these calculations will be approximately 3% at the center of the
ArcCHECK. If the TPS is performing a dose-to-water calculation, no additional correction
factor is necessary when converting the ion chamber charge to dose. If the TPS is performing
a dose-to-PMMA calculation, a PMMA correction factor should be applied for the ion
chamber measurement to agree with the TPS. For more information, see Ion Chamber
Measurements in CavityPlug or MultiPlug on page 154.
The ArcCHECK is now commissioned and you are ready to begin measuring more complex plans.
If you have good agreement in step 9, but poor agreement with modulated or arc fields, then the
error is likely due to real differences between your planned and delivered fields. You should
investigate these differences as they may indicate an opportunity to improve modeling.
2 Setup
Install and License Software
Prerequisites
• Ensure the computer meets the system requirements in Specifications on page 215. If the
computer does not meet the requirements, a message is displayed (see System Require-
ments on page 11.) You can click OK to continue the installation, but it is recommended to
upgrade the computer before acquiring measurements.
• Administrative rights are required to install the software. Read and write privileges to the
C:\SNC folder are required to use the software.
• A valid license file is required for each Sun Nuclear product used with the SNC Patient
software (MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2, ArcCHECK, or EPIDose). Each license file is specific to
the serial number of the instrument. A license check is performed during software launch. If
a valid license file is not found, although the SNC Patient software will install, it will not start.
Generate Software License and Download Software

Perform this procedure to download SNC Patient software and a software license from the Sun
Nuclear Support website.
1 Open an internet browser and navigate to the Sun Nuclear Support website
(www.sunnuclear.com/support).
2 Enter your email address and the serial number of any Sun Nuclear instrument used at your
facility, then click Log in to open the Support Dashboard.
3 Click Products and Downloads and then perform the following steps for each ArcCHECK.
a. Select the ArcCHECK by serial number. Each license file is specific to a serial number.
b. In the Product Downloads screen, click Generate Software License.
c. Verify the serial number in the software license message, then click Download license
file.
d. Save the license file(s) to the computer that will be used to control the ArcCHECK. The
default location is: C:\SNC\SNC Patient\License. If the license files are stored in the
default location, they will be found automatically when launching SNC Patient software.
If the license files are stored in a location other than the default (for example, a network
directory), an ‘SNC Patient Licensing’ window is displayed after launching SNC Patient
software. Click Browse to select the path to the license files and then enable the check
box for Make the selected path default for loading license files.
4 Select Software (Current Version) on the left side of the Support website.
5 Locate the current version of SNC Patient software and then click Download.
6 Save the software executable (SNCPatientSetup<version_number>.exe) on the computer
that will be used to control the ArcCHECK.
Note: DICOM Listener software can be downloaded separately, or it can be installed

from the SNC Patient software executable, as described in Install Software.
Multiple Instruments or Computers

Only one copy of the SNC Patient software needs to be installed on the computer, even if more
than one instrument (MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2, or ArcCHECK) is used with the software. The
SNC Patient software checks the serial number of each connected instrument as part of the
licensing validation. License file(s) can be copied to other computers as needed, or stored in an
accessible shared network location.
Install and License Software 7

Install Software
1 Right-click the SNC Patient software executable file,
SNCPatientSetup<version_number>.exe, and then select Run as Administrator.
2 The installer checks for prerequisite applications. If any prerequisites need to be installed,
click Install. If you are prompted to reboot after the prerequisite programs are installed, click
Yes. The software installation will continue automatically after the reboot.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions and accept the default directories:
• When prompted, select the options indicating you possess a valid software license and
you accept the end user license agreement (EULA). For details about licensing, see SNC
Patient Software License on page 10.
• When prompted to select the features to be installed, select the check box for SNC
Patient, SNC DICOM Listener, or both. Clicking on the feature name displays the hard
drive space required for the feature.
• USB drivers are copied to the hard drive during software installation, but are not installed
until the USB cable is connected.
• The installer checks if the computer meets the SNC Patient hardware requirements. If
deficiencies are indicated, upgrade the computer. For a list of system requirements, see
Specifications on page 215.
Connect Hardware
1 Verify that the power source matches the power requirements. The power source must be
earth grounded.
CAUTION: The ArcCHECK may be heavy to some individuals. Use caution when
lifting. See Specifications on page 215 for the ArcCHECK weight.
2 Place the assembled ArcCHECK cradle on the treatment couch.

3 Place the ArcCHECK in the cradle such that the electronics panel is oriented as shown in the
figure below and the cavity panel faces the gantry. Verify that the ArcCHECK is securely
positioned in the cradle channels.
CAUTION: If the ArcCHECK is not securely installed in the cradle, it could fall from the
treatment couch and damage the instrument or cause injury.
TOWARD
GANTRY
Front Cradle
Middle Cradle
Figure 2-1. ArcCHECK Positioned in Cradle
Note: A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK must be used with the provided PDI 3.0 and a
blue power/data cable (either 25 meter or 40 meter). If a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK
is used with an earlier PDI, such as PDI 2.0, it will not power on.
4 The power/data cable can be permanently installed in a conduit between the treatment room
and the control room.
• For multiple treatment rooms, it is recommended to purchase additional 25-meter data
cables (blue) and PDI 3.0 devices and install them in all conduits and control rooms. This
will reduce setup time when moving the instrument from room to room.
8 Section 2. Setup
• If your facility has other Sun Nuclear products and a PDI 2.0 is already routed from the
control room to the treatment room, it is recommended to replace the existing PDI 2.0
and gray power/data cable with a PDI 3.0 and blue power/data cable.
5 Connect the cables as shown for your ArcCHECK model EXCEPT for the USB cable. The USB
cable will be connected at software launch. Route connecting cables where they do not
present a trip hazard.
Model 1220 Cabling

USB cable -
do not
connect
until software
is launched
PDI 3.0
8-pin DIN power/data

cable (blue), 25 m
Figure 2-2. Typical ArcCHECK Model 1220 Cable Connections
Connect and Launch Software
Before measurement, close non-essential applications, such as e-mail, web browsing, streaming
video, etc; ArcCHECK data acquisition is the primary purpose of CPU processing and should not
be compromised by other resource intensive applications.
1 With all other cables connected as shown in Connect Hardware on page 8, connect USB
cable to computer and PDI.
USB drivers are recognized automatically. If none are found, or if newer drivers are available,
drivers are installed. A pop-up message displays when driver installation is complete: “Your
new hardware is installed and ready to use” or “Device driver software installed successfully”.
2 Right-click SNC Patient desktop icon and select Run as administrator.
3 The software searches for a connected instrument. When an instrument is found, the
software checks if a valid license file exists for the connected instrument. If a valid license is
not found, the ‘SNC Patient Licensing’ dialog box is displayed. Follow the instructions in the
dialog box. See also Generate Software License and Download Software on page 7 and
License Troubleshooting on page 226.
4 A background threshold count begins, indicating that communication has been established
between the instrument and the software.
• If a background threshold count does not begin, see If the ArcCHECK is Not Found on
page 10.
5 When the background threshold count is complete, a background measurement begins.
Background is automatically measured for 30-seconds and then stored.
Connect and Launch Software 9

Figure 2-3. Background Measurement
If the ArcCHECK is Not Found

The software automatically tries to “find” the connected instrument when the software is
launched. If the software cannot find the instrument, select Setup > Find Device… from the
menu.
Check Firmware Version
To support SNC Patient software version 6.7 or later, the ArcCHECK firmware must be at version
2.2.2 or later (original Model 1220 ArcCHECK) or 1.0.0.5 (new Model 1220 ArcCHECK). To view the
currently installed firmware version, select Help > About. For firmware upgrade instructions, see
Maintaining Software and Firmware on page 220.
SNC Patient Software License
A valid license file is required for each Sun Nuclear product (MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2,
ArcCHECK, EPIDose) that interfaces with the SNC Patient software.
Note: The licensing process described in this section is applicable to SNC Patient soft-
ware version 6.0 and above only.
With SNC Patient software version 6.0 or later, the software release date is compared to the
software maintenance expiration date. The SNC Patient license file is considered valid if the
software maintenance expiration date is greater than or equal to the release date. To upgrade
software that is released after the initial one-year warranty period, a software maintenance
contract must be in effect. For details, see Maintaining Software and Firmware on page 220.
When the expiration date of a license is 90 days away and a device is connected, the software will
display a warning of the approaching expiration. The warning will be repeated at 60 days and 30
days before expiration as well as on the expiration date, then at 30, 60, and 90 days past the
expiration date. Once the expiration date passes, the SNC Patient software can continue to be
used with your devices as long as the software is not upgraded to a newer version.
Each license file is specific to the serial number of the SNC instrument or a software module.
When using multiple SNC instruments, a separate license file is required for each. For example, if
you use one MapCHECK 2, one ArcCHECK, and you also have two EPIDose licenses, you will need
four total license files, one for MapCHECK 2, one for the ArcCHECK, and two to validate each EPID
that is used with the EPIDose software module.
• The software will only allow data collection with an instrument that has a valid license file.
• Additionally, previously measured data can only be opened if a valid license file exists for
the device that was used to acquire the data.
All new and existing customers with MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2, ArcCHECK, or EPIDose must
have valid license file(s) before using SNC Patient 6.0 or later software. If a valid license file is
10 Section 2. Setup
not found, the SNC Patient software will not start and the ‘SNC Patient Licensing’ dialog box
opens. See License Troubleshooting on page 226.
Figure 2-4. SNC Patient Licensing Window
System Requirements
The ArcCHECK saves a multi-frame (movie) file of each measurement. The movie file stores raw
data for each detector in 50 ms updates, which requires increased computing power on the
computer that is used to take measurements.
If the ArcCHECK is connected to the computer when SNC Patient software is launched, a
hardware check is performed. The requirements are CPU Cores = 2 or more, CPU Speed = 2.4
GHz or higher, Total RAM = 4 GB or higher. If the computer does not meet these requirements, a
warning is displayed. The red box in the warning indicates which computer hardware needs to be
updated.
Figure 2-5. System Requirements Warning - ArcCHECK
CAUTION: If the warning is displayed, the computer hardware should be upgraded

as soon as possible. Otherwise, multi-frame measurement files may display ‘missed’
updates, which could affect various analyses that require real-time data.
System Requirements 11
This page is intentionally left blank.
12 Section 2. Setup
3 Positioning
Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration
1 Ensure that all steps in Connect Hardware on page 8 are complete.

2 Connect the power/data cable to the ArcCHECK.
3 Check the status of the inclinometer LEDs on the electronics panel.
• If all four inclinometer LEDs are solid green, the ArcCHECK is properly balanced.
• If one or more inclinometer LEDs is blinking slowly, the rotation or tilt is slightly off.
• If one or more inclinometer LEDs is blinking fast, the rotation or tilt is far off.
• Adjust the rotation and/or leveling feet as described below.
Rotate Counter Rotate Clock-

Clockwise (CCW) wise (CW)
Tilt (Up) Tilt (Down)
Condition LED Balance Angle

Tilt Tilt Rotate Rotate State (degrees)
Up Down CCW CW
Power Up (first 5 ON ON ON ON n/a n/a
seconds)
Rotation n/a n/a ON ON Rotate Balanced 0 ±0.5
n/a n/a Slow ON Slightly Off Counter-clockwise (CCW) -0.5 to -20
n/a n/a ON Slow Slightly Off Clockwise (CW) +0.5 to -20
n/a n/a Fast ON Far Off Counter-clockwise < -20
n/a n/a ON Fast Far Off Clockwise > +20
Tilt ON ON n/a n/a Tilt Balanced 0 ± 0.25
Slow ON n/a n/a Slightly Off Upwards - 0.25 to -5
ON Slow n/a n/a Slightly Off Downwards +0.25 to +5
Fast ON n/a n/a Far Off Upwards < -5
ON Fast n/a n/a Far Off Downwards > +5
Table 3-1. ArcCHECK Inclinometer LEDs
Note: The inclinometers are calibrated at Sun Nuclear. If desired, you can recalibrate
the inclinometers to match the treatment room conditions. See Inclinometer
Calibration on page 15.
Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration 13

4 Align the cross hairs to the AXIAL and SAGITTAL markers on the ArcCHECK.
Align sagittal and

axial lasers to
SAGITTAL and
AXIAL markers
Keep the direct beam above this line
Figure 3-1. Alignment to Lasers (Top View)
CAUTION: To protect the ArcCHECK electronics, do not allow direct radiation below
the line shown in the above figure. Direct radiation of the electronics will VOID the
warranty. For techniques to minimize radiation damage, see Minimizing Radiation
Damage on page 219.
5 Adjust the couch height such that the ArcCHECK SSD is 86.7 cm, or 13.3 cm above the source
axis distance of the linac.
6 Align the coronal lasers to the CORONAL markers. Check both sides.
7 Verify alignment from the ArcCHECK cavity end. The SAGITTAL marker should align to the
back pointer laser and the CORONAL marker should be horizontal and aligned to the coronal
laser.
Figure 3-2. Setup - ArcCHECK Cavity End
14 Section 3. Positioning
Virtual Inclinometer
The Virtual Inclinometer™ feature allows the software to determine the angle of incidence to the
ArcCHECK for each update. The algorithm simultaneously analyzes the radiation pattern falling on
the entry and exit detectors for each beam angle over the entire delivery. For full details on the
algorithm, refer to Kozelka J, Robinson J, Nelms B, Zhang G, Savitskij D, Feygelman V. Optimizing
the accuracy of a helical diode array dosimeter: a comprehensive calibration methodology coupled
with a novel virtual inclinometer. Med Phys. 2011 Sep;38(9):5021-32.
After measurement, the Virtual Inclinometer- Gantry Angle feature can be used to determine the
angle of incidence to the ArcCHECK and view the gantry angle determined by the measured data
(stationary or moving gantry). For details, see Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle on page 110.
Note: To view the calculated entry and exit ratio for each gantry angle, see ArcCHECK
Exit/Entry Ratios on page 143.
Note: The default beam thresholds for ArcCHECK were updated in SNC Patient
software v6.7 to ensure angle is not calculated on scatter radiation. If additional beam
threshold adjustment is needed, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See Contacting Sun
Nuclear Support on page 228.
Inclinometer Calibration
If the ArcCHECK has revision E or later electronics boards1, it contains two inclinometers that
collect angle information; one to measure the degree of rotation about the center axis of the
cylinder, and another to measure the angle of incline in the coronal plane (tilt). Tilt and rotation
inclinometers are calibrated in the Sun Nuclear factory for accuracy in the range from 0 to 30
degrees and from 330 to 360 degrees.
Note: If the ArcCHECK is rotated beyond 30 degrees from zero (clockwise or counter-
clockwise direction), do not use the Tilt inclinometer reading displayed in software.
When the instrument is placed on the couch and aligned to the lasers, the inclinometer LEDs
should be solid green. If they are not, and if you are certain that the error is not in the couch or the
lasers, then the ArcCHECK inclinometers can be recalibrated to match the treatment room
conditions.
1 From the menu, select Setup > MapCHECK 2/ArcCHECK > View Inclinometer Readings.
Figure 3-3. Example of ArcCHECK Inclinometer Readings Display
1 To view the electronics board revision, select Help > About. See About SNC Patient Dialog Box on page 188.
Inclinometer Calibration 15
2 Note the displayed tilt and rotation.
0
+ tilt
-90 +90
- tilt
Electronics end too high = positive tilt
Electronics end too low = negative tilt

±180
Degrees of rotation - viewed from the cylinder end
Figure 3-4. ArcCHECK Inclinometers - Tilt and Rotation
3 Adjust the tilt and/or rotation if needed, and then click Calibrate. The following message is
displayed.
Figure 3-5. Confirm Inclinometer Calibration
4 If you are sure that you want to recalibrate the inclinometers, click Yes.The software will use
the current angles (tilt and rotation) as the new 0.0 degree positions. If you are not sure about
overwriting the previous calibration, click No.
5 Verify that the inclinometer LEDs are now solid green.
16 Section 3. Positioning
4 Calibration
Background
Background must be collected before radiation measurement to establish a background correc-

tion for each detector. The initial background is automatic when the software is launched with the
ArcCHECK connected and powered on. Background is also measured continuously when the
instrument is powered on and idle and software is not in an active state of radiation measurement.
The ArcCHECK background measurement functions as follows:
• When the software is launched with the ArcCHECK connected, a 30-second background
measurement is collected.
• If the user initiates a measurement (clicks Start) during a background measurement,
background measurement stops and the last successful background is used.
• Background is constantly monitored for significant changes. The monitoring function is
based on results from the initial background measurement or the last successful back-
ground measurement.
Note: If sequential measurements are collected without interruption, the software

may not have time to apply a new automatic background measurement. In this case,
the user may want to manually collect a background measurement.
For the steps to collect background manually, see Collecting Background Manually on page 17.
During the background measurement, the software checks the leakage current of each detector,
calculates a background rate, and stores each rate in memory. After a measurement exposure, a
correction value for each detector is calculated by multiplying the background rate by the duration
of the measurement (time when the beam was on). The calculated background values are sub-
tracted from the measured dose values for each detector.
If background has not been applied, the ‘Background’ box in the toolbar displays “No” in red text.
After background is completed and stored, the Background box displays “Yes” in green text.
Background not applied Background applied

Figure 4-1. Background Toolbar
Collecting Background Manually

Following are possible reasons for collecting a background measurement manually:
• The ArcCHECK was not connected when the software was launched.
• The beam came on during background measurement.
• The beam indicator indicates beam on, but no beam is present.
• The beam indicator indicates "waiting for beam", but the beam is already on.
1 Select Setup > Collect Background. The ‘Collect Background’ dialog box opens.
Background 17
• If the Collect Background menu item is dimmed, the software has not found the
instrument.
Figure 4-2. ‘Collect Background’ Dialog Box
2 Enter the desired time for the background measurement (minimum setting is 30 seconds;
maximum setting is 300 seconds).
3 Click Collect and wait for the threshold to be checked and background measurement to
complete.
4 Click Close to exit background collection.
Array Calibration
Array calibration determines relative sensitivity differences between the ArcCHECK detectors and
stores them as individual correction factors to be applied to the raw net measurements from each
detector. The array calibration process eliminates response differences between individual
detectors. Array calibration uses a patented, wide-field procedure (US Patent No. 6,125,335.)
Factory Array Calibration

A factory array calibration is created for each ArcCHECK at the Sun Nuclear manufacturing facility
and linked to the ArcCHECK serial number. Factory array calibration is performed at 6 MV.
To obtain the factory array calibration file for your ArcCHECK, login to the Sun Nuclear Support
website (see Support Website on page 228), navigate to the product panel that contains the
correct ArcCHECK serial number, select Download calibration file, and then follow the on-screen
instructions
You can use the factory array calibration file or perform your own array calibration using the
procedure in this section. If you choose to perform your own array calibration, you must load the
factory array calibration file before starting the array calibration procedure. The factory calibration
file contains angular dependence (AD) factors and individual deviation (ID) correction factors for
each diode, and applying these factors corrects the detector data to within +/- 1% of its true value.
The software copies the AD and ID factors from the factory array calibration file to the new array
calibration file at the end of the array calibration process.
Array Calibration Conditions

For optimal results, it is recommended to perform one array calibration per beam energy. Use of
a calibration of a different energy for a measurement will result in a small impact, i.e. +/-1%, to
the majority (~70%) of diodes. Nearly all of the remaining diodes will be impacted in the range of
+/-1-2%.
Do not use a flattening filter free (FFF) beam for array calibration. When selecting an array
calibration prior to measurement under an FFF beam, select the energy with the same or closest
nominal energy (e.g. 6 MV for 6FFF).
Array Calibration Procedure

Note: The ArcCHECK array calibration method was revised in SNC Patient V6.2. The
new array calibration method is used to create the factory default array calibration file
for all ArcCHECK units shipped after October 2012. If you upgraded to SNC Patient
V6.6 from a software version prior to V6.2, it is recommended to perform the array
calibration procedure again after upgrading to SNC Patient V6.6.x.
ArcCHECK array calibration is performed with twelve radiation exposures, identified as steps A
through L. The array calibration window provides instructions for placing ArcCHECK in the initial
18 Section 4. Calibration
position. The array calibration dialog box displays instructions for each step and an image of the
correct ArcCHECK position and orientation.
During the array calibration, it is important to:
• Follow the on-screen instructions exactly.
• Position the ArcCHECK correctly. The on-screen instructions describe angle and positioning
in couch coordinates (IEC).
• Use the same field size, SAD, SDD, energy, and monitor unit settings (200 MU recommended)
for each exposure.
• Align the cross hairs precisely with the indicated point.
Initial Position
1 If you will collect ArcCHECK measurements with a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory
inserted, perform array calibration with a plug accessory inserted.
2 Collect a background measurement before performing array calibration.
3 Ensure the factory default array calibration file is selected in the Calibration toolbar.
4 Select Setup > Calibrate Array. The ‘Measurement Parameters’ dialog box is displayed.
Required: Select the delivery system manufacturer.

Required: Select the beam energy.

Select this box if a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory is inserted.
Not required for Array Calibration.
Figure 4-3. Measurement Parameters Dialog Box

a. Select the delivery system manufacturer.
TomoTherapy users: Select Manufacturer = TomoTherapy and then select an RT Plan
file. The RT Plan and device orientation information are used to apply angle-dependent
corrections.
• Do not select the Device Electronics Facing Gantry checkbox.
• For details about the TomoTherapy options in the Measurement Parameters dialog
box, see Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Details on page 187.
b. Select the beam energy. If the delivered energy does not match any of the selections,
select the closest energy. If using a Flattening Filter Free (FFF) energy, then select the
energy with the same or closest nominal energy (e.g. 6 MV for 6FFF).
c. If a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory is inserted in the ArcCHECK cavity, select the Cav-
ityPlug Inserted option.
d. Click OK. The ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box is displayed.
Array Calibration 19
Figure 4-4. ArcCHECK Array Calibration Dialog Box - Initial Position
5 Place the ArcCHECK in the starting position for array calibration as described below (see also
Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration on page 13.)
• Position the electronics panel facing -Y (IEC), as shown in the on-screen image.
• Align the AXIAL and SAGITTAL markers to the lasers, as shown in the on-screen image.
• Set the field size to x=20 cm, y=27 cm.
• Set SSD to 86.7 cm.
• Position ArcCHECK center at the isocenter of the treatment delivery device. Dose at var-
ious angles must be constant.
Note: If the inclinometer LEDs on the electronics panel are not solid green, adjust the
tilt and/or rotation or calibrate the inclinometers. See Positioning on page 13.
6 Click Next to display the Step A instructions.
Step A
Figure 4-5. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step A
7 With the ArcCHECK in the initial position, rotate the gantry to -57 degrees (303 IEC).
8 Click Start. The beam status icon changes from GREEN to YELLOW.
9 Set the accelerator for a nominal 200 MU dose and then turn on the beam. The beam status
icon changes from YELLOW to RED.
10 When the beam turns off, click Stop. The beam status icon changes from RED to GREEN.
11 Click Next.
Note: A step can be repeated at any time before clicking Finish. Click Prev to return
to the step and repeat the delivery. Click Next to skip a previously performed step.
Step B
Figure 4-6. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step B
12 With the ArcCHECK still in the initial position, rotate the gantry to -8 degrees (352 IEC).
16 Click Next.
Step C
Figure 4-7. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step C
17 With the ArcCHECK still in the initial position, rotate the gantry to 8 degrees (8 IEC).
21 Click Next.
Step D
Figure 4-8. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step D
22 With the ArcCHECK still in the initial position, rotate the gantry to 57 degrees (57 IEC).
26 Click Next.
Step E
Figure 4-9. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step E
27 SHIFT the couch 5 mm towards -Y (IEC).

28 Rotate the gantry to -8 degrees (352 IEC).
32 Click Next.
Step F
Figure 4-10. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step F
33 SHIFT the couch 10 mm towards +Y (IEC). The ending position is 5 mm from the center of
the detector array.
38 Click Next.
Step G
Figure 4-11. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step G
39 SHIFT the couch 85 mm towards +Y (IEC).

40 Set the field size to x=5 cm, y = 3 cm.
45 Click Next.
Step H
Figure 4-12. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step H
46 Do not change the gantry angle. It is the same as the previous step (8 degrees, 352 IEC).
47 SHIFT the couch 180 mm towards -Y (IEC).
51 Click Next.
Step I
Figure 4-13. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step I
52 Rotate the ArcCHECK cylinder 180 degrees such that the 0º SAGITTAL marker on the
instrument is facing the couch. A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK has a SAGITTAL marker at 0º
and 180º.
53 Center the ArcCHECK.
54 Set the field size to X = 20 cm, Y = 27 cm.
59 Click Next.
Step J
Figure 4-14. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step J

64 Click Next.
Step K
Figure 4-15. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step K
65 Rotate the gantry to 25 degrees (25 IEC).

69 Click Next.
Step L
Figure 4-16. ArcCHECK Array Calibration - Step L
70 Rotate the gantry to 74 degrees (74 IEC).

74 When array calibration is complete, click Finish. The ‘Array Calibration - Reference Profile’
dialog box opens.
Figure 4-17. Example of ArcCHECK Array Calibration Normalized Reference Profile
Examine Profile and Apply Calibration

1 Examine the profile for appearance. It should represent the radiation profile of the machine
output at the depth of the entrance detectors (3.3 cm water-equivalent.)
• The profile is a visual representation of dose along a column of detectors parallel to the
Sagittal marker.
• The vertical scale (Ratio) provides increments from the center point (“1”) that can be used
to visually check the symmetry of the profile. A desirable profile will be fairly symmetrical
and stay within the 1 to 1.05 range, as shown in the figure above.
• The horizontal scale (Detector) is the distance in cm from the center (0 cm).
• To zoom in, click and drag the cursor down and to the right. To return to normal size, click
and drag in the opposite direction, up and to the left.
2 If there are obvious anomalies or irregularities, click Recalibrate and repeat the array
calibration exposures starting with Step A.
3 Click Apply. The ‘Save Calibration’ dialog box opens.
4 Enter a filename then click Save.
• The AD and ID factors from the factory array calibration are included in the calibration file
as separate tables.
• The extension “.cal” is automatically appended to the filename.
5 If desired, click Print.
6 Click Close.
Loading an Array Calibration File

See Loading an Array Calibration on page 33.
Selecting a Default Array Calibration File

An array calibration file can be set to load automatically (as the default) when the software is
launched.
1 Click Setup > Calibrate Array. The ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box opens.
2 Click Set Default. A file selection dialog box opens showing all of the calibration files (.cal) in
the C:\SNC\SNC Patient\Factors\<serial number> directory.
3 Select the desired default calibration file and then click Open. The next time the SNC Patient
software is launched, the default array calibration file will be selected automatically.
Recalibration Interval
CAUTION: Annual array calibration is recommended. Test your array calibrations

annually and more frequently if the instrument is heavily used. To recalibrate, repeat
each array calibration.
The need for recalibration is based on normal diode aging due to exposure to radiation. The
sensitivity of the diodes decreases at a rate of about 0.5% per 1,000 Gy at 6 MV (photons).
Absolute Dose Calibration
Absolute dose calibration creates a dose calibration factor that is used to convert ArcCHECK
relative dose values to absolute dose values. The dose calibration factor is applied to all detectors
in addition to the array sensitivity correction factor.
Dose calibrations are stored separately from array calibration files in a single file, dose.dat,
located in the C:\SNC\SNC Patient folder.
Absolute dose calibrations are specific to each accelerator, energy, and instrument (identified by
serial number). Clicking the Dose toolbar displays a list of the available dose calibrations. See
Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration on page 33.
Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions

As shown in the figure below, the outside diameter of the ArcCHECK is 26.6 cm, and the distance
from the surface to the center of the ArcCHECK (the radius) is 13.3 cm. The physical distance from
the top surface of the ArcCHECK to the diode detectors (inherent thickness) is 2.9 cm, and the
water equivalent buildup at this distance (inherent buildup) is 3.3 cm.
Source Source
SSDAC = SDD = SSDFLAT =

SAD SSDAC + 2.9 cm
SAD - 13.3 cm SDD - 3.3 cm
Physical Depth = 2.9 cm 3.3 cm

Water Equivalent = 3.3 cm
Radius =
13.3 cm
Detector Location Flat Phantom Setup
ArcCHECK Setup
Figure 4-18. ArcCHECK and Flat Phantom Setup for Dose Calibration
Absolute dose calibration is performed in an open field with the array at a depth where the dose
is known from an earlier measurement (such as TG-51) with an ion chamber whose calibration is
traceable to an absolute dosimetry standard, such as NIST (National Institute of Standards and
Technology). If you are performing dose calibration on the ArcCHECK using a conventional linac,
the field size should be 10 x 10 cm. If you are using a TomoTherapy® machine to perform the dose
calibration, select 5 cm x 20 cm or 5 cm x 40 cm.
To find the known dose at the same depth as the ArcCHECK detector array, set up a flat phantom
with density of water in the treatment planning system or collect a measurement with a calibrated
ion chamber at the same depth with the same water equivalent buildup.
Note: Unlike MapCHECK or MapCHECK 2, the ArcCHECK does not have a center
detector at the known dose point. Instead, the measurement at the known dose point
is an average of the two detectors adjacent to the center.
Absolute Dose Calibration 29

When setting up the flat phantom to find the known dose at a particular depth, the
source-to-detector distance (SDD) must be the same as that used for the ArcCHECK dose
calibration measurement. This distance will differ depending on the machine (conventional linac,
CyberKnife®, or TomoTherapy®) as described below. Also, the buildup to SDD (TPS calculation or
measurement in the flat phantom) must be the same as the water equivalent ArcCHECK buildup
(3.3 cm). Since the ArcCHECK center will always be set at SAD (source-to-axis distance), SSDAC
= SAD - 13.3 cm and SDDAC = SSDAC + 2.9 cm. For the flat phantom with density of water,
SDDFLAT = SDDAC = SDD and SSDFLAT = SDDFLAT - 3.3 cm. The backscatter buildup should be
at least 3.3 cm.
Table 4-1. Dose Calibration Setup for ArcCHECK and Flat Phantom
SAD SDDAC SSDAC SSDFLAT

Linac 100 89.6 86.7 86.3
TomoTherapy 85 74.6 71.7 71.3
CyberKnife 80 69.6 66.7 66.3
Note: all values are in cm.
Absolute Dose Calibration Procedure

1 Acquire the known dose in an open field with the array at a depth where the dose is known
from an earlier measurement (such as TG-51) with an ion chamber whose calibration is trace-
able to an absolute dosimetry standard, such as NIST (National Institute of Standards and
Technology). See Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions on page 29.
There are three ways to determine the dose at the ArcCHECK calibration depth (described in
Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions on page 29).
• Set up a water-equivalent flat phantom with an ionization chamber at the calibration
depth.
• Model the water-equivalent flat phantom in the TPS and identify the dose at the
calibration depth.
• Model the ArcCHECK phantom in the TPS and identify the dose at the calibration depth.
Ideally, the result for all three methods should be within 0.5%. If so, the result of any of the
three methods can be used, but it is recommended to use the phantom with ionization
chamber result. If the results for these three methods disagree by more than 1%, identify the
cause of disagreement (model density, daily variation, ion chamber calibration).
If TPS dose calculated on ArcCHECK phantom or on water-equivalent flat phantom is used,
the TPS dose may need to be adjusted for any difference in linac output at the time of
calibration.
2 If desired, insert a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory in the ArcCHECK center cavity.
• Do not insert a radiation detector adapter in the CavityPlug or MultiPlug.
• For MultiPlug, use only the solid PMMA inserts.
3 If an array calibration is not loaded, load an array calibration file (see Loading an Array
Calibration on page 33).
4 Select Setup > Calibrate Dose. The ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box opens.
Figure 4-19. ArcCHECK Dose Calibration Dialog Box
5 Set up the ArcCHECK phantom as described in Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions on

page 29 and as described in the on-screen instructions. Use the same field size and MU
setting as in Step 1.
Note: The instructions in the Dose Calibration dialog box are correct for a conventional
linear accelerator. TomoTherapy or CyberKnife users should use the instructions in
Absolute Dose Calibration Conditions on page 29 instead.
For screen details, see Dose Calibration Dialog Box on page 183.
6 Enter the known dose from Step 1 in the dose calibration dialog box.
7 Enter the energy to associate with this known dose and dose calibration.
8 If desired, enter comments about the dose calibration, such as the method used to acquire
the known dose.
9 If the serial number is not displayed in the dialog box automatically, enter the ArcCHECK serial
number.
10 Click Start then turn on the beam.
11 When the beam turns off, click Stop. The ‘Measurement Parameters’ dialog box is displayed.
Required: Select the delivery system manufacturer.
Optional: Select this box if a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory

is inserted. Use of a CavityPlug or MultiPlug for dose calibration
is recommended, but not mandatory.
Not required for Dose Calibration.
a. Select the delivery system manufacturer.

TomoTherapy users: Select manufacturer = TomoTherapy but do not select an RT Plan
file or the Device Electronics Facing Gantry checkbox. The RT Plan file and device ori-
entation are used to apply angle-dependent corrections, which are not relevant to
absolute dose calibration.
Absolute Dose Calibration 31

b. Select the beam energy. If the delivered energy does not match any of the selections,
select the closest energy. If using a Flattening Filter Free (FFF) energy, then select the
energy with the same or closest nominal energy (e.g. 6 MV for 6FFF).
c. If a CavityPlug or MultiPlug was inserted in the ArcCHECK during absolute dose calibra-
tion, select the CavityPlug Inserted checkbox.
d. Click OK. The ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box is displayed.
12 Click Add Dose Calibration to add the dose calibration to the Current Calibrations list. If this
will be the default dose calibration, click Set as Default.
13 Click Close to exit.
Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration

See Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration on page 33.
Applying an Absolute Dose Calibration

A dose calibration can be applied to a measurement that did not use one previously or to change
the dose calibration that is currently in use.
1 Open a device measurement.
2 Select a dose calibration in the Dose toolbar.
3 Right-click in the device measurement and select Apply Dose Calibration from the context
menu.
4 When prompted for confirmation, click Yes to apply or No to discard the changes.
5 After applying, save the dose calibration. You can overwrite the previous dose calibration or
select a new name to create a new dose calibration.
Selecting a Default Absolute Dose Calibration

A dose calibration can be selected to load automatically at software startup.
2 Highlight one of the current calibrations then click Set as Default.
Deleting an Absolute Dose Calibration

2 Highlight one of the current calibrations then click Remove.
3 When prompted for confirmation, click Yes to apply or No to discard the changes.
5 Measurement
Loading an Array Calibration
1 Click Load Array Calibration in the Calibration toolbar. The ‘Load Array Calibration File’
dialog box opens.
2 Navigate to the location where your array calibration files (.cal) are stored. The default path is
C:\SNC\SNC Patient\factors\<serial number>.
3 Select the desired array calibration then click Open. The array calibration filename is displayed
in the Calibration toolbar.
Load the factory default array calibration or a user-created array calibration. Factory array
calibration is performed at 6 MV. As described in Array Calibration Conditions on page 18, it
is recommended to perform one array calibration per beam energy for optimal results.
CAUTION: Applying the wrong array calibration file will cause erroneous results.
Applying Array Calibration to an Existing Measurement
Note: An array calibration can be applied to an existing ArcCHECK measurement

provided that the measurement was collected with an array calibration loaded.
Applying an array calibration to an existing ArcCHECK measurement changes the resulting values
as follows.
• A ratio is applied to each array calibration value (new value/old value).
• Corrected counts are not changed since the AD and ID values from the previous array calibra-
tion have already been applied.
Loading an Absolute Dose Calibration
Click the down arrow in the Dose toolbar then select the desired dose calibration from the list.
CAUTION: Applying the wrong dose calibration will cause erroneous results.
Acquiring a Measurement
Inherent Buildup and Physical Depth

The inherent buildup from the outer surface of the ArcCHECK to the detector junction (outer
cylinder) is 3.3 ± 0.1 g/cm2.
The outer and inner cylinders are constructed of PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate); both cylinders
have a physical thickness of 2.9 ± 0.1 cm.
Procedure
Before measurement, close non-essential applications such as e-mail, web browsing, streaming
video, etc; ArcCHECK data acquisition is the primary purpose of CPU processing and should not
be compromised by other resource intensive applications.
1 If required for the intended QA measurement, insert a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory in
the ArcCHECK center cavity. See Accessories on page 197.
2 Place the ArcCHECK in the measurement position as described in Positioning on page 13.
Loading an Array Calibration 33

Note: If the measured dataset is acquired with the ArcCHECK electronics toward the
gantry, as opposed to the couch foot, the DICOM RT DOSE import filter must be
inverted in Program Preferences before importing planned dose. See TomoTherapy on
page 37 for instructions to invert the import filter.
3 Verify that the desired correction factors and ArcCHECK options are enabled in Program
Preferences (see Program Preferences on page 178.) ArcCHECK correction factors cannot be
applied to completed measurements.
4 If a patient plan exists for this patient, select the patient plan using the drop-down list in the
main toolbar. When a patient plan is selected before measurement, the patient plan
‘Measured’ directory is automatically selected as the file save location.
For instructions to create a patient plan, see Creating a New Patient Plan on page 75.
5 If the Background toolbar displays ”No” in red text, select Setup > Collect Background,
select a background period and then click Collect.
6 Click Start.
7 When the status box displays ‘Waiting for beam’, deliver the plan. The status box displays
“Collecting data”.
8 When the beam turns off, click Stop. The ‘Measurement Parameters’ dialog box opens.
Note: To stop the measurement and disconnect the ArcCHECK at this time while
post-measurement processing completes, right-click Stop and select Stop and
Disconnect Device. For more information, see Main Toolbar on page 174..
Required: Select the delivery system.
Required: Only select if a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory is

inserted.
Optional: If an ion chamber is inserted in the MultiPlug or Cavi-
tyPlug accessory, enter the cavity dose.

a. Select the delivery system manufacturer and beam energy. These fields are required to
apply the appropriate post-measurement correction factors. For details, see Post Mea-
surement Processing on page 145.
TomoTherapy users: Select manufacturer = TomoTherapy and then select an RT Plan
file. The RT Plan and device orientation information are used to apply angle-dependent
corrections.
• If the ArcCHECK is inverted (electronics toward the gantry), check the Device Elec-
tronics Facing Gantry checkbox.
b. If the delivered energy does not match any of the selections, select the closest energy.
If using a Flattening Filter Free (FFF) energy, select the energy with the same or closest
nominal energy (e.g. 6 MV for 6FFF).
c. If a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory was used during this measurement, select the
Cavity Plug Inserted checkbox.
d. If an ion chamber or diode detector was inserted in the CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory
during the measurement, enter the cavity dose. The cavity dose is saved in the measured
file and displayed on the report; it is not used in calculations or analysis.
e. Click OK.
9 Post-measurement processing begins. When complete, the Save Data dialog box is
displayed. If the dialog box does not open, select File > Save > Device Measured.
34 Section 5. Measurement
10 The default file name is the current date with an alpha character (for example: 29-Sep-2017-A).
Modify the file name to include all relevant information.
WARNING: Modify the file name to include the patient ID, plan name, and the date the
QA measurement was collected as well as any other relevant information.
11 Select the location where the measurement will be saved.

• If a patient plan was selected prior to measurement, the default file save location is the
‘MapCHECK Measured’ directory in the patient plan.
• If a patient plan was not selected prior to measurement, the default file save location is
‘Data’ in the SNC Patient application directory (C:\SNC\SNC Patient\Data).
• If preferred, browse to a different location.
12 Click Save to save the measurement. The measurement results appear in Set 1.
• The measurement is displayed as a flat (2D) array; 0 cm on the Y axis represents the
AXIAL marker and 0 cm on the X axis represents the SAGITTAL marker.
Angle
0 cm on Y axis
represents the
AXIAL marker
0 cm on X axis represents the SAGITTAL marker
Figure 5-2. Example of ArcCHECK Measurement Results
Note: Backup all measurements on a regular basis.
Device Measured Files
Three files are saved for each ArcCHECK measurement, a multi-frame (movie) file (*.acm), a movie
lite file (*.acml), and an integrated file (*.txt).
• Movie — ASCII file that contains data from each diode for each update. Each update con-
tains the total integrated raw count of each diode since the start of the measurement.
Each update includes ‘Beam On’ status, virtual inclinometer angle, and corrected angle.
• Movie lite — binary file that contains calculated gantry angles for each measurement. To
create a movie lite file that can be used with 3DVH, the measurement must be collected
with a solid PMMA accessory in the ArcCHECK cavity.
• Integrated — tab-delimited text file that integrates raw values for each diode.
For details about these file types, see ArcCHECK File Formats on page 188.
Device Measured Files 35

36 Section 5. Measurement
6 Import Planned Dose
Introduction
This section provides instructions to import DICOM files from a treatment planning system for
comparison to ArcCHECK measured files. The import filter extracts a cylindrical dose plane from
the imported 3D volume for direct dose comparison with the measured values.
Exporting DICOM Files from the TPS
When performing the patient specific QA test, the clinician processes the ArcCHECK phantom in
the treatment planning system (TPS) in a manner that enables the TPS to compute the dose
distribution in the phantom, defined by its radiological characteristics (resulting either from a CT
scan or predefined geometry and material). The TPS dose computation uses the patient’s
intended treatment plan that results in a fluence from the radiation machine. This fluence is used
by the TPS to calculate the dose delivered in the ArcCHECK phantom, thereby making it a
comparable data object to the ArcCHECK measurement. The comparable data is exported from
the TPS in DICOM format. Refer to your TPS vendor documentation for DICOM file export
instructions. Refer to your TPS vendor documentation for file export instructions. For instructions
to acquire ArcCHECK CT images, see ArcCHECK Images on page 40.
Note: If you have a Pinnacle3® treatment planning system and the QA plan uses a
non-zero couch angle or if the patient is not oriented Head First Supine (HFS), see Tech-
nical Bulletin 05-14, Pinnacle Scripts for ArcCHECK. This Technical Bulletin is available
on the Sun Nuclear Support website, www.sunnuclear.com/support (see Support
Website on page 228.)
Importing Planned Dose
This procedure extracts a cylindrical dose plane from the TPS 3D dose volume for direct
comparison against ArcCHECK measured data. The software builds a cylinder outward from the
isocenter of the 3D dose volume. If the ArcCHECK is shifted in the IEC-Y direction during
measurement, then the isocenter shift needs to be applied during ArcCHECK cylinder extraction.
Select the Show isocenter coordinates option when loading the TPS data and then modify the
isocenter Y coordinate to compensate for the shift.
Note: To extract ArcCHECK dose correctly, the beam isocenter must coincide with the
center of the ArcCHECK.
WARNING: The grid spacing of the imported TPS data must be <= 4 mm. The SNC
Patient software displays a warning if the grid spacing is > 3 mm and <= 4 mm, and
it prevents loading if > 4 mm. The software interpolates TPS data to 1 mm for DTA
and Gamma analysis; therefore interpolation in high dose gradient regions is more
accurate with initial grid spacing of <=3 mm.
TomoTherapy
If the measured dataset is acquired with the ArcCHECK electronics toward the gantry (as opposed
to toward the couch foot), the DICOM RTDose Invert preference must be set before importing
planned dose.
1 Select Setup > Program Preferences > Files tab.
2 Under Treatment Plan Importing, select DICOM RTDOSE.
Introduction 37
3 Select the Invert X and Invert Y boxes and then click Set. Ensure that two green checkmarks
appear next to DICOM RTDOSE, as shown in the following figure.
4 Click OK to save the changes.
5 Proceed to the import planned dose procedure below.
Green checkmarks
next to
DICOM RTDOSE
Figure 6-1. Invert X and Invert Y selected for DICOM RTDOSE
Procedure
1 In the TPS software, export the dose map to DICOM files. For instructions, see your TPS ven-
dor documentation.
2 Transfer the DICOM files to the computer where SNC Patient is installed. If a patient plan
exists for this patient, add the DICOM files to the patient plan (see Adding Files to a Patient
Plan on page 76), or, copy the files to another directory on the computer (the default is
C:\SNC\SNC Patient\Data.)
3 If DICOM files are stored in a patient plan, select the patient plan using the drop-down list in
the main SNC Patient toolbar.
4 Right-click in Set 2 and select Open ArcCHECK Planned Dose from the context menu, or
select File > Open > DataSet 2> ArcCHECK Planned Dose from the menu. The ‘Open
ArcCHECK QA Plan Data’ dialog box is displayed.
Note: The “Open DICOM Plan/Dose File Set” option is for planar dose comparison and
cannot be used to extract cylindrical dose for comparison to ArcCHECK.
Figure 6-2. Open ArcCHECK QA Plan Data
5 Click the file folder icon next to the QA Phantom RT Dose File box to display the ‘Select RT
Dose File’ dialog box. Navigate to the desired DICOM RT Dose file, select it, and then click
Open.
38 Section 6. Import Planned Dose

6 If you have a DICOM RT Plan file, click the file folder icon next to the QA Phantom RT Plan
File box to display the ‘Select RT Plan File’ dialog box. Then, navigate to the desired DICOM
RT Plan file, select it, and click Open.
7 If the ArcCHECK is shifted in the IEC -Y direction during measurement, select Show isocenter
coordinates to display the current coordinates in the RT Plan file and then modify the Y
coordinate to compensate for the shift.
8 Click OK.
• If DICOM RT Plan file was not selected, the software will prompt for the isocenter
coordinates. Enter the coordinates and then click OK.
• If the software prompts for MU or scaling factor, enter the required information to
convert the values to dose delivered to the ArcCHECK. If your file already contains
absolute dose values for a single fraction, enter a value of 1; if your file contains relative
values, enter the MU; if your file contains dose values that must be scaled, enter the
appropriate scaling factor. For example, if the file contains total dose for all fractions, the
scaling factor is 1/(number of fractions). The default scaling factor is 1.0.
Note: Pinnacle dose files are often in relative values and require MU.
• The ‘ArcCHECK Import Utility’ dialog box is displayed briefly while the program extracts
the ArcCHECK dose map and then the data is displayed in Set 2.
Figure 6-3. Example of ArcCHECK Import Utility Dialog Box
SunCOM Format
The ArcCHECK Import Utility extraction process automatically saves a copy of the RT Dose in
SunCOM format (*.snc) and appends the file name with “AC_EXTRACTED”. The SunCOM file is
saved in the same directory as the RT Dose. For SunCOM file specifications, see SunCOM File on
page 194.
If the RT Dose/Plan set does not load or extract correctly, open the SunCOM file as follows:
1 Right-click in Set 2 and select Open Planned Dose/Image Data from the context menu. The
‘Open QA Plan Data’ dialog box is displayed.
2 Navigate to the directory where the DICOM RT Dose file is stored and select the *.snc file.
3 Choose SunCOM (*.*) from the ‘Files of Type’ list then click Open.
Importing Planned Dose 39

ArcCHECK Images
Computed Tomography (CT) machines are not usually capable of scanning ArcCHECK with good
results due to high Z materials in the ArcCHECK. Additionally, some treatment planning systems
are not good at calculating dose in a phantom with high Z heterogeneities.
To resolve these issues, starting with SNC Patient software version 6.0, heterogeneity correction
factors can be applied to the ArcCHECK measurement (see Post Measurement Processing on
page 145.) To take advantage of the heterogeneity correction for ArcCHECK, the ArcCHECK
should be treated as a homogeneous phantom in the treatment planning system.
ArcCHECK Images From Sun Nuclear

CT images of the ArcCHECK can be downloaded from the Sun Nuclear Support website for use in
the treatment planning system. The downloads are separated into two groups, images for ‘SNC
Patient software v6.0.0 or later’ and images for ‘SNC Patient software prior to v6.0.0’.
• The ‘SNC Patient software v6.0.0 or later’ CT downloads contain virtual CT phantom images
that take advantage of the heterogeneity correction factors in SNC Patient v6.0.0 or later.
• When using the virtual CT images provided by Sun Nuclear it is not necessary to model
any deviations from the uniform density. This includes differences due to a radiation
detector inserted in the center of the ArcCHECK; the impact of such differences are small
and the phantom should still be modeled as uniform. Modeling internal heterogeneities
for the dose calculation to ArcCHECK will actually cause deviations in matching TPS cal-
culations to measurements.
• The virtual CT downloads are available in 27 cm and 50 cm configurations. The 50 cm
images are used to model a phantom in the treatment planning system that can be com-
pared with longer (merged) ArcCHECK measurements.
• The virtual CT downloads are available in 1 cm and 2 cm cradle rod configurations. Select
the same cradle rod diameter that will be used during ArcCHECK measurement, other-
wise the TPS calculated and device measured results will not match.
• The virtual CT downloads labeled “with plug” have uniform density through the diode
array area and the center cavity. When using these images, it is recommended to over-
ride the phantom density with the uniform bulk density correction factor for PMMA,
which is an option offered by most TPS vendors. The density assignment may vary with
the TPS algorithms, versions, energy, etc. Users should adjust the uniform bulk density
for their respective TPS to yield optimal results. For the proper use of ArcCHECK density
in the following treatment planning systems: Eclipse® (Varian), XiO® (CMS/Elekta),
Monaco® (CMS/Elekta), Pinnacle3® (Philips), TomoTherapy® (Accuray), and OnCentra®
(Nucletron), see ArcCHECK Density on page 43.
• For the virtual CT downloads labeled ‘without plug’ (indicating no cavity accessory), con-
tour the center cavity and assign density of air.
• The ‘SNC Patient software prior to v6.0.0’ CT downloads require modeling in the treatment
planning system. One approach is to use the calibrated CT HU to electron density conversion
table that is provided with each download for in-phantom dose calculations on the TPS.
Another approach is to use the CT images for contouring only and apply a uniform bulk den-
sity correction factor.
• If using MV-CT Data ‘with plug’ images, Sun Nuclear recommends overriding the phan-
tom density with the uniform bulk density correction factor for PMMA, which is an option
offered by most TPS vendors. However, the density assignment may vary with the TPS
algorithms, versions, energy, etc. Users should adjust the uniform bulk density for their
respective TPS to yield optimal results.
• To model the ArcCHECK Cradle, the 2 cm PVC cradle rod has a density of 1.4 g/cm3.
• If using MV-CT Data ‘without plug’ images (no cavity accessory), contour the cavity and
assign density of air.
• For the proper use of ArcCHECK density in the following treatment planning systems:
Eclipse™ (Varian), XiO® (CMS/Elekta), Monaco® (CMS/Elekta), Pinnacle3® (Philips),
TomoTherapy® (Accuray), and OnCentra® (Nucletron), see ArcCHECK Density on
page 43.

PMMA and Air, Densities
The densities of PMMA and air are as follows:
• Diode array section PMMA (physical density) = 1.1836 g/cm3
• Diode array section PMMA (scaled density1) = 1.150 g/cm3
• Center cavity, empty, air (physical density) = 0.00129 g/cm3
• Center cavity, empty, air (scaled density1) = ~0.001 g/cm3
Note: ArcCHECK cavity accessories shipped after May 2012 are constructed of
PMMA. If you have an earlier cavity accessory that is constructed of RW3, contour the
center cavity and assign a (uniform) bulk density of 1.045 g/cm3 (physical).
Collecting Your Own ArcCHECK Images

Note: The most expedient and recommended method is to download the
preconfigured ArcCHECK CT images from the Sun Nuclear Support website. The CT
data sets have known isocenter coordinates to eliminate guesswork and positioning
errors.
If you prefer to scan your own ArcCHECK images, it is recommended to collect MV CT images
instead of kV CT images since kV CT is known to have increased artifacts for phantoms with high-Z
materials, such as those used in the ArcCHECK phantom (as shown in the figure below). Artifacts
make the HU to density conversion inaccurate. Further, it is recommended to use the MV-CT
images for contouring only and then apply a bulk density correction factor.
kV CT Image MV CT Image
Figure 6-4. kV CT and MV CT Images Showing Increased Artifacts in kV CT
CAUTION: Do NOT use the HU to electron density conversion tables in the Sun
Nuclear provided MV CT image downloads to edit a kV CT curve used for patient
calculations.
Additionally, when collecting your own images of ArcCHECK, ensure that the isocenter is exactly
in the middle of the ArcCHECK and write down the isocenter coordinates so they can be entered
when importing the DICOM RT files into the Sun Nuclear SNC Patient software. The center of the
ArcCHECK will not always coincide with the center of the machine bore. For example, as shown
in the below figure, the isocenter on a TomoTherapy machine is typically at the center of the bore,
which might end up toward the posterior side of the ArcCHECK or not in the ArcCHECK at all.
1 Scaled density is the multiplication of the physical density and the ratio of the electron density between the ma-
terial and water.
ArcCHECK Images 41
Figure 6-5. Example of ArcCHECK scans when the isocenter is at the center of the machine bore
1 To aid in finding the isocenter position, place 3 fiducial markers (BBs) on the ArcCHECK (left,
right, and top).
2 When importing the images, find the BBs on the scan and place a point there to identify the
isocenter.
3 Record the DICOM coordinates of the isocenter point.
Note: For Pinnacle software version 8.0 and earlier, export the plan to R&V to find the
point’s DICOM coordinates.
Note: The isocenter coordinates will be the same for every plan copied to this phan-
tom. That is, the DICOM coordinates of the center of the ArcCHECK when it was
scanned depends on the CT data set and that CT data set only. Downloading the Sun
Nuclear scanned images eliminates guessing about the coordinates.

ArcCHECK Density
Note: This section is copied from Application Note 05-12, ArcCHECK Density. The
information in this section is current as of the date on page ii of this guide. A more
current version of the Application Note may be available on the Sun Nuclear Support
website (see Support Website on page 228.)
This application note addresses the proper use of ArcCHECK density used in the Treatment
Planning System (TPS). This application note is applicable to the following treatment planning
systems: Eclipse™ (Varian), XiO® (CMS/Elekta), Monaco® (CMS/Elekta), Pinnacle3 (Philips),
TomoTherapy® (Accuray), and OnCentra® (Nucletron).
Background
Photon interactions for the energy ranges and in the media encountered with clinical radiation
therapy photon beams are dominated by the Compton effect. The Compton cross section (i.e.,
probability of a photon interacting via the Compton effect) is proportional to the electron density
of the medium.1 The electron density of a material is very similar for most media with the notable
exception of those media that contain a significant amount of hydrogen. This is due to the fact
that the ratio of the atomic number (Z) to atomic weight (A) is 1.0 for hydrogen, while it is
approximately 0.5 for all other elements that comprise human tissues, implying that a given
medium such as acrylic or PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) with a lower content of hydrogen
relative to a second medium (e.g., water) will have a lower electron density relative to the second
medium even though its physical density can be greater (and vice versa). Thus the fraction of
hydrogen in a given medium (e.g., human tissue, bone) is an important consideration in correctly
determining the dose deposited by a megavoltage photon beam. The hydrogen content is
approximately 11.2% for water, 10.1% in human soft tissues, 11.4% for adipose, 3.4% for bone,
and 8.0% for PMMA (i.e., ArcCHECK base material).
In a TPS, the virtual patient model is built either from contours (by assigning relative electron
density to the exterior contour and sub-volumes if applicable) or more commonly using a 3D
volume built from the input CT axial images. In the latter case, CT numbers are converted to the
applicable densities using lookup tables (for example, with CT-to-ED tables, derived and entered
by the user) specific to the CT scanner. The 3D virtual patient model is then the subject of the dose
calculation by the TPS.
Dose calculation for Convolution/Superposition algorithms can be divided into two general steps:
(1) attenuation of the beam through the virtual patient model for each beam angle, followed by (2)
convolution (i.e., spreading) of the dose from all primary photon interaction sites. A Monte
Carlo-generated look-up table computed in water is utilized for the former step while Monte
Carlo-generated kernels computed in water are used for the latter step. Heterogeneities are
handled by scaling the physical pathlength of the photon through each volume element of the
virtual patient model by the density of the volume element.
The Problem
In a thorough study on the topic by Seco and Evans,2 it was shown that utilizing physical density
(or mass density) for pathlength scaling results in an underestimation of the dose by the TPS for
most media to varying degree. The reason for this is due to the difference in hydrogen content of
the media relative to water, which again has a higher electron density than most materials used in
radiotherapy beam measurements. When physical density is used, the radiation pathlength is
overestimated, leading to an overestimation of beam attenuation and underestimated of dose
deposited. The amount of overestimation for PMMA (i.e., ArcCHECK) varies by depth and is
approximately 1% for the most shallow entrance detector and 4% for the most distal exit detector
when physical density is used.
1 Attix, Frank H., Introduction to Radiological Physics and Dosimetry, New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1986.
2 Seco J. and Evans P.M., "Assessing the effect of electron density in photon dose calculations", Med Phys., 33(2),
2006, 540-552.
ArcCHECK Density 43
The Solution
As recommended by AAPM Task Group 65 (Report Number 85):1
"Since most interactions [of megavoltage photons with a given medium] are Compton events,
[density] scaling should be done in accordance with the electron density relative to water,
rather than mass density."
In support of this point, Seco and Evans illustrated that when the physical density is scaled by the
ratio of the material electron density to the electron density of water,2 Compton interactions are
more accurately considered and results are significantly improved: the variance between
computed and expected results for all depths reduced to within 0.2% for PMMA.
In practice, the density scaling referred to by the Task Group 65 is defined by:
 e- med
 e - scaled med =  med  --------------------
 e- water
Where:
e- scaled, med is the physical density of the medium scaled by the electron density ratio of
medium: water [g/cm3]
med is the physical density of the medium [g/cm3]
e-,med is the electron density of the medium [e-/g]
e-,water is the electron density of water (i.e., 3.343 x 1023 e-/g)
Substituting electron density values1 for PMMA and water results in:
23
 3.248  10 e-  g 
 e-scaled PMMA =  med  -------------------------------------------------
23
- =  med  0.9716
3.343  10 e-  g
This leaves defining the value for the physical density of the medium, in this case, PMMA for
ArcCHECK. Sun Nuclear has measured a representative large sample set of ArcCHECK shells and
inserts to determine the correct PMMA physical density and it's variability due to manufacturing
process variations and has determined that the best value to use (i.e., the mean) is 1.1836 g/cm3,
implying e- scaled, PMMA of 1.150 g/cm3.
The scaled density range based on the measured variation was [1.147, 1.153]. In this case, the
lower and upper limit correspond to the 2 sigma values (assuming a Gaussian standard
distribution due to random manufacturing process variation).
Recommendations
The density assignment or the correction for inhomogeneity may vary with the TPS algorithms,
versions, energy etc. The user should refer to the TPS manual or contact the vendor for more
information.
• Use a Virtual CT phantom image in the TPS for the ArcCHECK image. Internal ArcCHECK
calibrations have corrections that make it act like a true homogeneous PMMA dosimeter, so
it is not necessary to model any deviations from the uniform density. This includes differences
due to a radiation detector inserted in the center of the ArcCHECK; the impact of such
differences are small and the phantom should still be modeled as uniform. Modeling internal
heterogeneities for the dose calculation to ArcCHECK will actually cause deviations in
matching TPS calculations to measurements.
• For TPS algorithms such as Eclipse (Varian) PBC and AAA, XiO (CMS/Elekta), and
TomoTherapy (Accuray), use a scaled density value of 1.150 g/cm3 when performing density
substitution for the ArcCHECK image in the TPS.
• For some treatment planning systems such as Eclipse (Varian) AcurosXB and eMC, the
material mass density of 1.1836 g/cm3 may be required.
1 Papanikolaou N, Battista J, Boyer A, Kappas C, Klein E, Mackie TR, Sharpe M, Van Dyk J, "Tissue Inhomogeneity
Corrections for Megavoltage Photon Beams", Madison: Medical Physics Publishing, 2004.
2 This electron density ratio is sometimes referred to as relative electron density.

• Some treatment planning systems, such as Pinnacle3, request entry of the material mass
density. However, it has been reported that the scaled mass density of 1.150 g/cm3 for PMMA
will result in more accurate dose calculations.1
• For some treatment planning systems, such as Eclipse, you may have to iteratively enter a
Hounsfield Unit (HU) value until the 1.150 g/cm3 (for PBC and AAA) or 1.1836 g/cm3 (for
AcurosXB and eMC) density level is reached. The resultant HU value will be dependent upon
the CT calibration curve for the particular CT scanner and will thus not be related to the HU
value used for a different CT scanner.
• For the Monaco CMS/Elekta TPS, which uses Monte Carlo dose calculation, see Electron Den-
sity Correction for Monaco below.
If results are not satisfactory when using the recommended density range, a potential error in
other parts of the planning process might be present and should be investigated. See
Troubleshooting on page 48.
Electron Density Correction for Monaco

Note: This section describes Sun Nuclear’s recommendation for correcting the
electron density to the ArcCHECK phantom within Monaco CMS. Sun Nuclear cannot
support Monaco or Elekta related issues beyond the steps provided below. Should you
have questions which pertain to the use or functionality of Monaco or an Elekta
product, please contact Elekta.
The Monaco TPS, which uses Monte Carlo methods, refers to human tissue specific attenuation
coefficients and stopping powers to calculate the dose per voxel at random iterations through the
dose grid. As a result, Monaco will prescribe a dose to the ArcCHECK phantom that is more similar
to a dose distribution for a soft bone-like tissue. Stopping powers are related to the material
through which the radiation beam is passing, and, more significant to dose calculation, it is directly
proportional to the energy spectrum of the specific linac. Therefore, if the TPS calculates dose
using stopping powers associated to different material, then it also calculates dose to that
different material. This will directly cause inaccuracies in the calculation of the dose distribution
corresponding to PMMA. In order to use 3DVH or SNC Patient software to accurately compare the
measured dose distribution within the patient volume to the patient plan calculated by Monaco,
the user is required to make changes within their Monaco TPS specifically to the virtual ArcCHECK
phantom.
Method
For Monaco to correctly calculate the dose distribution within the virtual ArcCHECK phantom the
proper stopping powers need to be selected. This is done by adjusting the scaled density value,
or “relative electron density” (RED) in Monaco, to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom until the TPS
calculation agrees well with the exit/entrance dose calculated by 3DVH or SNC Patient software.
This adjustment will cause minimal change to the attenuation of the photon beam, yet will force
Monaco to select stopping powers appropriate for PMMA. The steps below are provided as a
guide for modifying the relative electron density to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom to assist
Monaco in calculating the correct dose distribution in PMMA for the ArcCHECK device.
Procedure
1 Import the virtual ArcCHECK phantom, provided by Sun Nuclear, into Monaco TPS as a QA
phantom.
2 Create an external structure around the phantom itself.
3 Set a relative electron density (the scaled density) to the external structure of 1.15 g/cm3.
4 Apply calculation points to the ArcCHECK isocenter, anterior diode (10.45 cm upstream) and
posterior diode (10.45 cm downstream).
5 Create a 6 MV AP 10x10 cm2 field to the ArcCHECK virtual phantom within Monaco and
prescribe 200 cGy or 200 MU to the calculation point at isocenter. Set the voxel dimensions
to 2 mm x 2 mm x 2 mm if possible, or the next smallest voxel volume. Be sure to also
calculate with a large number of iterations.
1 J. Kozelka et al., "Optimizing the accuracy of a helical diode array dosimeter: A comprehensive calibration meth-
odology coupled with a novel virtual inclinometer," Med. Phys. 38, 5021-5032 (2011)
ArcCHECK Density 45
Note: Monaco users who also want to collect an ion chamber measurement at the
isocenter of the ArcCHECK can either A) scale the ion chamber dose value from water
to medium using the restricted collision mass stopping power ratio from water to
medium (see footnote a below), or B) in Monaco, scale the dose from medium to
water. Either of these methods will ensure that the isocenter dose calculation is
consistent with the ion chamber measurement. However, the method that you choose
must be consistent throughout your patient QA process so that the dosimetric
characteristics of the virtual phantom within Monaco are consistent with the
dosimetric characteristics measured by the ArcCHECK. A consistency check can be
done using a 10x10 field.
a. J. Seuntjens, M. Olivares, M. Evans, and E. Podgorsak, “Absorbed dose to water reference dosimetry using
solid phantoms in the context of absorbed-dose protocols. “Med Phys. 32(9), 2945-2953 (2005).
6 Use the prescribed MU and dose at the anterior diode to create a dose calibration in Monaco
to the ArcCHECK device for 6 MV.
7 Export the RT Dose and RT Plan files from the ArcCHECK virtual phantom for use in 3DVH or
SNC Patient software.
8 Create a new dose calibration in SNC Patient using the dose from step 6, and use this dose
calibration file for the next measurement.
9 Measure and save a 6 MV AP 10x10 cm2 field with 200 MU or 200 cGy at isocenter to the
ArcCHECK device.
10 The rest of the steps in this procedure can be performed using 3DVH or SNC Patient software.
For the steps to use 3DVH software, proceed to step 11. For SNC Patient software, proceed
to step 19.
3DVH Software
11 Load the files from step 7, and the *.acml measurement from step 9 into 3DVH as a Virtual
Gel™ using the correct PDP model.
12 Compare the Virtual Gel™ to the Monaco calculated dose distribution using parameters: 2%
difference / 2 mm / 10% threshold / local comparison (Global unchecked). The passing rate
should be around 95% and no less than 90%.
13 For users with 3DVH version 3.1, select Dose Profiles > ArcCHECK Vertical Down (with
Exit/Entry, Iso/Entry Ratios). The exit/entrance dose ratio will automatically display for the
reference and comparison as the third value in parenthesis, respectively. Skip step 14 and
proceed to step 15.
For users with 3DVH version 3.0, select Tools > Dose Profiles > ArcCHECK Vertical Down
(with Exit/Entry, Iso/Entry Ratios). The exit/entrance dose ratio will automatically display for
the reference and comparison as the third value in parenthesis, respectively. Skip step 14 and
proceed to step 15.
For users with 3DVH version 2.2.1 or lower, using the dose profile measurement tool,
measure an anterior to posterior (depth scan) profile. The comparison profile should overlap
the reference profile within ±1% along the central axis region when comparing the Virtual
Gel™ to the Monaco calculated dose distribution. Proceed to step 14.
14 This step is only for users with 3DVH version 2.2.1 or lower. Using the Navigation tool, sample
and compare the dose value for the exit and entrance diodes located at Z = -104.5 mm and
104.5 mm, respectively, along the central axis of the beam (i.e., X=0, Y=0). Measure the
exit/entrance dose ratio. For a 10 x 10 cm AP beam at 6 MV, the ratio should be approximately
0.27 for a Varian linac and 0.28 for an Elekta linac.

15 The comparison's exit/entrance dose value should fall within 1% from the reference's
exit/entrance dose value.
a. If the exit/entrance dose in the reference is less than the comparison, reduce the relative
electron density to the external structure for the virtual ArcCHECK phantom.
b. If the exit/entrance dose in the reference is greater than the comparison, increase the
relative electron density to the external structure for the virtual ArcCHECK phantom.
c. If the comparison's exit/entrance dose value is within 1% from the reference's
exit/entrance dose value, continue to step 17.
d. RED adjustments should be done in increments of 0.01 g/cm3 in either direction and
should not exceed the range 1.14 - 1.16. This range is slightly larger than the
recommended range of [1.147, 1.153] (see The Solution on page 44), and is needed due
to the manner in which Monaco handles PMMA.
16 Re-calculate the 6 MV AP 10x10 cm2 field to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom within Monaco,
with 200 cGy or 200 MU prescribed to the isocenter using this new relative electron density
value and repeat steps 6 - 15.
17 Optional: Create and apply a new CT curve to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom. The new CT
curve should contain the following values only: (HU, relative electron density) = (-1000,
0.001), (-999, 0.002), and (217, RED with best exit/entrance dose agreement).
18 Repeat steps 5 - 15 to verify that the new table applies the correct stopping powers and
attenuation coefficients for Monte Carlo dose calculation. If the agreement is good within the
above mentioned margins, the virtual ArcCHECK phantom within Monaco is ready to use with
3DVH.
The procedure is complete.
SNC Patient Software

19 Load the ArcCHECK planned dose from step 7 and the *.txt file from step 9 into SNC Patient
software v6.4.1 or later.
20 Compare the measurement to the Monaco calculated ArcCHECK planned dose file set using
DTA parameters: 2% difference / 2 mm / 10% threshold / local comparison (Global
unchecked). The passing rate should be around 95% and no less than 90%.
21 Using the dose profile measurement tool, measure an X profile. The measured profile should
overlap the TPS calculated profile within ±1% along the central axis region.
22 Click the Chart/Data button which corresponds to the ArcCHECK planned dose file set. The
dose map should now be displayed as a spreadsheet of dose values.
23 Select Data Type = Dose.
24 Navigate to the posterior dose voxels of the ArcCHECK (-325, 0) and (325, 0), and record their
dose values from the spreadsheet.
25 Calculate the average dose value for the dose voxels (-325, 0) and (325, 0), as shown below.
D  exit 
26 Navigate to the anterior dose voxel of the ArcCHECK planned dose file set (0, 0), and record
the dose value from the spreadsheet, as shown below.
D  entry 
27 Calculate the exit/entrance dose ratio of the ArcCHECK planned dose file set using the
following equation. For a 10 x 10 cm AP beam at 6 MV, the ratio should be approximately 0.27
for a Varian linac and 0.28 for an Elekta linac.
exit- D  exit 
------------ = -----------------------
entry D  entry 
In SNC Patient software V6.4 or higher, the exit/entry dose ratio of the ArcCHECK
measurement is located below the Edit button on the left side of the Set 1 panel.
ArcCHECK Density 47
a. If the exit/entrance dose ratio to the TPS calculated ArcCHECK is less than the measured,
reduce the relative electron density to the external structure for the virtual ArcCHECK
phantom.
b. If the exit/entrance dose ratio to the TPS calculated ArcCHECK is greater than the
measured, increase the relative electron density to the external structure for the virtual
ArcCHECK phantom.
c. If the exit/entrance dose ratio to the TPS calculated ArcCHECK is within 1% from the
measured exit/entrance dose ratio, continue to step 29.
d. RED adjustments should be done in increments of 0.01 g/cm3 in either direction and
should not exceed the range 1.14 - 1.16. This range is slightly larger than the recom-
mended range of [1.147, 1.153] (as noted in The Solution on page 44), and is needed due
to the manner in which Monaco handles PMMA.
28 Re-calculate the 6 MV AP 10x10 cm2 field to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom within Monaco,
with 200 cGy or 200 MU prescribed to the isocenter using this new relative electron density
value and repeat steps 6 - 9 and 19 - 27.
29 Optional: Create and apply a new CT curve to the virtual ArcCHECK phantom. The new CT
curve should contain the following values only: (HU, relative electron density) = (-1000,
0.001), (-999, 0.002), and (217, RED with best exit/entrance dose agreement).
30 Repeat steps 5 - 9 and 19 - 27 to verify that the new table applies the correct stopping powers
and attenuation coefficients for Monte Carlo dose calculation. If the agreement is good within
the above mentioned margins, the virtual ArcCHECK phantom within Monaco is ready to use
with 3DVH.
The procedure is complete.
Troubleshooting
When a problem is uncovered with agreement between calculated and ArcCHECK measured
values, check the following items (all pertain to the absolute calibration process):
• If the flat phantom dose value was computed: Was the SSD established correctly? Was the
correct density value used for water? Was the correct point extracted from the measured
volume (i.e., 3.3 cm water-equivalent thickness from phantom surface)?
• If the flat phantom dose value was measured: Was the chamber at the proper depth of 3.3
cm water-equivalent thickness? Was the output for the accelerator high or low per the daily
output check for that day?
• Is the ArcCHECK level on the table? Are the laser or cross hairs correctly aligned on the
ArcCHECK? Is the gantry at IEC-zero degrees (beam pointing straight down)? Is there a
significant discrepancy between the outer diameter of the ArcCHECK and that from the
ArcCHECK image used by the TPS?
• If modeling the virtual patient using contours, did you assign the correct density to the Arc-
CHECK cradle rods? The density of the 2 cm PVC cradle rod is 1.4 g/cm3.
• Is the ratio of the entrance to exit diodes closest to the beam axis equal to the expected value
for the beam energy being used? If you have questions about collecting the exit/entrance ratio
data and the expected value, contact Sun Nuclear Support.
• Do the exit/entrance dose ratios between the TPS model of the ArcCHECK phantom and the
ArcCHECK measurement agree within 1%?
• The physical depth from the top surface is 2.85 cm at the entrance and 23.75 cm at the
exit at the central axis of the ArcCHECK.
• If the exit/entrance dose ratios do not agree closely, try adjusting the density of the Arc-
CHECK phantom up or down in increments of 0.01 g/cm3 until the exit/entrance dose
ratios agree to within 1%.
• If agreement within 1% cannot be reached as the density is adjusted, this could indicate
a problem with the HU-to-RED curve used in converting CT density to physical density.
Contact Sun Nuclear Support for assistance.

• If desired, a radiation detector can be inserted in the center of the CavityPlug or MultiPlug
accessory to verify that the TPS is properly calculating dose distribution in the ArcCHECK
phantom volume. For more information, see CavityPlug Accessory on page 197 or Multi-
Plug Accessory on page 199.
Note that the radiation detector dose may need to be corrected based on the treatment
planning system calculation method (dose-to-water or dose-to-medium). The difference
between these calculation methods is approximately 3% at the center of the ArcCHECK.
If the TPS is performing a dose-to-water calculation, no additional correction factor is nec-
essary when converting the ion chamber charge to dose. If the TPS is performing a
dose-to-PMMA calculation, a PMMA correction factor should be applied for the ion
chamber measurement to agree with the TPS. See Ion Chamber Measurements in Cavi-
tyPlug or MultiPlug on page 154.
• Was a kV CT used for heterogeneity corrections? If so, there are too many artifacts in kV CT
(due to small volumes of high-Z and air) that will cause calculation errors because the virtual
phantom density grid will inherit those artifacts caused by the Photoelectric Effect (and are
not germane to MV dose calculation). If you use a kV CT of your ArcCHECK, you should: (1)
accurately delineate the external contour and assign a bulk density (see Recommendations
on page 44), or (2) replace the kV CT with the homogeneous (virtual) CT provided by Sun
Nuclear that has all pixels of single density value for easy modeling of a homogeneous phan-
tom (see ArcCHECK Images From Sun Nuclear on page 40).
If the cause cannot be found, contact Sun Nuclear Support. Do not vary the ArcCHECK density in
an effort to correct for other potential artifacts in the treatment planning process.
ArcCHECK Density 49

7 Comparing Data
Comparing Device Measured with Planned
1 Load an ArcCHECK measurement in Set 1 and planned dose in Set 2.

• See Load Device Measured Data on page 60 and Importing Planned Dose on page 37.
2 In the Analysis toolbar, select the analysis type and criteria and then click Compare.
Compare button — click to compare Set 1 with Set 2.
Analysis Type:
• DTA/GC — selects Distance to Agreement or Gradient Compensation analysis. ‘GC’ is
only displayed if Gradient Compensation is enabled in Program Preferences.
•  — selects Gamma analysis.
• RD — selects Relative Dose mode.
• AD — selects Absolute Dose mode.
Analysis Criteria:
• TH (%) (threshold) — minimum dose percent value that must be met in either the
device measured or planned dose data for the point to be included in the analysis.
• Diff (%) — dose difference tolerance equal to or below which a point is considered
‘passing’ and beyond which a point is considered ‘failing’
• Distance (mm) — distance tolerance equal to or below which a point is considered
‘passing and beyond which a point is considered ‘failing’.
Comparison Results:
• %Pass — percentage of evaluated measurements points passing criteria.
• Pass — number of measurement points passing criteria.
• Fail — number of measurement points failing criteria.
• Total — measurement points within threshold.
Global % (Van Dyk % Difference) — available when absolute dose mode is selected. Check
the box to enable Global % difference, or uncheck to select local percent difference.
Calc Shift — calculates the best alignment between the detectors and the beam that
results in a lower number of failed points.
Figure 7-1. Analysis Panel Controls
For additional information about Global %, DTA, Gradient Compensation, or Gamma, see
Interpreting Results on page 153.
For additional information about analysis criteria, see Analysis Criteria on page 53.
To enable Gradient Compensation analysis, select the Use Gradient Compensation Analysis
option in Program Preferences. For details, see Program Preferences on page 178.
The comparison graph shows the detectors that failed the selected comparison criteria with
the following color code.
• Red points have measured dose values above TPS.
• Blue points have measured dose values below TPS.
3 If desired, click Calc Shift to find the best shift automatically. If a better shift is found, a dialog
box displays the proposed shift as well as the pass/fail information if the new shift is applied.
Click Accept to apply the calculated shift or Discard to return to the previous comparison.
When you apply the calculated shift, the applied shift values are displayed in the ‘CAX Offset’
panel in Set 2. For details about Calc Shift, see Calculated Shift on page 52.
Comparing Device Measured with Planned 51

If the comparison does not produce the desired results, see Eliminating Sources of Error on
page 153.
The comparison can be saved as a session, which will also save any shift that was applied. For
details, see Sessions on page 55.
Selecting Relative or Absolute Dose
Click AD or RD in the Analysis panel to select relative (normalized) or absolute dose mode.
When absolute dose mode is selected, SNC Patient software finds the dose difference between
each point in Set 1 and the corresponding point in Set 2 and then divides the dose difference by
the max dose if the Global % check box is selected, or by the local value if the Global % check
box is not selected. The local value is the dose of the corresponding point in Set 2.
When relative dose mode is selected, SNC Patient software normalizes the dose values in set 1
and set 2 to a dose value from set 1 and set 2, respectively, for the same location in space. This
location is selected by the software based upon the best pass rate. The software checks all dose
values that are above a certain threshold, based upon whether 2D or 3D analysis is applied (80%
for 2D and 60% for 3D) in finding the best pass rate.
If the normalization point is changed, you can set it to the maximum dose by clicking the Norm
button below Set 1 and selecting Max, or you can set it to a specific detector by clicking the Norm
button and selecting a detector in Set 1.
All device measured data contains relative dose; but absolute dose is only available if absolute
dose calibration has been applied to the relative dose values. See Absolute Dose Calibration on
page 29.
When the Set 1 or 2 panels are maximized, the RD and AD buttons appear in the left toolbar.
Calculated Shift
The Calc Shift button in the Compare panel toolbar is used to calculate a new “optimal” alignment
between the measured data (Set 1) and the planned dose data (Set 2) by shifting the planned dose
to get a better passing rate, if possible.
Note: Calc shift is not available for Gradient Compensation (GC) analysis.
Figure 7-2. Example of Calculated Shift Dialog Box
The calculated shift applies to the planned dose data. The Y Shift shows the shift in mm along the
Y axis (up is positive, down is negative) while the X shift indicates the shift along the X axis (left is
negative, right is positive). An X axis shift is equivalent to rotating the ArcCHECK cylinder.
Click Accept to accept the shift or Discard to discard it. If accepted, the shift data will be displayed
in the “CAX Offset” box in Set 2.
If there is a significant shift and improvement after selecting Calc Shift, a misalignment may exist
between the ArcCHECK and the beam. This could be caused by improper ArcCHECK alignment,
a difference between the beam and the lasers, or another type of setup or machine error.
Evaluation with a tool such as PROFILER™ or PROFILER 2™ may reveal the problem.
52 Section 7. Comparing Data

If Calc Shift is clicked again after accepting a previous Calc Shift, a new calculation will be
performed on the shifted plan (not the original plan). Thus, the results may be slightly better or
slightly worse.
Note: Rotational alignment is a 2nd order effect which is not compensated for with
Calc Shift. Rotation of 1.8 degrees in a 20 x 20 field will be noticeable. Users should
ensure that rotation errors are less than 1.8 degrees before using Calc Shift.
Comparing ArcCHECK Measurements
Two ArcCHECK measurements can be compared as a constancy check. This type of comparison
is based strictly on percent difference and does not include DTA or Gamma.
1 Collect ArcCHECK measurements and save the data.
2 Open the reference ArcCHECK measurement in Set 1 and the comparison ArcCHECK
measurement in Set 2.
3 Select the analysis criteria and then click Compare.
Analysis Criteria
The following criteria are used to determine if a point passes or fails: Threshold (TH), Percent
Difference (Diff %), and Distance (mm).
Threshold (TH %)
The threshold is the minimum dose percent value that must be met in either the device measured
or planned dose data for the point to be included in the analysis. In SNC Patient V6.2 software and
higher, threshold calculation is based on both the measured and planned dose, whichever is wider,
rather than just the planned dose as was done in previous software versions.
Note: After upgrading the software to SNC Patient V6.2 or later, you may see a change
in the pass rate since more points are included in the analysis.
For DTA and Gamma Analysis, the SNC Patient software includes all of the points from Set 1 and
Set 2 that are above or equal to the threshold.
• If a Set 1 point is lower than the threshold but the corresponding Set 2 point is higher
than the threshold, then the Set 1 point is included in the analysis.
• If a Set 2 point is lower than the threshold but the corresponding Set 1 point is higher
than the threshold, then the Set 2 point is included in the analysis.
• If there is a Set 2 point that is higher than the threshold but there is no corresponding Set
1 point, then the Set 2 point is not included in the analysis. This may be the case when
the Set 2 data grid is larger than the Set 1 grid, and vice versa.
By setting a threshold value, you can exclude points that are outside of the area of interest. The
default value is 10, which means that points whose values fall within the 0 to10% range will be
excluded from the statistical values to the right of the TH box. The lower the TH is, the more points
will be included. The optimum TH value is between 5 and 10 because this will include the points
that are in the penumbra region but exclude points that are in the scattered radiation regions.
Percent Difference (Diff %)

If the Global % checkbox is selected in the Analysis panel, Van Dyk % difference calculations are
applied. Otherwise, local percent difference calculations are applied.
Van Dyk % Difference is the percent difference between the dose at any measured point and
the corresponding plan point normalized to a common point (a user-selected normalization
point or the maximum dose point (default)). See Global % (Van Dyk %) Difference on
page 160.
Local percent difference is the dose difference threshold between a measured point (set 1)
and the corresponding planned dose point (set 2), divided by the same planned dose point.
If the dose values agree to within the defined percent difference, the point passes. If the
Comparing ArcCHECK Measurements 53

difference exceeds the defined percent difference criterion, a distance to agreement test is
invoked (see Distance to Agreement on page 158.) The default Diff(%) is 3.0.
Distance (Dist)
Distance is a radius in millimeters around the measured point. This test refers to points where the
difference between measured and planned values of co-located points exceeds the selected
percent difference.
Using the distance to agreement criteria, a measured point passes if, within a circle of DTA mm,
there exists at least one plan point that is greater than or equal to and at least one plan point that
is less than or equal to the value of the measured point.
The plot shows all the measurement points that are not in agreement. The points that record a
higher value are shown in red (hot) while those that record a lower value are shown in blue (cold).
You can specify the parameters for % difference and distance to agreement, and the program
finds and displays all points that are not within these parameters.
For more details, see Distance to Agreement on page 158.
Viewing Numeric Values
1 In the Set 1, Set 2, or Compare panel, click the Chart/Data button to display numeric values.
The row and column labels indicate point location relative to CAX (0, 0). A null value (empty)
cell indicates a point without a corresponding diode. A dose value of 0000.0 indicates that
dose calibration has not been applied.
The colors in the display indicate the following:
• Yellow cell — Point in space where a detector exists in the measured data.
• Red cell — Failed point (high)
• Blue cell — Failed point (low)
• Orange cell — Leaky channel
• Green border — Normalization point
• Orange border — Selected point (if applicable)
2 Use the options in the Data menu (lower right of the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels) to
change the numeric display. The Data options are:
• Dose — Absolute dose. Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels.
• Normalized — Percent of normalization value. Set 1, and Set 2 panels only.
• Corrected — Corrected counts (Angular, Heterogeneity, and Field Size Dependence cor-
rections applied). Set 1 and Set 2 panels only.
• Raw — Raw counts. Set 1 panel only.
• Offset — Offset counts. Only applies to MapCHECK. Does not apply to ArcCHECK or
MapCHECK 2. For ArcCHECK or MapCHECK 2, offset counts are zero. Set 1 panel only.
• Calibration — Array calibration values. Set 1 panel only.
• Background — Background values. Set 1 panel only.
• Uncertainty — Uncertainty value applied to each point. Compare panel only.
• Gamma — Gamma values. Compare panel only. (2D analysis mode only.)
• Gamma Dist — Gamma distance values. Compare panel only. (2D analysis mode only.)
• Gamma Dose — Gamma dose values. Compare panel only. (2D analysis mode only.)
• Gradient — Gradient values if Gradient Compensation analysis (GC) is enabled in Pro-
gram Preferences. Compare panel only.
• Gradient Diff — Gradient compensated difference (if Gradient Compensation analysis
(GC) is enabled in Program Preferences). Compare panel only.

Set 1 Data Menu
Set 2 Data Menu
Compare Panel Data Menu
Figure 7-3. Data Menu Options
Jump to Corresponding Point

To view the same point in multiple panels, right-click on the point and then select one of the
“Jump...” options from the context menu.
Figure 7-4. Jump to Corresponding Point
Sessions
After comparing an ArcCHECK measurement to planned dose, the comparison can be saved in a
“session” file (.mcs). The session file stores the selected files and all settings. The original
ArcCHECK measurement and planned dose are not affected.
Note: 3D analysis cannot be saved in a session file. The software switches to 2D anal-
ysis mode when opening a session. For 3D analysis, reload the planned dose.
Save a Session File

1 Select File > Save > Session from the menu. The ‘Patient Information’ dialog box opens.
Note: If the Set 1 data was changed and not saved, a message prompts to save the
Set 1 measured data before saving the session.
2 Enter or edit the patient information then click OK. The file naming dialog box opens.
3 Enter a filename, select the directory where the session file will be saved, and then click Save.
Sessions 55
Open a Session File
1 Select File > Open > Session.
2 Navigate to the location where you saved the session file (“.mcs” extension).
3 Double-click the desired file. Session data is displayed with the same appearance and
comparison parameters as when the session was saved.
Reports
1 Select File > Print/Preview. The ‘Patient Information’ dialog box opens. If desired, you can
pre-populate some of the report fields in Program Preferences.
Figure 7-5. Patient Information Dialog Box
2 Edit the patient information, edit the Set 1 and/or Set 2 labels if desired, and then click OK.
The Set 1 and Set 2 labels are displayed in the report.
3 The ‘Print’ dialog box opens. If needed, adjust the printer properties.
4 Click OK. The ‘Print Preview’ dialog box opens.
5 Click one of the buttons at the top of the preview.
• Print — Sends the print preview data to the printer.
• Print to PDF — Saves the report as a PDF. The program will prompt for a filename. A PDF
can be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader (available from www.adobe.com).
• Close — Closes the print preview window.
The following is an example of an ArcCHECK report.

Figure 7-6. Example of ArcCHECK Report
Reports 57

8 Software Interface
Display Window
The SNC Patient software recognizes the connected instrument and automatically configures the
screen options and display to match the instrument’s capabilities.
The SNC Patient main screen contains the following panels as well as buttons and controls to
manipulate each panel. The application remembers the panel settings and retains them for the
next session.
The panels have the following functions:
• Set 1 (normally device measured data but other data types can be loaded)
• Set 2 (normally planned dose data but other data types can be loaded)
• Compare (comparison of Set 1 and Set 2)
• Profile and Histogram (profile across a selected axis or a histogram)
• Dose Summary/Statistics (absolute dose values or gamma/dose difference summary index)
All panels can be displayed simultaneously or a panel can be maximized to fill the entire window.
Set 2
Set 1
Compare
Profile/Histogram
Dose Summary
/Statistics
Figure 8-1. ArcCHECK Data in SNC Patient Software
Dose maps are displayed in color with higher dose areas in shades of red and lower dose areas
in shades of blue. The numeric values for each point can be displayed by clicking the Chart/Data
button in the toolbar.
The Comparison toolbar has Distance to Agreement (DTA) and Gamma Analysis tools. A Gradient
Compensation tool is also available by selecting this option in the Program Preferences. After
establishing the analysis criteria and selecting Compare, the software identifies all passing and
failing points.
When comparison and analysis are complete you can save the results in a report or copy data to
a third-party application.
Display Window 59
Loading Data
The following types of data can be loaded in SNC Patient software:

• Device Measured — MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2, or ArcCHECK measurement.
• DICOM RT Dose — TPS data in a DICOM RT DOSE file (a QA phantom dose file).
• DICOM RT Plan/Dose — TPS data in a DICOM RT DOSE file (a QA phantom dose file) and a
DICOM RT PLAN file (a QA phantom plan file). The files can be opened as a pair. Isocenter
coordinates are extracted from the DICOM RT PLAN file automatically.
• Film — Not used with ArcCHECK.
• EPIDose — (only if a valid EPIDose license exists) A dose map calculated from an EPID image
using the EPIDose software module. For details, see the EPIDose Reference Guide or EPI-
Dose online Help.
• EPID Image — (only if a valid EPIDose license exists) Opens a raw EPID image that was saved
in DICOM RT IMAGE format. For details, see the EPIDose Reference Guide or EPIDose online
Help.
• Session — Device measured data can be saved with the corresponding planned dose file as
a ‘session’ file which is identified with a patient identification tag. The session file includes the
comparison. Saving files as a ‘session’ simplifies storage and reporting. For details, see Ses-
sions on page 55.
Load Device Measured Data
1 If the data is saved in a patient plan, select the plan from the drop-down box in the toolbar.
2 Select File > Open > DataSet 1> Device Measured from the menu, or right-click the Set 1
panel and then select Open Device Measured from the context menu.
3 If a patient plan was selected in Step 1, the file selection dialog box displays a list of device
measured files for the selected patient. Double-click the desired file. The data appears in the
Set 1 panel.
If a patient plan was not selected, navigate to the location of the ArcCHECK measurement
(usually C:\SNC\SNC Patient\Data\<serial number>), and then double-click the file to
open it.
Load Planned Dose Data

See Importing Planned Dose on page 37.
Clear Data
• To clear all panels (Set 1, Set 2, Compare, and Profile as well as the associated data), select
File > Clear > Clear All from the menu.
• To clear only the data in the selected panel, right-click in the Set 1, Set 2, or Compare panel
and select Clear from the context menu.
Maximizing/Minimizing
Maximize and Minimize a Panel

1 Click the Maximize button at the lower right of the of the panel. The panel expands to fill
the window.
2 Click the button again to minimize the panel.
Navigate to Other Maximized Panels

When a maximized panel is open, four additional buttons appear in the panel toolbar.
Click the buttons to switch to other maximized panels.
• Click 1 to view Set 1 data.
• Click 2 to view Set 2 data.
• Click C to view the Compare panel.
• Click Profiles to view the Profile panel.
60 Section 8. Software Interface

Note: When Set 1 or Set 2 are maximized, you can toggle from Relative Dose to
Absolute dose mode or vice versa using the RD and AD buttons in the left toolbar.
Selecting Chart Appearance
The Chart buttons modify the appearance of the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels.
Chart/Data Grid Lines
Edit Contour/Select Graph Mode Show Detectors
Figure 8-2. Chart Buttons
Chart/Data
The Chart/Data button switches between chart view and data view. Chart view displays a
graph; data view displays numeric data.
• To select the type of data displayed in data view (Dose, Normalized (%), Corrected, etc.),
choose an option from the Data menu in the lower right of the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare pan-
els. For details, see Viewing Numeric Values on page 54.
• To copy data, highlight a region of cells, copy the data to the clipboard (CTRL-C), and then
paste it into another application (CTRL-V).
Chart view Data view
Figure 8-3. Chart and Data View
Grid Lines
The Grid Lines button hides or shows grid lines in the selected panel. Grid lines are 1 cm
apart.
Grid lines off Grid lines on
Figure 8-4. Grid Lines
Selecting Chart Appearance 61

Show Detectors
The Show Detectors button hides or shows the ArcCHECK detector locations in the selected
panel.
Detector locations off Detector locations on
Figure 8-5. Display Detectors
The following table describes the detector colors in the Set 1 and Compare panels.
Table 8-1. Detector Colors
Panel Color Meaning

Set 1 Green Normalization point
Orange Selected point (if applicable)
Yellow Leaky detector
Compare Red Failed high
Blue Failed low
Green Normalization point
Orange Selected point (if applicable)
Yellow Leaky detector
Edit Contour/Select Graph Mode

The Edit Contour/Select Graph Mode button is used to select the graph display mode or edit line
colors/thicknesses.
1 In the Set 1, Set 2 or Compare panel, click the Edit Contour/Select Graph Mode button. A
menu is displayed.
Figure 8-6. Graph Mode Options
2 The graph view options for Set 1 and Set 2 are: ISO Dose, Layered Contours, Blended
Contours, Smooth GreyScale, GreyScale, and GreyScale and ISO Dose.
The graph view options for the Compare panel are GreyScale, Smooth GreyScale, ISO Dose
Overlay, and Dose Diff. These options are described in the table below.

Table 8-2. Graph View Options
Panel
Graph Mode Example Description
Set 1 Set 2 Compare
ISO Dose Isodose contours only. X X
Lines are close together in
areas of high dose gradient
and far apart in areas of low
dose gradient.
Layered Layered isodose contours X X

contours (color) with sharp edges.
Shades of red indicate
areas of higher dose;
shades of blue indicate
areas of lower dose.
Blended Blended isodose contours X X

contours (color) with diffuse edges.
Smooth Blended isodose contours X X

GreyScale (greyscale) with diffuse
edges. Simulates the
appearance of film.
GreyScale Layered isodose contours X X

(greyscale) with sharp
edges. Darker tones indi-
cate areas of higher dose;
lighter tones indicate areas
of lower dose.
GreyScale Isodose lines superim- X X

and Isodose posed on blended
greyscale isodose
contours.
GreyScale Gray scale of planned dose X

(compare with sharp edges and failing
panel) points displayed.
Smooth  Smooth greyscale of X

GreyScale planned dose (simulates
(compare the appearance of film) and
panel displays failing points.
Selecting Chart Appearance 63

Table 8-2. Graph View Options
Panel
Graph Mode Example Description
Set 1 Set 2 Compare
ISO Dose Overlay of Set 1 and Set 2 X
overlay isodose lines; no failing
points displayed.
Dose Measured and planned X

Difference dose subtraction map (Set 1
minus Set 2). Higher dose
(red) or lower dose (blue)
are differentiated from
expected dose (green)
resulting from the subtrac-
tion; no failing points
displayed.
3 To edit and save custom isodose settings, select Edit Contour Settings from the menu. The
‘Contour Settings’ dialog box opens. The dialog box has four tabs, Set 1, Set 2, ISO Diff, and
ISO Overlay. The options in this dialog box can be used to:
• Select a contour as visible or not visible by checking or clearing the adjacent checkbox.
• Adjust the magnitude of each level (10% intervals by default based on the selected nor-
malization point).
• Change contour colors by clicking the color box and selecting a different color.
• Change width of contour lines by entering a value from 1 to 3 in the Line Width box.
• Show dashed or continuous contour lines by entering a value from 0 to 3 in the Dot
Length box.
• Save contour settings to a file, load previously saved contour settings, or delete contour
settings.
• Lock the Set 2 contour settings to match those of Set 1.
Figure 8-7. Contour Settings Dialog Box
4 The default contour settings file is ‘SNC Default’. Click Close and then click Save to save the
changes in the default contour settings file, or click Save and select a file name for the
custom settings.

Shift/Invert
The device measured and planned dose data can be manually shifted for better alignment.
1 Click Edit in the Set 1 or Set 2 toolbar. A dialog box opens.
Device measured offset options Planned dose offset options
Figure 8-8. Offset Options, Sets 1 and 2
2 Enter the desired shift and then click OK. An X axis shift is equivalent to rotating the cylinder.
• The ‘ArcCHECK Inverted’ option is only used when the ArcCHECK is positioned such that
the electronics panel and cavity panel are reversed. An inverted measurement is required
for the ArcCHECK Merge feature (see Merge (for Longer Field Size) on page 111.)
• The up/down arrow buttons in the dialog box can be used to increment the ArcCHECK
measured data in 5 mm increments and the planned dose data in 1 mm increments. The
ArcCHECK measured data can be manually changed in 1 mm increments, if desired.
X offset
(rotation)
Y (shift)
Figure 8-9. ArcCHECK Offset
3 To save the shift, re-save the file. To abandon the shift, select File > Clear > Clear All.
Tools
The following figure shows the tool buttons located below the Set 1 panel. The tools function as
described below:
Figure 8-10. Tool Buttons
• None — clears tool actions from all panels and clears all selected tools.
• Dose — select then click a point in Set 1 to display a pop up box with values and coordinates
for the selected point. Click the pop up box to close it. For details, see Display Dose at
Selected Point on page 66.
• Norm — choose this option to manually select a normalization point in Set 1 or to select the
maximum dose in Set 1 as the normalization point. For details, see Normalize to a Detector or
Maximum Dose on page 67.
• Zoom — select to enable zooming in the Set 1, Set 2, or Compare panels, then, click and drag
the cursor from upper left to lower right. The graphs in all three panels are updated to show
the zoomed in area. To return to normal size, click and drag in the opposite direction. For
details, see Zoom on page 67.
Shift/Invert 65
• Profile — select to add a profile line to Set 1 and display the profile in the Profile/Histogram
panel. The Profile option is on by default. For details, see Profile Display on page 69.
• Ruler — select to measure the distance between any two points in the Set 1, Set 2, or Com-
pare panels. A pop-up box displays the distance between the selected points and the
start/stop positions. For details, see Ruler on page 70.
• Clear — clears tool actions from all panels but leaves the last selected tool enabled.
After selecting one of the above tools an icon appears in the upper left corner of each panel in
which the tool can be applied. For example, after clicking Dose, the Dose icon appears in the
upper left of the Set 1 and Compare panels, indicating that a point can be selected in either panel.
Dose icon in Set 1

means you can 
select a point in this
panel.
No dose icon in
Set 2 means you
cannot select a
point in this panel.
Dose icon in Com-

pare panel means
you can select a
point in this panel.
Dose tool 
selected
Figure 8-11. Icons Show Where the Tools can be Applied
Display Dose at Selected Point

1 Click the Dose tool at the bottom of the Set 1 panel. Detector locations are displayed in Set 1.
2 Click a point in the Set 1 panel. The selected point turns orange and a pop up box displays the
following:
• Set 1 and Set 2 dose values
• DTA for DTA analysis, Gamma for Gamma analysis, or Set 2 (cGy/mm) for Gradient Com-
pensation analysis.
• For ArcCHECK only, the pop-up also displays the coordinates of the selected point. There
are two Z values, one for entrance and one for exit.
Figure 8-12. Example of Dose at Selected Point

3 Click the pop up box to close it.
If comparison was performed in absolute dose mode, absolute dose values for the selected point
are displayed in the “SEL” row of the Absolute Dose Values table at the bottom of the window. See
Dose Summary/Statistics on page 70.
Normalize to a Detector or Maximum Dose

If desired, you can set the normalization point to the maximum dose in Set 1 or to another point
of your choosing.
• To change the normalization to the maximum dose in Set 1, click Norm in the Set 1 panel tool-
bar and select Max from the pop-up menu. Sets 1 and 2 are normalized to the maximum dose
in Set 1.
• To manually select a normalization point, click Norm in the Set 1 panel toolbar then click on a
detector in Set 1 to set it as the normalization point. The selected detector turns green and
Sets 1 and 2 are normalized to the selected point.
• To return to the default normalization, click Compare.
For more information about the default Normalization point, see Selecting Relative or Absolute
Dose on page 52.
Zoom
If desired, you can zoom in on an portion of the graph in the Set 1, Set 2, or Compare panels. When
you zoom in on one panel, all three panels are updated.
1 Click Zoom in the Set 1 panel toolbar.
2 In the Set 1, Set 2, or Compare panel, click and drag the cursor diagonally (upper left to lower
right or upper right to lower left) over the desired area. A bounding box is displayed.
Click and Drag Zoomed In Result

Figure 8-13. Example of Zoomed In Display
3 Release the cursor. All three graphs are enlarged so the defined area fills the panel.
4 To zoom out, click and drag diagonally from lower right to upper left.
Zoom Control - Profile/Histogram Panel

The Profile/Histogram panel has a separate zoom control display. Using this zoom display updates
the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels to match the zoomed area.
Note: You may need to maximize the Profile/Histogram panel to select the zoom area
and then minimize the panel to see the results in the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels.
Tools 67
1 Click the Show Zoom Control button in the top toolbar of the profile panel. The panel
changes to ‘Zoom Work Area’.
1
2
3
6 4
5
No. Name Description

1 Show Zoom Control Click to display the zoom work area controls.
2 No Zoom Click to zoom out.
3 Zoom In Click to zoom in incrementally (decreases the size of the zoom rectangle)
4 Zoom Out Click to zoom out incrementally
5 Center Zoom Click to center the zoom rectangle in the center of the visible field.
Rectangle
6 Zoom area of The red box shows the area that will be zoomed in.
interest
7 Visible field The grid shows the largest area that can be made visible.
Figure 8-14. Zoom Work Area Controls
2 Use the Zoom display as follows:

• Zoom in or out incrementally using the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons.
• Add a zoom area of interest box by clicking and dragging diagonally from upper left to
lower right or upper right to lower left.
• Right-click and drag the zoomed area of interest box to reposition it.
• Center the zoom area of interest box by clicking Center Zoom Rectangle.
• Zoom out by clicking No Zoom or by clicking and dragging diagonally from lower right to
upper left.
3 The Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels are updated to display the zoom area of interest.
Figure 8-15. Zoom from Profile/Histogram Panel

Profile Display
When you click Compare, the software automatically displays a profile through the X axis at 0 cm,
a green profile selection line in the Set 1, Set 2, and Compare panels, and a profile graph in the
Profile/Histogram panel (see the figure below).
The profile selection line in Set 1 has a handle on the right side. To reposition the profile line, click
and drag the handle in Set 1, click on a different point in Set 1, Set 2, or Compare, or use the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To change the axis of the profile, click the Profile tool then select X
Profile, Y Profile, Negative Slope Diagonal, or Positive Slope Diagonal.
The Profile/Histogram panel can be maximized for a closer view. The black line in the profile
represents the planned dose, the yellow dots represent the points in the measured dose that pass
the comparison criteria. Failed points are displayed as red or blue dots.
Profile handle
Profile
Selection Line
Profile
Selection Line
Profile
Click to maximize profile
Figure 8-16. Profile Display
Profile Data Points

Click any point in the profile to display a pop-up box with the point location, Set 1 and Set 2 values,
percent difference, DTA, and Gamma (2D Analysis mode only) for the selected point. Click the
pop-up box to close it.
Figure 8-17. Displaying Point Values
Zoom the Profile

This procedure is used to zoom in on a section of the profile. This action does not affect the Set
1, Set 2, or Compare panel displays.
1 To zoom in, click and drag diagonally from left to right. The view expands to show the
selected area of the profile.
2 To zoom out, click and drag diagonally from right to left.
Profile Display 69
Ruler
The Ruler can be used to measure the distance between any two points in the Set 1, Set 2, or
Compare panel. Click the Ruler tool at the bottom of the Set 1 panel and then click and drag the
cursor between two points. A line is displayed between the selected points and a pop-up box
displays the distance between the selected points and the start/stop positions. The line and
pop-up box remain in the panel until you draw a new line, select another tool, or select Clear or
None.
Figure 8-18. Example of Measurement Between Two Points
Dose Summary/Statistics
The Dose Summary/Statistics panel has four options: Dose, BQA, Gamma, and %Diff.
• Dose displays a summary of absolute dose values
• BQA (Beam QA) is not used with ArcCHECK
• Gamma displays a Gamma Index summary (2D analysis mode only)
• %Diff displays a Dose Difference summary
The analysis mode used for DTA/Gamma analysis is displayed in the upper right.
The data in the Dose Summary/Statistics panel can be copied and pasted into a 3rd party
application such as Microsoft Excel. Right-click in the panel and select Copy Table Data.
Absolute Dose Values

After comparison in absolute dose mode, select Dose in the Dose Summary panel to display
absolute dose values for three points: CAX (not applicable for ArcCHECK), normalization, and
selected.
Figure 8-19. Example of Dose Value Display
Gamma Index Summary
Note: A Gamma Index Summary is not available in 3D analysis mode. See 3D Gamma
Analysis for ArcCHECK on page 157.
After performing gamma analysis in 2D mode, select Gamma in the Dose Summary panel to
display a gamma index summary. The summary shows the following statistics for all comparison
points and for just those comparison points above the threshold.
• Minimum/maximum/average gamma value.

• Gamma standard deviation.
Figure 8-20. Example of Gamma Index Summary (2D mode)
Percent Difference Summary

After comparison, select %Diff in the Dose Summary panel to display a percent difference
summary. The summary shows the following statistics for all comparison points and for just those
comparison points above the threshold:
• Minimum/maximum/average dose difference.
• Dose difference standard deviation.
Figure 8-21. Example of Percent Difference Summary
Data Information
The Data Information button displays the properties of the data in Set 1. The Data Information
button can be selected after loading a file or after measurement to display the array calibration,
file name, and dose calibration.
File Info Dialog Box Data Information Button
Figure 8-22. Example of File Info Dialog Box
Data Information 71
Histograms
Histogram Display
To view histograms, click the Show Histograms button in the top right of the
Profile/Histograms panel.
The initial histogram centers around the average error. Green bins show the distribution of points
that meet the selected criteria, red bins indicate fail high, and blue bars indicate fail low.
Figure 8-23. Example of Percent Difference Histogram
The buttons on the right side of the Profile/Histogram panel provide three display options:
Distance to Agreement (DTA), % Difference, or Gamma.
• The Distance to Agreement histogram shows the distribution of points sorted by distance to
agreement. Note that some values may not meet DTA criteria but do meet % difference cri-
teria. Consequently the histogram may have red or blue bins while the Compare panel may
not show corresponding red or blue points.
• The % Difference histogram shows the distribution of points sorted by percent difference.
Note that some values may not meet % difference criteria but do meet DTA criteria. Conse-
quently the histogram may have red or blue bins while the Compare panel may not show
corresponding red or blue points.
• The Gamma histogram shows the distribution of calculated gamma values for each point (2D
analysis mode only).
Note: A Gamma histogram is not available in 3D analysis mode. See 3D Gamma

Analysis for ArcCHECK on page 157.
The All button shows all detectors in the DTA, % Difference, and Gamma histograms, including
detectors that are outside of the threshold.

Histogram Statistics
Click on a bin to display a pop-up box with the percentage of points within the threshold and the
total number of points in the selected bin. You can also view statistics for a range of histogram
bins by clicking and dragging the cursor horizontally across the desired bins. A double-ended
arrow appears as you drag. Click in the pop-up box to close it.
Figure 8-24. Selecting a Range of Histogram Bins
Adjusting Histogram Bin Sizes

The histogram bin size can be adjusted using the increase bin size and decrease bin size buttons
on the right side of the Profile/Histogram panel. This feature allows you to change the level of
detail displayed in the panel. For example, the default DTA histogram displays a range of 0 to >8
mm, but decreasing the bin size 2x changes the range from 0 to >2 mm.
The DTA histogram offers three bin sizes: the default and two decrease levels. The % Difference
and Gamma histograms offer five bin sizes: two decrease levels, the default, and two increase
levels.
1 2 3 (default)
4 5
Figure 8-25. Five Bin Sizes Are Available for Gamma and Percent Difference Histograms
Histograms 73
Histogram Panel Details
10 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9 8

1 Show Histogram Click to enable histograms.
2 DTA Click to display a Distance to Agreement histogram. A DTA histogram is
not available when Gradient Compensation analysis is enabled.
3 % Click to display a % Difference histogram.
4 Gamma Click to display a Gamma histogram. Note: Gamma histogram is not avail-
able in 3D analysis mode. See 3D Gamma Analysis for ArcCHECK on
page 157.
5 All Click to include all detectors in the histogram, including those outside of
the threshold.
6 Decrease Bin Size Click to decrease the bin size.
7 Default Bin Size Click to reset the bin size to the default.
8 Increase Bin Size Click to increase the bin size.
9 Horizontal scale Distribution of bins. For DTA, units are millimeters. For % Difference, units
are % of normalized dose difference. For Gamma, units are gamma values.
The range of the first bin includes the maximum and minimum. The range
of all subsequent bins excludes the low end of the range and includes the
high end of the range. For example, bin 1 is from 0 to exactly 1.0, while bin
2 is from any value higher than exactly 1.0 to exactly 2.0, etc.
10 Vertical scale Number of points that meet the criteria for each bin.
11 Bins The height of each bin represents the number of points that meet the cri-
teria. Green represents points within the threshold; red represents points
above the threshold, blue represents points below the threshold.
Figure 8-26. Histogram Panel Details

9 Advanced Features
File Manager
The File Manager feature stores all of the files for a specific patient in a ‘patient plan’. Files in a
patient plan are sorted in subfolders by file type, such as TPS Measured, Device Measured,
EPIDose, etc.
Once files are associated with a patient plan and the patient plan is selected, all ‘open file’
commands display the files in the patient plan that match the selected file type. You do not need
to search multiple directories to find the correct files. For example, if you select a patient plan and
then select ‘Open Device Measured’ in Set 1, a list of all the device measured files for the patient
is displayed.
Note that the File Manager does not compromise original data. When files are associated with a
patient plan, the software places a copy of the original file in the patient plan directory, leaving the
original data intact. The File Manager appends descriptive text to each filename (such as
‘Planned_File’) for easy reference.
There are two tabs in the File Manager dialog box: Manage Files and Batch Analysis. The Manage
Files tab is used to organize data files in the patient plan. The Batch Analysis tab is used to
compare multiple data sets instead of comparing individual data sets. For details about Batch
Analysis, see Batch Analysis on page 77. For details about the File Manager dialog box, see File
Manager Dialog Box on page 184.
Creating a New Patient Plan

1 Select File > File Manager > New Patient Plan for File Manager… from the menu or click
the FM button in the main window toolbar and select New Patient Plan for File Manager.
The ‘File Manager: New Plan’ dialog box is displayed.
Figure 9-1. File Manager: New Plan
2 Enter the Patient ID and Plan ID and then click OK. The ‘File Manager’ dialog box is displayed.
• See Adding Files to a Patient Plan on page 76.
• Patient Plan files are stored in the directory specified in Program Preferences
(C:\SNC\Patient Plans, by default.)
Opening the File Manager

1 Select File > File Manager > Open Patient Plan in File Manager… from the menu or click
the FM button in the main window toolbar and then select Open Patient Plan in File Man-
ager. A list of patient plans is displayed.
2 Select the desired patient plan then click OK. The File Manager dialog box opens.
File Manager 75
Use these groups
with ArcCHECK
Figure 9-2. Example of File Manager Dialog Box
For details about the File Manager dialog box, see File Manager Dialog Box on page 184.
Note: The File Manager groups used with ArcCHECK are DICOM RT PLAN, DIODE
ARRAY, TPS DOSE and RT IMAGES & SUPPORT FILES. The rest of the groups are
for file types supported by MapCHECK 2 and MapCHECK.
Adding Files to a Patient Plan

1 Select File > File Manager > Open Patient Plan in File Manager… from the menu or click
the FM button in the main window toolbar and then select Open Patient Plan in File Man-
ager. A list of patient plans is displayed.
• If a patient plan does not exist for the patient, see Creating a New Patient Plan on
page 75.
2 In the File Manager dialog box, click the heading of the file type that you wish to import. An
import dialog box is displayed.
3 Navigate to the desired file and select it. To select multiple files, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL
key while selecting.
4 Click Open. The files are copied to the Patient Plan directory, the file names are appended
with descriptive text for easy reference, and the file names are displayed in the File Manager
dialog box.
5 When the desired files are in the patient plan, click CLOSE FILE MANAGER.
76 Section 9. Advanced Features

Patient Plan Maintenance
1 Select File > File Manager > Patient/Plan Maintenance… from the menu. The ‘Patient Plan
Maintenance’ dialog box is displayed.
Figure 9-3. Patient/Plan Maintenance
2 To delete a patient plan, select it from the list and then click the Delete Patient/Plan ID
button.
3 To make a patient plan active or inactive, select the plan and then click the Set Inactive or Set
Active button. Active Patient IDs are indicated with the letter A and Inactive with I. Only
‘active’ plans are visible in the Patient Plan drop down list in the toolbar.
4 When patient plan maintenance is complete, click Close.
Deleting or Renaming Files in File Manager

In the File Manager dialog box, right click a filename and select Delete or Rename from the
context menu.
Selecting a Network Location for Patient Plans

If your facility requires a specific network location for patient files, select (Setup > Program
Preferences > Files, and then set the File Manager Directory Path to the desired location.
Batch Analysis
The Batch Analysis feature in File Manager is used to compare data sets as a group instead of
comparing them one at a time. This feature is particularly useful after splitting an ArcCHECK or
MapCHECK 2 IMRT delivery into constituent fields (see Split Feature on page 116), or if the Arc-
CHECK or MapCHECK 2 IMRT beams are saved as separate measurements.
To use the Batch Analysis feature, the files to be compared must be in a patient plan. If the files
are not already in a patient plan, see Creating a New Patient Plan on page 75 and Adding Files to
a Patient Plan on page 76.
1 Select the desired patient plan from the drop-down list in the toolbar then click the BA button
in the toolbar.
2 The File Manager dialog box opens with the Batch Analysis tab selected.
File Manager 77
Figure 9-4. Batch Analysis Tab
3 In the Set 1 drop-down list, select Measured: Diode Array. All device measured files in the
Patient Plan are displayed in the box below Set 1.
4 In the Set 2 drop-down list, select Calculated: TPS. All TPS files in the Patient Plan are
displayed in the box below Set 2.
5 In the Vendor drop-down box, select the TPS import filter.
Figure 9-5. Data loaded in Set 1 and Set 2
6 Select one file from the left and the corresponding file from the right and then click Add. The
file pair is displayed in the lower panel. Clicking Add All pairs the first file on the left with the
first file on the right, the second file on the left to the second file on the right, etc.
• To remove files from the lower panel, select the pairs to be removed then click Delete
Pair(s).

Figure 9-6. File Pairs in Lower Panel
7 Adjust the Analysis settings (if needed).

• By default, the analysis type and criteria are the same as those previously selected in Set
3 (Compare).
• The ‘Auto Calc Shift’ checkbox is available when using DTA or Gamma analysis. If the
checkbox is selected, gamma analysis is performed in 2D analysis mode.
• The ‘Auto Calc Shift’ checkbox is not available when Gradient Compensation (GC) analy-
sis is enabled in the Program Preferences.
• A Calc Shift applied in the Batch Analysis window is retained when viewing the file pair
in the primary software window.
8 Click Compare. The ArcCHECK Import Utility is displayed as the program extracts the
ArcCHECK dose map using the first file pair. After extraction, the software prompts for MUs
or scaling factor. When all the comparisons are complete, results are displayed in the lower
panel.
Figure 9-7. Completed Batch Analysis
9 To open a comparison in the main window, double click the selected pair in the lower panel.
The ArcCHECK Import Utility is displayed again as dose is extracted from the 3D volume. To
return to the Batch Analysis dialog box, click BA in the SNC Patient toolbar.
10 To create a report of the comparison results, see Batch Analysis Report on page 80.
File Manager 79
11 Click Close File Manager to close the File Manager dialog box.
Batch Analysis Report
Note: Do not use the ‘Create Pair Report’ option for ArcCHECK batch comparison.
To create a batch analysis report that shows the results as displayed in the lower panel of the
Batch Analysis tab, click Create Report. In the report preview, click Print or Print to PDF.
Figure 9-8. Report Preview
ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis
For customers who use ArcCHECK as their VMAT QA device, the Control Point Dose Analysis
feature provides the ability to analyze dose delivery in one or more full arcs, in partial arcs defined
by number of control points per arc, in partial arcs defined by start angle and end angle, or per
control point. The Control Point Dose Analysis feature accepts TPS dose data that is segmented
into a separate RT Dose file for each control point, or TPS dose data that is segmented into an RT
Dose file for each sub arc where each sub arc contains a number of control points. As of the date
this guide was released, only the Philips® Pinnacle3® TPS has the ability to segment dose data
into a separate RT Dose file per control point. Other treatment planning systems, such as Eclipse®
V10 or later or Nucletron®, have the ability to segment the data into a separate RT Dose file per
sub arc. SNC Patient software version 6.2 or later is required to support RT Dose data that is
segmented into sub arcs.
Note: The Control Point Dose Analysis feature does not currently support
TomoTherapy.
Note: To use the Control Point Dose Analysis feature, ensure that the computer has at
least 4 GB RAM and 2.4 GHz or faster CPU.
Notes about Sub Arc Analysis

Sub Arc Analysis is performed in the same method as Control Point Dose Analysis. Multiple arc
cases are supported, as well as relative or absolute dose and Distance to Agreement (DTA) or
Gamma Index.
Sorting of RT Dose Files — RT Dose files must be sorted to prevent errors caused by
misplacement of RT Dose filenames. Pinnacle3 RT Dose files are sorted by InstanceNumber,
which is a DICOM file tag. Eclipse and Nucletron do not use the InstanceNumber tag in sub arc
dose files, they use another DICOM tag, ReferencedBeamNumber, instead.

IMRT ‘n’ Fields QA — Sub Arc Analysis can be used for comparison of ArcCHECK and IMRT ‘n’
fields QA data. To use this feature, load an ArcCHECK movie file of all field measurements, and
calculation dose files for each field. The analysis results and pass rate of each field are displayed
in a single graph, as shown in the example below. Based on the fact that each field has a static
gantry angle, the analysis results for each field pass rate are shown in polar graph as 4° pies with
the true gantry angle in the middle of each pie.
Figure 9-9. Example Graph of IMRT 7 Field QA
Terminology
Control Points — A Volumetric Modulated Arc Therapy treatment plan contains parameters such
as delivered dose, MLC leaf positions, collimator position, etc at certain gantry angles. The control
points are positions corresponding to those gantry angles. Control points are usually equally
angularly spaced with angle length of 2, 4, 6 or other degrees.
Full Arc — An arc that contains all of the control points.
Partial Arc — A portion of a full arc (subset of control points). The subset of control points must
be continuous – i.e. it is not possible to select every other control point.
Sub Arc — A portion of an arc output from a TPS, such as Eclipse®, where each sub arc contains
a number of control points.
Dose Objects
ArcCHECK Dose Objects — ArcCHECK dose objects are created during the synchronization
process when the ArcCHECK measured data and the TPS data are loaded into the Control Point
Dose Analysis dialog box. ArcCHECK dose objects contain ArcCHECK measured data either
between two adjacent control points or between two adjacent sub arcs depending on which TPS
is used, Pinnacle3 or a TPS such as Eclipse.
Plan Dose Objects — Created and stored in Control Point Dose Analysis. Plan dose objects
contain plan dose data either between two adjacent control points or between two adjacent sub
arcs depending on which TPS is used, Pinnacle3 or a TPS such as Eclipse.
DICOM RT Dose
Files exported from the TPS that contain plan dose data. The file format uses the DICOM standard.
In the output from a Pinnacle3 TPS, there should be one RT Dose file per control point interval (n-1
dose files for n control points). The output from another TPS, such as Eclipse, should have one RT
Dose file per sub arc.
DICOM RT Plan
A file exported from the TPS that contains the total number of control points or total number of
sub arcs in the planned dose delivery, as well as the gantry angle information associated with each
control point. The file format uses the DICOM standard.
ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis 81

Minimum Arc Length
The partial arc ‘length’ has an effect on absolute dose comparison results. This parameter allows
the user to set the minimum angle in degrees for each partial arc (and thus the minimum number
of control points per partial arc) such that absolute dose comparison can still be performed in the
event that one or more updates is missing from the ArcCHECK measured data. Enabling this
parameter reduces the weighting factor when counting one more update or miscounting an
update at the time that the synchronization function (SYNC(T) is called. The update will be counted
in this ArcCHECK object or in the next. For details, see Control Point Dose Analysis Program
Preferences on page 88.
Polar Graph
Displays the Control Point Dose Analysis results for each arc. The polar graph uses the IEC
coordinate system.
Synchronization
The process used to synchronize the ArcCHECK measured dose to the delivered (plan) dose using
control points to define partial arc starting and end angles. For details, see About Control Point
Dose Analysis Synchronization on page 101.
Load Data in Control Point Dose Analysis
Requirements
• A Plan data set, which consists of:
• Calculated RT Dose files for each control point (Pinnacle3 users only), or calculated RT
Dose files for each sub arc for users who use a TPS other than Pinnacle3, such as Eclipse
(Eclipse Version 10 or later only).
• The associated DICOM RT Plan file. This file may be stored in the same directory as the
RT Dose files so that all of the plan files can be opened together as a Plan data set. If the
RT Plan file is not in the same directory as the RT Dose files, a dialog box will appear so
you can select the RT Plan file separately.
• An ArcCHECK measurement file in movie (lite) format with a file extension of .acml. Arc-
CHECK movie (lite) files are created when taking ArcCHECK measurements with SNC Patient
version 6.0 software or later; they cannot be created in earlier software versions. ArcCHECK
movie (lite) files are only used with the Control Point Dose Analysis feature and Sun Nuclear’s
3DVH application. For more information about ArcCHECK movie lite files, see ArcCHECK File
Formats on page 188.
Procedure
1 Select Tools > ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis from the menu. The Control Point
Dose Analysis dialog box opens.
2 Load the data files. It does not matter which data set is loaded first (ArcCHECK measured data
or TPS data).
a. To load the TPS data, select File > Load TPS Data (DICOM) from the menu.
i. In the ‘Calculated Dose Set and/or Plan Files’ dialog box, navigate to the directory
where the DICOM RT Plan and RT Dose files are stored and then select all of the
DICOM RT Dose files and the RT Plan file.
ii. To select all of the files in the directory, press CTRL-A. To select specific files, press
CTRL while clicking. To deselect a file, press CTRL and click on the filename. Note
that the RT Plan file must be selected, since it contains the angle of each control
point.
iii. Click Open. A status bar in the lower left shows the status of the data load. When
the process is complete, the TPS dose is displayed in the upper right panel.
b. To load the ArcCHECK measured data, select File > Load ArcCHECK Movie File from
the menu.

i. In the ‘ArcCHECK Movie (Lite) File’ dialog box, navigate to the ArcCHECK measure-
ments and then select the file (.acml) that you want to compare with the TPS data.
ii. Click Open. A status bar in the lower left shows the status of the data load. When
the process is complete, the ArcCHECK measured data is displayed in the upper left
panel.
Figure 9-10. Data Loaded and Displayed in Upper Panels
Select Analysis Options and Compare

1 In the Analysis Types panel, select the Start and End points, whether the arc should be
grouped into partial arcs based on the number of control points, and whether to average by
control points. For details, see Analysis Type on page 92.
2 Select the desired analysis criteria. For details, see Analysis Criteria on page 93.
3 Click Compare. The comparison may take a few minutes to complete. A status bar in the
lower left displays the progress.
• When processing is complete, the dose difference results are displayed in the left panel
and the four display panels provide a graphical representation of the selected partial arc
or full arc, based on the selected analysis types.
4 If desired, change the analysis criteria and perform another comparison. The SNC Patient
software maintains up to two copies of complete comparison results. The Edit menu options
can be used to toggle between the comparison results.
5 If desired, display a graph of dose difference along a helical or longitudinal profile by selecting
one of the profile buttons in the Analysis Histogram panel (see Profile Options on page 99.)
To select a different detector as the intersection point of the profiles, right-click in the
comparison or reference panel, choose Select Detector from the context menu, and then
left-click on the desired detector.
6 If desired, save the comparison as a session file. The session file stores the name of the
ArcCHECK measurement file and the plan file, dose scaling factor, and all of the parameters
and analysis results. It also stores a previous copy of the comparison, if available. Before
re-opening a session file, load the same ArcCHECK measurement file and Planned Dose file
that were in use when the session file was created.
Note: If the results are not what you expected, verify that the data files contain the
information needed for accurate processing. See About Control Point Dose Analysis
Synchronization on page 101.

Arc
Dose selection
Difference list
Results
Currently
selected
sub arc
(shaded and
Analysis Histogram Polar Graph Control Panel outlined).
Figure 9-11. Example of Completed Full Arc Comparison with Partial Arcs Every 9 CPs
7 If the data includes multiple arcs, an Arc selection list is displayed in the polar graph panel.
Choose the arc that you want to display. For details, see Polar Graph Control Panel on
page 100.
8 To select a different partial arc, click on the partial arc in the polar graph or use the movie
control buttons. For details, see Polar Graph Control Panel on page 100.
9 Adjust the display in the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose panels using the display toolbar. For
details, see Display Toolbar on page 94.
10 The displayed results can be captured in a report by selecting File > Create PDF Report from
the menu. The report will show the Analysis Histogram and Polar Graph Control Panel exactly
as they are displayed on the screen as well as the analysis options and dose difference
results.
Multiple Arcs
Data from multiple arcs can be imported into Control Point Dose Analysis. There is no limit to how
many arcs can be loaded concurrently and analyzed. When multiple arc data is loaded, the
software performs a comparison of each arc and a comparison of all arcs combined, regardless
of the analysis type. After a successful comparison, the polar graph panel will display an ‘Arc’
selection box that can be used to display the comparison results of each individual single arc or a
composite of all arcs (unless the arcs have mismatched control points, as explained below).
Beam Order
The beam order in the TPS data and ArcCHECK measured data must be the same. If the beam
order in the data sets is different, the software will not display an error message, but the results
will show a large mismatch between the data sets and a very low pass rate. To correct this, acquire
the ArcCHECK measurement again and ensure that the beam order matches the order in the TPS
data.
Control Point Mismatch

With multiple arcs, there is a possibility of misaligned control points, varying arc spans, arcs that
start and end at different gantry angles, and different arc directions (clockwise or
counterclockwise). This section explains how the software handles these instances.
When multiple arc data is loaded into Control Point Dose Analysis, the software checks if the
control points of all arcs are aligned. If the control points do not match, the following message is
displayed:

Figure 9-12. Mismatched Control Points Message
If the control points match, the software checks if the arc spans are different (arc start and end at
different gantry angles) and whether any of the arcs fully overlap other arcs. Then, the options in
the Analysis types panel are updated accordingly.
Mismatched Control Points

The following figure provides an example of mismatched control points. The software will allow
multiple arc data with mismatched control points to be loaded, but it will limit the analysis type to
Full Arc to prevent dose interpolation. The Start and End options will be disabled and the software
will automatically select control point index 0 for the “Start” position and the last index in the list
for the “End” position.
Control Points are Aligned Control Points are Not Aligned
Figure 9-13. Multiple Arcs with Matched and Mismatched Control Points
To process the arcs that have mismatched control points, the software allows a small gantry angle
shift among arcs. For example, if the gantry angle array of Arc 1 is {180, 184, 188, 192, …}, and
the gantry angle array of Arc 2 is {179.9, 183.9, 187.9, 191.9, …}, the software treats the two arcs
as having matched control points. The tolerance of the shift is set to 0.2 degree, which is 10% of
the minimum control point spacing of 2 degrees.
Different Arc Spans or Arc Lengths

In the event that arc spans (or arc lengths) are different or the arcs start and/or end at different
gantry angles, the “Start” and “End” drop-down lists and the list of control points in “Every XX CPs”
will be based on whether one arc fully overlaps all of the other arcs, as follows:
• If one arc fully overlaps all of the other arcs, the “Start “and “End” drop-down lists will display
the first and last control point of the longest arc, but the user can select a partial arc range in
between. The gantry angle direction of the longest arc may or may not match the gantry angle
direction of the other arcs. The “Every XX CPs” list will display the control points of the longest
arc.

For example, if the gantry angle array of Arc 1 is {180°, 184°, 188°, …, 356°, 0°, 4°, 8°}, and the
gantry angle array or Arc 2 is {176°, 172°, 168°…, 0°, …188°, 184°, 180°}, the Start (gantry
angle) will be 176°, and the End (gantry angle) will be 180°.
Arc 2 fully
overlaps Arc 1
Arc 1 (180° Arc 2 (176°

to 8°) to 180 °)
End gantry Start gantry

angle (180°) angle (176°)
Figure 9-14. Example of One Arc Fully Overlapping the Other Arc
• If one arc does not fully overlap all of the other arcs, the “Start” and “End” drop-down lists will
include the gantry angle points of all the arcs, but will use the gantry angle direction of the
first arc. The “Every XX CPs” list will display the control points of the longest arc.
For example, if the gantry angle array of Arc 1 is {180°, 184°, 188°, …, 300°} (31 control points,
30 control point intervals}, and the gantry angle array of Arc 2 is {12°, 8°, 4°, 0°, 356°, …, 280°}
(25 control points, 24 control point intervals), the Start (gantry angle) will be 180°, and End
(gantry angle) will be 12°, and the “Start” and “End” drop-down lists will be disabled. The
“Every XX CPs” drop-down list will contain {1, 2, …, 30}, since the longest of the two arcs has
31 control points and 30 control point intervals.
End gantry
angle (12°)
Overlap (one
arc does not Arc 2 (12°
fully overlap to 280 °)
the other)
Arc 1 (180°
to 300°)
Start gantry
angle (180°)
Figure 9-15. Example of One Arc Not Fully Overlapping the Other Arc
After a successful comparison, the “Arc” drop down list in the polar graph can be used to view
each individual arc. The “All” selection displays the maximum span of all arcs combined.

Control Point Dose Analysis User Interface
Following is an example of the ‘Control Point Dose Analysis’ dialog box after opening and
comparing data.
Menu Options Display Options
Analysis
Type/Arc
Definition
Analysis
Criteria ArcCHECK Plan
Dose Dose
Analysis
Results
Analysis Polar Graph

Histogram Control Panel
Figure 9-16. Control Point Dose Analysis Dialog Box
Menu Options
Table 9-1. Control Point Dose Analysis Menu Options
Menu Submenu Description

File Load TPS Data (DICOM) Used to load the DICOM RT Plan and RT Data files that contain
the TPS dose data.
Load ArcCHECK Movie File Used to load the ArcCHECK measured data.
Load TPS Composite Dose These two options can be used together to compare an
Arc-CHECK measured (*.txt) file to a DICOM RT Dose and
Load ArcCHECK 
Composite Dose DICOM RT Plan file set, or to a single DICOM RT Dose file. This
is the same type of comparison that can be performed in the
main SNC Patient window, but the ArcCHECK data is visualized
as a 3D cylinder in Control Point Dose Analysis.
When loading the DICOM file(s), if a DICOM RT Plan file will not
be loaded select the “Skip RT Plan” box.
Note that when these options are selected, the Analysis type
will be a composite of the full arc. The Analysis criteria can be
modified, but not the analysis type.
Load a Session Before selecting this option, load the ArcCHECK measurement
file and Planned Dose file that were in use when the session file
was created. The software will check if the loaded ArcCHECK
measurement and planned dose files match the filenames
saved in the session. If the files do not match, the software will
check if the dose scaling factor is the same. If they are different,
the current dose scaling factor will be overwritten by the dose
scaling factor saved in the session.
A new session file can be loaded while a session is open. Since
the software can store up to two copies of comparison results,
the comparison(s) in the new session file will become ‘current’.
If there is only one comparison result in the new and previous
session files, the comparison in the new session will become
‘current’ and the previous session’s comparison will become
‘previous’.

Table 9-1. Control Point Dose Analysis Menu Options
Menu Submenu Description

File Save Current Session After comparing the ArcCHECK measured dose to the planned
(Continued) dose, this option can be selected to save the analysis results as
a session file. If a previous copy of the comparison is available,
it is also saved in the session.
Create PDF Report Generates a report of the comparison results.
Clear Clears data from all panels.
Exit Closes Control Point Dose Analysis.
Edit View Current Analysis & • Selecting ‘View Current Analysis’ returns the screen to the
View Previous Analysis most recent comparison results.
• Selecting ‘View Previous Analysis’ returns the screen to the
previous comparison results.
SNC Patient software V6.0.0 or later maintains up to two copies
of complete comparison results. A new set of comparison
results is created each time the user changes analysis type or
criteria and clicks ‘Compare’.
If a comparison is stopped before the calculation is finished, but
the latest set of comparison results (labeled as “current”) is
available, the latest set will be displayed.
Comparison results are handled as a queue, first in first out.
Setup Program Preferences Displays Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences.
Help View Help Displays the ArcCHECK online Help.
Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences
Setting Description Default

State
Apply Measurement When this option is enabled, points that fail a DTA or gamma test will Disabled
Uncertainty be subjected to an additional test where ±1% of the measurement
dose at each detector is added to the dose before performing dose
difference analysis. Additionally, when this option is enabled measure-
ment uncertainty is applied regardless of the comparison method
used (i.e., relative dose, absolute dose (global), or absolute dose local
percent.)
When this option is disabled, measurement uncertainty is not applied.
Figure 9-17. Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences

Setting Description Default
State
Van Dyk (Global % When this option is enabled, the Van Dyk % difference calculation Enabled
Difference) method will be used in dose difference analysis.
• This option will be used for Absolute Dose comparison.
• The test value is the maximum dose value of the ArcCHECK dose
object multiplied by the percent value (% parameter in Analysis Cri-
teria) and divided by 100. Also, a weight function is applied to the
test value, as described below.
• The absolute dose difference between the ArcCHECK dose object
and the plan dose object at each grid point will be compared to the
test value. If the result is less than the test value, the test point pass-
es. For failing points, a DTA or Gamma test is performed. The total
passing points is a combination of the two tests.
When this option is disabled, the Absolute Dose Local Percent com-
parison method is used in dose difference analysis. see Absolute Dose
Local Percent Comparison on page 91.
If Van Dyk (Global % Difference) is disabled, the Dose Difference
Threshold field is enabled. Enter a value as needed.
Apply Weight Func- The dose at the control point level is much lower than the composite Enabled
tion on Low Dose dose. If this option is enabled, a weight function (scaling factor) is
Comparison applied to the test value that is used for Van Dyk (Global % Difference),
Local Percent, and Relative Dose analysis.
This option may be used for absolute or relative dose analysis. For
additional information, see Apply Weight Function on Low Dose Com-
parison on page 90.
Dose Difference The Dose Difference Threshold is used when the Van Dyk (Global % 0.0 cGy
Threshold Difference) program preference is disabled and the program changes
comparison methods from Absolute Dose Global to Absolute Dose
Local Percent.
The Dose Difference Threshold is the minimum dose difference
between the measured and plan data. If the point is within this differ-
ence, it will pass and a DTA or gamma test will not be performed.
The Dose Difference Threshold can be entered in cGy to one decimal
point.
Always Ask for Dose When this option is enabled, the program will prompt for a dose scal- Disabled
Scaling Factor ing factor when loading the Plan data.
• Enabling this option allows absolute dose analysis when the deliv-
ery dose is a fraction of the total calculated dose, which is common
practice in some clinics. For example, if the total planned dose is de-
livered 20 times and the measurement is one fraction, a scale factor
of 0.05 should be entered to scale down the planned dose before
performing absolute dose analysis.
When this option is disabled, the program will not prompt for a dose
scaling factor when loading the Plan data.
Using Min Arc Length This option is only applicable to TPS data that is separated by control Enabled
for AD points. It is not applicable to TPS data that is separated by sub arcs.
• If this option is enabled, a user-selected minimum arc length (in de-
grees) is applied when absolute dose mode is selected. This helps
ensure that updates will not be missed, since the loss of a single up-
date can cause the absolute dose difference test to fail.
• If this option is disabled, a minimum arc length is not applied.
Following is a description of how this feature functions:
Each ArcCHECK dose object is the sum of the dose from a number of
updates. Regardless of how well the synchronization is performed
(see Synchronization on page 82.) the loss of even a single update in
an ArcCHECK dose object can cause the absolute dose difference test
to fail.
For example, if the control point spacing is very small (such as 2°), and
the rotational dose delivery speed is high (such as 360°/2 minutes),
missing a single update may result in an error of 7.5 % since in this
example the ArcCHECK dose object contains composite doses from
13 to 14 measurement updates.
With this preference enabled, absolute dose selected, and Full Arc -
Every XX CPs selected, the Every XX CPs list is updated so that the
number of control points to define the partial arc length starts from a
reasonable number. For example, if the spacing is 2° and the minimum
partial arc length is 10°, the Every XX CPs drop-down list will exclude
numbers 1 through 4 (the 5th CP is 10 degrees, so it will start there).
Min Arc Length If “Using Min Arc Length for AD” is selected, enter the minimum arc 10.0
length (in degrees) to one decimal point. Degrees
Figure 9-17. Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences

Apply Weight Function on Low Dose Comparison
The Van Dyk (Global % Difference) method of determining dose difference is not the standard
method for Control Point Dose Analysis . A weight function (or scaling factor) is applied to the test
value that is used for the Van Dyk calculation, as shown in Equation (1). This subsection describes
how the weight function is calculated.
The standard dose difference analysis equation for Van Dyk (Global % Difference) is:
D m i – D c i  p   MaxDose (1)
where,
Dm(i) = The dose value at grid point (i) in the measurement dose object,
Dc(i) = The dose value at grid point (i) in the calculation dose object,
p = The value from the % field in the “Analysis Criteria” panel,
MaxDose = The maximum dose at a grid point in the measurement dose object.
For composite dose difference analysis of a beam, the dose difference analysis equation for Van
Dyk (Global % Difference) is:
D m i – D c i  p   MaxDose  beam  (2)
where,
MaxDose(beam) = The maximum dose at a grid point in the composite measurement dose
object from a beam.
For control point dose difference analysis of a beam, the dose difference analysis equation for Van
Dyk (Global % Difference) is:
D m i – D c i  p   MaxDose  CP j  (3)
where,
MaxDose(CPj) = The maximum dose at a grid point in the measurement dose object from
CPj (the control point interval).
In general, the maximum dose from a control point interval, MaxDose(CPj) is much smaller than
the maximum dose from a composite dose object - it could be 10 times smaller or more. If each
control point interval is treated as an independent entity, as shown in Equation (3), the analysis
criteria would be too small relative to the composite dose analysis for the beam to be compared
using Equation (2).
For example, if the control point spacing is 4° there are 90 control point intervals in the whole arc.
If MaxDose(beam) = 100 cGy, and p% = 3%, then |Dm(i) - Dc(i)| ≤3 cGy is considered
“passing”.
If MaxDose(CPj) = 4 cGy and p% = 3%, then |Dm(i) - Dc(i)| ≤0.12 cGy is considered
“passing”.
Control points should be by definition independent, but they are not. The first part that makes
them dependent is linac delivery. If the linac is not capable of satisfying the control point, it tries
to compensate for it in the next control point section. The second process that makes control
points dependent is synchronization with the ArcCHECK measurement. The ArcCHECK update
frequency is 50 ms and it is possible that a control point is reached in the middle of ArcCHECK
update. The Synchronization process does not calculate fractions of update and it is possible that
a fraction of dose is in different a control point.

To overcome this problem, a weight function is applied to the comparison criteria. The new dose
difference comparison equation is:
D m i – D c i  p   MaxDose  CP j   Fw (4)
where Fw is a weight function, or scaling factor; making control point dose analysis dependent
on the composite dose entities.
Fw is defined as follows:
Fw = MaxDose  beam   MaxDose  CP j  (5)
Thus, for the example mentioned above,
Fw = MaxDose  beam   MaxDose  CP j  = 100  4 = 5 (6)
and applying the result to Equation (4),
D m i – D c i  p   MaxDose  CP j   Fw = 3  4  5 = 0.6cGy (7)
the percentage is increased 5 times with no weight function applied.
Absolute Dose Local Percent Comparison

If the ‘Van Dyk (Global % Difference)’ option is disabled in the Control Point Dose Analysis Program
Preferences, the Absolute Dose Local Percent comparison method is used for dose difference
analysis. First, an absolute dose test is performed. The test value is the Dose Difference Threshold
defined in the Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences. The points that pass this test are
considered to have zero percent difference, which is reflected in the dose difference histogram.
For the points that fail this test, a percent local test is performed.
In a percent local test, the test value is the % parameter in the analysis criteria. The ratio of dose
difference between the ArcCHECK dose object and the Plan dose object divided by the Plan dose
object dose value at each grid point is compared with the test value. This is a type of normalization
to Plan dose value at the grid point. If the result is less than the test value, the test point passes.
For points that fail this test, a DTA or Gamma test is performed. The total passing points will be a
combination of the three tests.
• For points that pass the Gamma test, dose difference is modified such that it will be within
the outer limits of the passing range. For example in absolute dose difference analysis, if the
passing range is [-3, 3] and the dose difference is -3.5, the point would fail the test. However,
if the point passes the gamma test, the dose difference changes to -3 so that it is in the outer
limits of the passing range. This ensures that the point will be displayed correctly in the dose
difference histogram.
• If the ‘Apply Measurement Uncertainty’ option is enabled in the Control Point Dose Analysis
Program Preferences, points that fail the DTA or gamma test will be subjected to an additional
test. See Apply Measurement Uncertainty in Control Point Dose Analysis Program Preferences
on page 88.

Analysis Type
Start and End Points

Selects the portion of the arc to be analyzed (full arc or partial arc). The
‘indexes’ in the list are created from the sub arc and gantry interval data,
or the control point and gantry interval data, in the RT Plan file. A gantry
interval is the arc length between two sub arcs or control points;
measured in degrees.
• The format of each point is Sub Arc: Gantry Angle or Control Point
Index: Gantry Angle, depending on whether the TPS data is seg-
mented by control points or sub arcs.
• In this example, the data is segmented by sub arcs. There are 24 sub
arcs, starting from gantry angle 179°, and ending at gantry angle
181°.
• The Start List always begins with Sub Arc 0 or Control Point Index 0.
Full arc — choose the first index (in this example, 0) as the Start point and
the last index (in this example, 24) as the End point.
Partial arc — choose any subset of indexes as the Start and End points.
Start and End points can be selected clockwise or counter-clockwise. For
example, select Start = 2: 10° and End = 12: 50° for clockwise, or
Start = 12: 50° and End = 2: 10° for counter-clockwise.
Every XX CPs or Every XX Sub Arc

Sums the dose files for the selected number of indexes before
performing dose difference analysis.*
When the indexes are divided by control point, the user can select one of
the following options:
• For composite analysis select the last control point in the “Every XX
CPs” field. For example, if the arc contains 76 control points (0 to
75), select “Every 75 CPs”. The software will sum the doses of all
control points at each detector point for the ArcCHECK dose object
and sum the doses of all control points at each grid point for the Plan
dose object before performing dose difference analysis. The dose at
the end control point is not counted unless it is at the end of the con-
trol point list. This prevents the update from being counted twice.
• To group into sub arcs and perform dose difference analysis on
each, select a number in the Every XX CPs field. For example, to start
a sub arc at every 5th control point, select “Every 5 CPs”.
• To perform dose difference analysis for each individual control
point, select “Every 1 CPs”.
When the indexes are divided by sub arc, the options are:
• Every 1 Sub Arc — Performs dose difference analysis for each
individual sub arc.
• All Sub Arcs — Performs a composite analysis, where the software
sums the doses of all sub arcs in the ArcCHECK dose object and
sums the doses of all sub arcs in the Plan dose object, before
performing dose difference analysis. The dose at the last point is not
counted to prevent the update from being counted twice.
In the case of multiple arcs, if All Sub Arcs is selected, the Start angle
index is set to the beginning of the multiple arcs, and the End angle index
is set to the last angle index. The software will perform a composite
analysis for each arc, plus an analysis of all arcs combined. If Every 1 Sub
Arc is selected, the software will perform a composite analysis of each
arc, but a composite analysis of all arcs is not available.
Average CPs
Averages each control point with its closest neighbor control points
before performing dose difference analysis. This improve the statistics of
the comparison.
• For example, nominal CP5 would be an average of (4, 5, 6), nominal
CP6 would be average of (5,6,7), etc.
• Assuming “n” number of total control points, nominal CP1 would be
an average of (1,2) and normal CPn would be an average of (n-1,n).
Figure 9-18. Analysis Types Options
* The arc length is defined by a set number of control points instead of arc radian. Spaces among control points
may be uneven, so defining arc length by control points allows the start and end angle of each partial arc to be
located at a control point.

Analysis Criteria
Note: Starting with SNC Patient software version 6.2, the method of determining
normalization dose in Control Point Dose Analysis has changed. The new method is
described below. When comparing Control Point Dose Analysis test results from v6.2
and a previous software version, you may notice a change in the test results.
Parameters
• % – Percent difference threshold between points being compared.
• mm – Distance from detector to be analyzed - used in dis-
tance-to-agreement (DTA) dose difference analysis.
• TH (threshold) (%) – detectors with a dose value above the threshold
percentage are included in the analysis for relative dose. If absolute
dose is selected, detectors with a dose value above the threshold
dose value are included in the analysis, in which the threshold dose
value is calculated by the threshold percentage divided by 100 and
multiplied by the maximum dose value from the ArcCHECK dose
object or the Plan dose object.
Comparison Method
• DTA – distance-to-agreement analysis. For details, see Distance to
Agreement on page 158.
• - Gamma Analysis
Comparison Mode
• RD (relative dose) – compares relative (normalized) dose. The test
value is the value entered for % difference.
• Before starting analysis, the software finds the maximum dose at
ArcCHECK detector positions in the Plan dose object and uses this
to normalize the Plan dose object. This may or may not be the max-
imum dose value of the Plan dose object.
• Then, the software finds the dose from the ArcCHECK dose object
at the same position where the normalization dose was located in
the Plan dose object. This may or may not be the maximum dose
for the ArcCHECK dose object.
• The above steps ensure that the normalization dose for the Arc-
CHECK dose object and the Plan dose object are in the same grid
position.
• The dose difference between two normalized data sets at each grid
point is compared to the Test Value, which is a percent value of the
Analysis Criteria. If the result is less than the Test Value, the test
point passes.
• For failing points, a DTA or Gamma test is also performed. The total
passing points is a combination of the two tests.
• AD (absolute dose) – compares absolute dose values. Before starting
the comparison, ensure that Van Dyk Difference and Min Arc Length
are selected in the Program Preferences.
Compare Button
• Click to begin dose difference analysis. Once the comparison is
started, it can be stopped by clicking the button a second time.
• The software can maintain up to two copies of complete comparison
results. The comparison results are handled as a queue, first in first
out. If a comparison is stopped before the calculation is finished, but
another set of comparison results are available, the other set will be
displayed.
• To toggle between two sets of comparison results, choose “View
Current Analysis” or “View Previous Analysis” from the Edit menu.
Figure 9-19. Analysis Criteria Options
For details about gamma analysis, see Gamma Analysis on page 156.
For details about Control Point Dose Analysis program preferences, see Control Point Dose
Analysis Program Preferences on page 88.

Dose Difference Results
Results
• % Pass – Percentage of passing points.
• Pass – Number of passing points.
• Fail – Number of failed points.
• Total – Total number of points.
Figure 9-20. Dose Difference Results
Display Toolbar
The display toolbar options only affect the ArcCHECK dose and planned dose panels.
Tool Description
Changes the ArcCHECK dose and planned dose panels from 3D view to 2D
View Dose Map in 2D view.
3D view 2D view
When 2D view is enabled, the Rotate in All Directions and Rotate Around
Y-Axis commands are disabled. These commands are only for 3D view.
This option is useful when viewing a helical profile. The display in the Anal-
ysis Histogram panel changes to a profile graph and the horizontal axis is
measured in degrees instead of radius. For details about helical profile, see
Profile Options on page 99.
Changes the ArcCHECK dose and planned dose panels to 3D view.
View Dose Map in 3D
Detectors check box Show/hide detectors in the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose panels.
Enabled Disabled
Note: Plan dose is a dose volume. When this checkbox is selected, the
dose volume is extracted to detector dose using tri-linear interpolation.
Dose Map check box Show/hide cylinder surface in the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose panels.
Enabled Disabled
Figure 9-21. Display Toolbar Options

Tool Description
Display Color
Colorwash White Hot Black Hot

Note: When ‘Failed Points’ or ‘All Points’ is selected in the display toolbar,
only White Hot mode is applied to the Plan dose panel.
To adjust the brightness of the selected color, click this button and then
Brightness move the slider.
Black Hot at 50% brightness
When the display color is close to the background color, changing the
brightness makes the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose more visible.
Select this button, then click and drag in any direction for full 360 degree
Rotate in all directions rotation.
Note: This function can also be activated by right-clicking in the ArcCHECK

dose or TPS dose panel and selecting ‘Rotate’ from the right-click menu.
The ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose are displayed in the couch coordinate
Rotate around Y-axis system with the Y-axis axial to the ArcCHECK. Rotating around the Y-axis
makes the ArcCHECK rotate around its center axis.
Click this button and then click and drag to rotate around the Y-axis.
Note: This function can also be activated by right-clicking in the ArcCHECK

dose or TPS dose panel and selecting ‘Rotate Y Axis’ from the right-click
menu.
Select this button and then click and drag from left to right to zoom in, or
Zoom In/Zoom Out right to left to zoom out.
Note: For the best view, maximize the panel by clicking the button in
the lower right corner of the panel.
Note: The zoom function can also be activated by right-clicking in the Arc-
CHECK dose or TPS dose panel and selecting ‘Zoom’ from the right-click
menu.
Resets the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose to their original orientation and
Reset Zoom & Rotation size.

Tool Description
Plan radio button This option displays the planned dose.
Failed Points radio button After comparison, this option displays only the failed
points in the planned dose. Failed high points are dis-
played in red, and failed low points are displayed in
blue. The dose difference map changes to white hot
mode and is not affected by other display mode
changes.
All Points radio button After comparison, this option displays all of the points
(failed and passed) that are within the distance thresh-
old in the plan dose. The number of displayed points
matches the number displayed in the ‘Current Dose Dif-
ference Result’ panel.
Passed points are displayed in green. Failed points are
displayed in red. The dose difference map changes to
white hot mode and is not affected by other display
mode changes.
DTA or Map radio button If Gamma Analysis was performed, you can select the gamma map option
to see more details graphically. The dose distribution for the ArcCHECK
measured data is interpolated from 10x10 mm to 1x1 mm for better graphic
appearance. To display the gamma value for a detector, choose the ‘Select
Detector’ context menu option, and then left-click on a detector and hold
down the mouse button to display a pop-up window.
If DTA analysis was performed, the gamma map option is not available. A
DTA map is displayed instead.
Gamma index or DTA values are not calculated for detectors with a value
below the threshold. The gray areas in the Gamma map represent these
detectors.
ArcCHECK Dose Panel
Couch
coordinate
axes Legend
Normalization
point (green
dot - relative
comparison
only)
Entrance dose Exit dose for

for the arc se- the arc
lected in the selected in the
polar graph. polar graph.
Click to
display the
path to the RT Click to
Plan file maximize
the panel
Figure 9-22. ArcCHECK Dose Panel
This panel provides a visual representation of the ArcCHECK dose data for the portion of the arc
that is selected in the Polar Graph Control panel (see Polar Graph Control Panel on page 100.) The
display in this panel can be modified using the buttons in the Display toolbar (see Display Toolbar
on page 94) or by selecting one of the context menu options, which are:
• Load ArcCHECK Movie File — Select to load an ArcCHECK measurement in movie (*.acml)
format.
• Load ArcCHECK Composite Dose — Select to load an ArcCHECK measurement in composite
file (*.txt) format.
• Rotate — Select to enable rotation.

• Rotate Y Axis — Select to enable rotation along the Y axis.
• Zoom — Select to enable zoom functions in the panel.
• Select Detector — Select this option then left-click on a detector to select it as the intersec-
tion of the horizontal (helical) and vertical (longitudinal) profiles. The keyboard arrow keys can
be used to select a neighboring detector when a longitude profile or a helical profile is
highlighted.
• Before activating this option, it is helpful to make the detectors visible by selecting the
Detectors checkbox in the display toolbar and to zoom in on the detector location. If the
detector is not visible, rotate the 3D view or select 2D view.
• To view information about a detector, click and hold the left mouse button and then hover
the cursor over the detector. The detector is highlighted and a pop-up box displays the
detector’s location (row and column index), Y location, theta (angle), and dose value. The
detector position increments from the bottom left corner of the 2D image (row index 0,
column index 0).
• Clear ArcCHECK Movie Data — Clears data from the ArcCHECK panel and also clears analysis
results and the two lower panels.
Planned Dose Panel
Couch
coordinate
axes Legend
Normalization
point (green
dot - relative
comparison
only)
Entrance dose Exit dose for

for the arc se- the arc
lected in the selected in the
polar graph. polar graph.
Click to
display the
path to the RT Click to
Plan file maximize
the panel
Figure 9-23. Planned Dose Panel
This panel provides a visual representation of the Plan dose data for the portion of the arc that is
selected in the Polar Graph Control panel (see Polar Graph Control Panel on page 100.) The display
in this panel can be modified using the buttons in the Display toolbar (see Display Toolbar on
page 94) or by selecting one of the context menu options, which are:
• Load TPS Data (DICOM) — Select to load a DICOM data set.
• Load TPS Composite Dose — Select to load a DICOM RT Dose and DICOM RT Plan file set,
or a single DICOM RT Dose file to compare against ArcCHECK composite data (*.txt file).
• Rotate — Select to enable rotation.
• Rotate Y Axis — Select to enable rotation along the Y axis.
• Zoom — Select to enable zoom functions in the panel.
• Select Detector — Select this option then left-click on a detector to select it as the intersec-
tion of the horizontal (helical) and vertical (longitudinal) profiles. The keyboard arrow keys can
be used to select a neighboring detector when a longitude profile or a helical profile is
highlighted.
the cursor over the detector. The detector is highlighted and a pop-up box displays the
detector’s location (row and column index), Y location, theta (angle), and dose value. The

detector position increments from the bottom left corner of the 2D image (row index 0,
column index 0).
• Clear Plan Data — Clears data from the Plan panel and also clears analysis results and the two
lower panels.
Analysis Histogram Panel
Histogram Options
The Analysis Histogram panel displays a histogram graph of the analysis results for the portion of
the arc that is selected in the Polar Graph Control panel (see Polar Graph Control Panel on
page 100.) There are three histogram options: Dose Difference, Distance to Agreement (DTA), or
Gamma Index histogram.
• The Dose Difference Histogram displays the true dose difference between the ArcCHECK
measured dose and the planned dose. The pass, cold and hot points are the points resulting
from comparison with dose difference criteria. The pass rate at the top of the panel is the
passing rate without counting Dose to Agreement or Gamma Index test results. The ‘Current
Analysis Results’ panel shows the total number of points greater than the threshold. Points
outside of the display range will be in the leftmost or rightmost bin, depending on whether
they failed low or high.
• The DTA histogram displays the results from the Dose to Agreement test results and the dose
difference test results. The DTA test result is displayed in the Analysis Result panel if the anal-
ysis type is DTA. Otherwise, the results of the Gamma Index test are displayed.
• The Gamma Index histogram displays the average gamma index value and the maximum
gamma index value from Gamma Analysis. This histogram is also included in the PDF report.
Gamma Analysis must be performed to enable the Gamma Index and DTA histogram options.
To zoom in on a section of the histogram, click and drag the cursor to the right. To zoom out, click
and drag the cursor to the left.
Dose Difference Histogram Distance to Agreement Gamma Index Histogram

Histogram
Figure 9-24. Analysis Histogram Panel Options
Note: Analysis results can be cleared from the Analysis Histogram and Polar Graph
panels by right-clicking the mouse in either panel and selecting ‘Clear’ from the con-
text menu. Analysis results will also be cleared if any analysis criteria or any analysis
option is changed. If desired, the analysis results can be recovered by selecting Edit
> View Current from the menu.

Profile Options
The profile buttons in the Analysis Histogram panel apply a longitudinal or helical profile in the
ArcCHECK measured dose and planned dose panels. The Analysis Histogram panel displays a
graph of dose difference along the selected profile.
Longitudinal Helical
profile profile
Points =
measured
dose values
Cursor
tool
Profile =
planned
dose values
Longitudinal Profile Helical Profile
Figure 9-25. Profile Options
As shown in the above figure, the profile in the ArcCHECK measured dose and the planned dose
panels is represented by a yellow dashed line. The ArcCHECK has a total of 21 spiral rings, with
66 diodes at each ring. The spiral rings are numbered from 1 to 21, starting from the rear panel of
the ArcCHECK. The longitudinal profiles are numbered from 1 to 66, and increment clockwise. To
change the profile location, click on the profile and drag it to another location. You can also use
the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the profile.
If the ArcCHECK dose and Plan dose are visualized in 3D, the Analysis Histogram displays the
spiral ring dose by projecting the 3D helical ring to a 2D polar graph. The points in the polar graph
represent dose values from the measured dose, but only for diodes with dose values above the
threshold. The angles in the graph are the same as those shown in the other three panels, and the
radius of the point represents the dose value. The blue profile plot represents the planned dose
values along the spiral ring.
Cursor Tool in Histogram and Profile Graph

A cursor tool is available in the histogram views and the Longitudinal profile view. Click the cursor
tool to display the coordinates of the selected position in a pop up window. The coordinates are
formatted as follows: Y(X) = dose value, with Y representing the vertical axis, X representing the
horizontal axis, and dose value in cGy. For example, Y(14.2) = 8.3 indicates that the horizontal axis
value is 14.2 mm, and the dose value is 8.3 cGy.
The Dose and Position, or number of points in a bin and bin position, update as the cursor is
moved. Click inside of the pop-up window to close it.

Polar Graph Control Panel
Degrees
Arc selection
list
Legend
(red=high,
green=pass, The selected por-
blue=low) tion of the arc is
shaded and out-
lined
Results for the

currently selected
sub arcs
Movie control
buttons
Figure 9-26. Control Point Polar Graph
The Analysis Results panel displays the Pass and Fail results for the portion of the arc that is
selected in the Polar Graph Control panel. The selected portion of the arc is shaded and outlined
in blue. To select a different portion of the arc, double-click on the desired portion of the arc or use
the movie control buttons.
Step Step count-

clockwise er-clockwise
Pause
Play Play count-
clockwise er-clockwise
Figure 9-27. Polar Graph Movie Control Buttons
When movie playback is selected, the options in the Analysis Types and Analysis Criteria panels
are disabled. When movie playback reaches the last portion of the arc, or if the pause button is
pressed, the options are re-enabled.
Note: Analysis results can be cleared from the Polar Graph and Analysis Histogram
panels by right-clicking the mouse in either panel and selecting ‘Clear’ from the con-
text menu. Clearing these panels also clears the ‘Current Analysis Results panel. If
desired, the analysis results can be recovered by selecting Edit > View Current from
the menu.
Multiple Arcs
After a successful comparison with multiple arc data, the polar graph panel displays an ‘Arc’
selection box that allows the user to choose which arc is displayed in the polar graph. The box
displays the number of arcs in numeric sequence (1, 2, 3, etc.) and if applicable, the ‘All’ option
displays a composite of all arcs.
If any of the arcs have mismatched control points, the “All” option will only be visible when the full
arc is selected in the Analysis Types panel. For details, see Multiple Arcs on page 84.

Resizing Panels
There are two ways to change the size of the panels in the Control Point Dose Analysis dialog box:
• clicking and dragging the resize icons.
• maximizing a panel by clicking the maximize icon in the lower right corner.
Resize icon:
click and drag Resize icon: click
up or down to and drag left or
resize panels right to resize
horizontally. panels vertically.
Maximize
icon
Figure 9-28. Resizing Panels
The maximize panel has five buttons in the lower right corner. These buttons can be used to toggle
to another maximized panel or to return to the four-panel display.
About Control Point Dose Analysis Synchronization

When the ArcCHECK measured data and TPS data are loaded in Control Point Dose Analysis , a
function called SYNC(T) synchronizes the ArcCHECK data to the control points in the RT Plan. The
SYNC(T) function extracts data from the files and places a time stamp at each control point. Then,
the time stamped control points are used to integrate dose updates from the ArcCHECK
measured file into ArcCHECK Dose objects for each control point interval.
The following information is used to create the ArcCHECK dose object:
• Update time for ArcCHECK dose measurement = 50 ms.
• Number of control points in the RT Plan. If the number is N, there will be N - 1 RT Dose files.
• Dose data in the interval between control point I and I + 1 (from each RT Dose file).
• Control point information and gantry angle information associated with each control point
(from the RT Plan file).
• Gantry angle information and time associated with the gantry angle (from the ArcCHECK mea-
sured file).
Control Point Dose Analysis Data Handling

The Control Point Dose Analysis feature processes a large amount of data, particularly when
analyzing multiple arcs. This section describes how the program handles each type of data and
where it stores the data during and post-processing.
ArcCHECK Movie File

After the ArcCHECK movie file is loaded into Control Point Dose Analysis, it is stored in RAM
memory.
ArcCHECK Dose Objects

ArcCHECK dose objects contain ArcCHECK measured data between two adjacent control points.
An ArcCHECK dose object is smaller than a RT Dose object, however there may be hundreds of

ArcCHECK dose objects for multiple arcs. The Control Point Dose Analysis program does not store
ArcCHECK dose objects in RAM memory or on the hard disk, they are created as needed.
Plan Dose Objects

Plan dose objects contain plan dose data between two adjacent control points. Individual plan
dose objects are not stored, but the composite dose for all plan dose objects is stored in RAM
memory. This allows the composite dose data to be accessed quickly when the user switches arc
view in the polar graph, selects back up calculation results, or changes parameters before
recalculating.
Calculated Dose Data

Once dose data has been calculated, it is stored on the hard disk and retrieved from there as
needed. Calculated dose data is very large, so it is not stored in RAM memory.
Control Point Dose Analysis Report

After a successful comparison, the results can be saved to a report by selecting the File > Create
PDF Report menu option. The report contains the patient name/ID, analysis type, date/time
stamp, signature line, analysis criteria, dose difference, distance to agreement, and gamma index
histograms, a polar graph, and the analysis results. Following is an example of a multiple arc
Control Point Dose Analysis report:

Figure 9-29. Example of Control Point Dose Analysis Report, Multiple Arcs, Page 1 of 2

Figure 9-30. Example of Control Point Dose Analysis Report, Multiple Arcs, Page 2 of 2

ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA (Per Control Point)
The ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA feature allows you to evaluate the difference between the planned
and delivered MLC pattern to check for inaccuracies in leaf positioning. This can be useful, for
example, in troubleshooting a QA plan for which composite QA results were suspect or failing.
The MLC QA algorithm analyzes the MLC pattern of a treatment plan (as defined in the RT Plan
file), calculates the expected pattern of dose in the diodes based on the per-control point MLC
information in the RT Plan, and compares it to the measured pattern of ArcCHECK diode dose as
a function of control point. Discrepancies between the expected and measured dose distributions
are displayed in a histogram and in an interactive MLC map that shows the position of each diode.
The discrepancies are also weighted based on severity and grouped in bins based on the
presence of an MLC leaf, which allows the identification of potential positional MLC errors.
Note: The ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA feature can detect an error of 5mm or greater in
the planned position of an MLC leaf.
Procedure
1 Select Tools > ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA.
2 Select File > Load ArcCHECK Movie File, select the desired movie file, and then click Open.
Note: If loading TomoTherapy TPS data, ensure that the ArcCHECK movie file was
collected using SNC Patient V6.5 or later.
3 Select File > Load DICOM RT Plan (MLC), select the desired RT Plan file, and then click
Open.
The software extracts couch angle, collimator angle, gantry angle, jaw positions, and MLC
leaf positions per control point from the RT Plan. The figure below shows an example of the
ArcCHECK MLC QA user interface:
Beam Entry Beam Exit
Analysis of
selected
detector
Analysis
Criteria
Selected
Leaf
Selected Leaf
MLC
Potential
Error
Summary
Analysis
Histogram
Control Points
Figure 9-31. Example of ArcCHECK MLC QA Interface
• The left pane displays analysis parameters and a summary of MLC leaves in fault likeli-
hood order. (see detailed explanation below.)
ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA (Per Control Point) 105

• The upper left and right panes display beam shape in BEV (beam’s eye view), diodes on
the Beam Entry side, and diodes on the Beam Exit side, respectively, with color coded
diodes to indicate pass/warn/fail.
• The lower left pane displays an analysis histogram that shows the total number of
pass/warn/fail diodes for the selected control point.
• The lower right pane displays the plan control points. Each control point is color coded
with the same pass/warn/fail colors as the histogram and diodes.
• To maximize a pane, click the Maximize button.
• To toggle a pane between Beam Entry, Beam Exit, and All Detectors, click the Cycle View
button.
• To view the path to the selected ArcCHECK measured or RT Plan file, click the Information
button.
4 Select the error tolerance in the analysis criteria panel. The defaults are Warn 25% and Fail
50%. Click Apply to update the display.
The analysis results represent the difference between measured and estimated values in
relative mode. For details, see Measured and Estimated Dose Comparison on page 108.
• The pass/warn/fail color codes have the following meaning.
• Dark Red - Fail High (the measured value is greater than the estimated value)
• Light Red - Warn High
• Dark Blue - Fail Low (the measured value is less than the estimated value)
• Light Blue - Warn Low
5 In the lower right pane, select the desired arc and control point. Click a control point in the
pane to select it or toggle through the control points using the arrows at the bottom of the
pane. The control point index and gantry angle is displayed for the selected control point.
• Selecting a control point updates the Histogram to show the total number of pass, warn
(high/low), or fail (high/low) detectors. The Beam Entry and Exit panes are also updated.
6 Click a leaf in the Beam Entry and Exit panes to display the leaf number and position.
7 Click to select a diode in the Beam Entry and Exit panes. The display shows the Measured
and Expected values and the absolute percent difference for the selected diode.
8 Repeat steps 5 through 8 as needed until the review is complete.
9 If desired, print a report of the MLC QA results for the plan.
Algorithm
This section provides a summary of the actions performed by the MLC QA algorithm.
The following steps are performed when the RT Plan and ArcCHECK measurement are loaded:
a. Measured data and RT Plan are synchronized using a proprietary SYNC(T) function.
b. ArcCHECK dose distribution per Control Point (CP) is calculated.
c. Estimated dose distribution is calculated per Control Point (CP) based on MLC leaf
position in RT Plan.
d. Measured and Estimated dose distributions are compared
e. Differences between Measured and Estimated dose distributions are weighted and
added into Faulty Likelihood analysis summary.
RT Plan and Measured Data Synchronization

Data is synchronized using a proprietary SYNC(T) function. The function assigns a time stamp to
each CP in the RT Plan based on Gantry angle, dose rate and dose and beam shape. The result is
Control Point with time information. The ArcCHECK measurement (time based) can then be
associated with each CP segment.

Dose Distribution in ArcCHECK Per Control Point
The ArcCHECK MLC QA algorithm integrates signal in ±50 ms intervals around a Control Point
except for the very first and last CPs where signal is integrated in ±100 ms intervals. Dose
distribution in ArcCHECK is not perfectly identical to dose distribution defined by CP. Rather, the
ArcCHECK dose distribution is slightly altered by two surrounding CPs and the fact that leaves
move between CPs.
Estimated Dose Distribution in ArcCHECK Calculation

The calculation of estimated dose distribution consists of the following steps:
MLC Map
The MLC leaf map for each control point is generated based on RT Plan information. The MLC map
is represented by a large matrix, 800 x 800 integers with pixel size of 0.5 x 0.5 mm (located at
isocenter, in Beam's Eye view orientation). The MLC map is then painted based on MLC leaf
presence. If a leaf is not present at a particular location, the map value is 0; if a leaf is present, the
map value for the location is 1.
Diode Position Calculation

The position of each ArcCHECK diode in the MLC leaf map is calculated. ArcCHECK diode
coordinates are projected to 100 cm SAD and rotated if necessary.
Note: The software positions the ArcCHECK detectors with respect to the MLC posi-
tion (i.e., ArcCHECK detectors are rotated instead of MLC leaves.)
Theoretical Raw Diode Response Calculation

Theoretical raw diode response (RDR) is calculated using a penumbra weight function. The
penumbra weight function is defined in a text file: Penumbra_model.txt.
Figure 9-32. ArcCHECK MLC QA Penumbra Weight Function
The penumbra weight function defines the weight value for each pixel depending on its distance
from the diode position.
The theoretical raw diode response (RDR) for each ArcCHECK diode is calculated (estimated
response) based on the diode's location in the MLC leaf map. Diodes in the top and bottom portion
of the ArcCHECK use a different penumbra weight function (PWF). The algorithm analyzes all
pixels around each diode position located within a distance defined by the penumbra weight
function. If the pixel is occupied by an MLC leaf/jaw, the pixel contribution to the estimated diode
signal is 0. If the pixel is not occupied by an MLC leaf/jaw, the pixel contribution to the estimated
diode signal is equal to the value of the PWF at the distance that is identical to the distance from
the evaluated pixel to the diode origin pixel.
The following figure provides a simplified example of penumbra weight function where the RDR
is calculated as follows:

• Yellow represents the diode position
• Other colors represent the pixels that are the same distance from the diode
• The number inside the pixels represents the assigned weight values.
• Gray represents the presence of a jaw or MLC leaf.
This diode’s position is not affected by leaves This diode’s position is at the edge of a jaw or
or jaws. The overall RDR is the sum of all MLC leaf but closer to the beam. The overall
weight values = 10 RDR is the sum of all weight values = 6.5
Figure 9-33. Example of Theoretical Raw Diode Response (RDR) Calculation
RDRs are calculated in two sets, one for the ArcCHECK "top" (half of the cylindrical phantom that
is closer to the beam), and the second for the ArcCHECK "bottom" (half of the cylindrical phantom
that is further from the beam).
Estimated Dose Distribution Estimated Dose Distribution

“Top” Half of ArcCHECK “Bottom” Half of ArcCHECK
Figure 9-34. Example of Estimated Dose Distribution for “Top” and “Bottom” of ArcCHECK
Once all RDRs are calculated, the algorithm finds the maximum RDR (for ArcCHECK top and
bottom separately) and normalizes all RDRs to the maximum. The normalized RDRs become the
estimated dose distribution in ArcCHECK.
Measured and Estimated Dose Comparison

Normalized measured RDR values are compared against estimated theoretical calculated RDR
values.
• If the absolute difference is smaller than 25%, the diode is "green" and the detector passes.
• If the absolute difference is larger than 25% and smaller than 50%, the diode is "light red or
light blue" and the detector is "warn high" or "warn low", respectively.
• If the absolute difference is larger than 50%, the diode is "red" and the detector is "fail high"
or "fail low", respectively.

Note: The thresholds can be set in the Analysis panel.
Fault Likelihood Analysis Summary

Fault likelihood analysis tries to identify MLC leaves that have the highest probability of positional
error. The analysis weights information of detectors that fail as follows:
• If the absolute difference fails, the MLC leaf in proximity gets a Faulty Likelihood value (FLV)
of 1.
• If the absolute difference warns, the MLC leaf in proximity get a FLV of 0.5
• If more MLC leaves are in proximity of the failed absolute difference, the above values are
weighted based on the surface occupied by each MLC leaf. The following figure provides a
simplified example (limited number of pixels, number of pixels given by the PWF.)
Diode active region (gray area) is affected by Diode active region (gray area) is affected by
one MLC leaf (red area). The leaf gets a Fault two MLC leaves (red area). The leaf Fault
Likelihood Value (FLV) of 1 (or 0.5 if the analy- Likelihood value (FLV) will be split between the
sis results in ‘warn’. two leaves, based on occupied surface. The left
MLC leaf will get 0.2439 and the right MLC leaf
will get 0.7561 because the surface covered by
the right MLC leaf is ~3 times larger. If the
analysis results in ‘warn’, then the FLVs will be
Figure 9-35. Example of Fault Likelihood Value (FLV) Calculation
• All FLVs associated with individual leaves are summed for all diodes and all control points.
• The summed FLVs are then divided by the number of control points. A FLV value of 1 indicates
that a leaf fails during every CP.
• The Faulty likelihood analysis summary is a sorted list of FLV values.

Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle
The Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle Feature displays angle information in a graph as a function
of time in IEC coordinates. Right-clicking a point on the graph displays the gantry angle for the
selected update to the left of the graph. The data may be exported to a text file for further analysis.
1 Select Tools > ArcCHECK Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle. The tool opens in a separate
window.
2 On the right side of the Movie File field, click the Browse button and open a movie file (Figure
9-36).
• The graph in the right panel displays the angle information as a function of time in IEC
coordinates. Angles displayed in the graph are compensated for any physical rotation.
• The ArcCHECK Inclinometer Setup (IEC) group box displays the physical inclinometer
values for rotation and tilt (in degrees).
Note: The values for Rotation and Tilt should be close to 0° or 360°. Virtual inclinome-
ters are compensated for any setup errors (physical inclinometer rotation values).
Physical inclinometer
rotation and tilt values
Visual representation of the point

selected in the graph
Figure 9-36. Virtual Inclinometer – Gantry Angle, Zoomed In
3 If the ArcCHECK electronics were facing the gantry when the measurement was collected,
select the ArcCHECK Inverted check box and then click Refresh to update the graph.
4 If necessary, zoom in on the points in the graph by left-clicking on an area of interest and
dragging the mouse up and to the right. (To return to the normal view, left-click and drag the
mouse up and to the left.)
5 To view representation of a gantry angle in the left panel, use one of the following options:
• Right-click a point in the graph.
• Right-click on the graph, then while holding the mouse button down, drag the graph
cursor to the right or left to the desired point.
6 To export gantry angle vs. time data to a .txt file, click Export. Enter a descriptive name and
select a location for the saved file .

Figure 9-37. Example, Gantry Angle Data Export
Merge (for Longer Field Size)
The ArcCHECK detector array covers up to ~20 cm fields. Some applications (such as head and
neck cases) require fields longer than 20 cm. With SNC Patient software version 6.0 or later, two
ArcCHECK measurements can be merged to extend the field size to 36 cm on the Y axis. When
collecting ArcCHECK measurements for merging, it may be useful to use the ArcCHECK Scatter
Accessory. For Scatter Accessory use and set up instructions, see Scatter Accessory on page 206.
To use the ArcCHECK Merge (longer field size) feature, collect one measurement and save it,
invert the ArcCHECK and acquire a second measurement and save it, then use the SNC Patient
software to merge the two measurements. In the overlapping area between the two
measurements, the dose at each diode is averaged (not summed).
Exposure 2
• –80 mm Y axis offset
Exposure 1 • ArcCHECK Inverted check
• 80 mm Y axis offset box enabled
• Electronics toward target • Electronics toward gun
• CAX aligned with 8 cm line • CAX aligned with 8 cm line
on ArcCHECK on ArcCHECK
Electronics
8 cm
8 cm
36 cm Merged Field
Figure 9-38. Illustration, ArcCHECK Merge for Longer Field Size
1 Download CT images for a longer ArcCHECK from the Sun Nuclear Support website (see Sup-
port Website on page 228) and then create the plan in the TPS using these images.
2 In the SNC Patient toolbar, select the desired patient plan. If you need to create a new patient
plan, see Creating a New Patient Plan on page 75.
Merge (for Longer Field Size) 111

3 Save the TPS data created from the longer CT images in the TPS Dose area of the Patient Plan.
For details, see Adding Files to a Patient Plan on page 76.
4 Set up the accelerator to deliver the plan to ArcCHECK, and then take two ArcCHECK
measurements as described below.
5 Position the ArcCHECK with the electronics toward the target, and the central axis aligned
with the 8 cm marker on the ArcCHECK.
6 In the SNC Patient software:
• Click the Edit button in the set 1 toolbar
• IMPORTANT - In the ‘Enter CAX Shift’ dialog box, enter a shift for the Y axis of 80 mm
and click OK. If you do not perform this step, you will not be able to merge data.
7 Acquire the first measurement and save it in the patient plan.
8 Invert the ArcCHECK so that the electronics are toward the gun, and align the central axis with
the 8 cm line of the ArcCHECK.
9 In the SNC Patient software:
• Click the Edit button in the set 1 toolbar
• In the ‘Enter CAX Shift’ dialog box, enter a shift for the Y axis of –80 mm.
• Select the ArcCHECK Inverted check box and click OK
10 Acquire the second measurement and save it in the patient plan.
11 Select Tools > Combine > SNC Device Data from the menu. The Combine Measured Files
dialog box is displayed.
12 Click Select Files to Combine. The default location should be the device measured files in
the selected patient plan. Select both measurements (hold down the CTRL key while
selecting), and then click Open.
13 The files are listed in the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box. Click Merge.
Figure 9-39. Combine Measured Files Dialog Box, with Data Selected
14 A ‘Save As’ dialog box opens. The default file location is the ‘MapCHECK Measured’ folder in
the selected Patient Plan. Enter a filename that describes this measurement as ‘merged’, and
then click Save.
Note: If the inverted measurement does not have a shift -80 mm, an error message
appears stating that the measurement with a 180 degree inversion should have a shift
of –80 mm. To correct the error, repeat the second measurement following the instruc-
tions in Step 9 above.
15 In the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box, click Open in Set1.
16 The merged file opens in Set 1 of the SNC Patient software. Note that the field size is larger,
and that the label at the bottom left of the Set 1 panel displays ‘AC Merged’.

Figure 9-40. Example of Merged Data, Opened in Set 1
17 Open the TPS data created using the longer CT images and compare.
Note: Always load the ArcCHECK merged data before loading the TPS data so the soft-
ware knows the size of the cylinder to extract. A warning is displayed if the ArcCHECK
merged data is opened when TPS data is already loaded.
Merge (for Higher Density)
The ArcCHECK Merge (higher density) feature can be used to combine two ArcCHECK
measurements (.txt) to create a high density measurement at the location where the two
measurements overlap.
2 Position the ArcCHECK in the normal setup position (see Initial Position for Measurement or
Calibration on page 13) and acquire a measurement. Save the measurement in the selected
patient plan.
3 Collect a second measurement with a ±5 mm Y axis shift and 2.72 degrees of rotation around
the ArcCHECK’s cylindrical axis (CW or CCW; equivalent to a 6.2 mm X axis shift). Use the shift
markers on the ArcCHECK phantom for precise positioning. For marker locations, see
Phantom Area on page 164.
Note: To verify the rotation, select Setup > MapCHECK 2/ArcCHECK > View Incli-
nometer Readings.
a. When the measurement data is displayed, click Edit in the Set 1 toolbar.
b. In the ‘Enter CAX Shift’ dialog box, enter the Y axis shift (+5 mm or -5 mm) and then click
OK.
c. Save the measurement in the patient plan. Assign a descriptive filename to identify the
shifted and rotated measurement.
Merge (for Higher Density) 113

4 Select Tools > Combine > SNC Device Data from the menu. The ‘Combine Measured Files’
the selected patient plan. Select both measurements (hold down the CTRL key while
selecting), and then click Open.
6 The files are listed in the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box. Click Merge.
Note: If the second measurement does not have the correct rotation, an error mes-
sage appears stating that the rotation difference between the two measurements
exceeds the acceptable range (2.72 ± 0.3 degrees). To correct the error, repeat the
second measurement following the instructions in Step 3 above.
7 A ‘Save As’ dialog box opens. The default file location is the MapCHECK Measured folder in
the selected Patient Plan. Enter a descriptive name to identify the merged file, and then click
Save.
8 In the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box, click Open in Set1, and then click the
Chart/Data button in the Set 1 toolbar to display the values for each detector. Note that the
higher density measurement has dose values between the previous points.
Non-shifted
measurement
Merged
(high density)
measurement
Figure 9-42. The Higher Density Measurement has Dose Values Between the Previous Points
9 Load the TPS data in Set 2.

10 After the plan file loads, click the Chart/Data button in the Set 2 toolbar and note that for each
detector data position in Set 1, an extracted value exists in Set 2 (displayed with a yellow
background).
11 Set the analysis parameters as desired and then compare the merged ArcCHECK
measurement to the TPS data.
Note: Always load the ArcCHECK merged data before loading the TPS data so that the
software knows the size of the cylinder to extract. A warning is displayed if the Arc-
CHECK merged data is opened when TPS data is already loaded.
Concatenate
The Concatenate feature allows you to acquire ArcCHECK measurements of a delivery with mixed
energies and concatenate all of the measurements for the delivery (*.acm movie files) into a single
ArcCHECK movie lite (*.acml) file. The resulting file can be opened using the ArcCHECK Control
Point Dose Analysis feature (see ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis on page 80) or 3DVH
software (see 3DVH Software on page 142.)
the selected patient plan. Select the ArcCHECK movie files (*.acm) that you wish to
concatenate (hold down the CTRL key while selecting), and then click Open.
4 The *.acm files are listed in the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box. Click Concatenate.
5 A ‘Save As’ dialog box opens. The default location is the MapCHECK Measured folder in the
selected Patient Plan. Enter a descriptive filename and then click Save. For example, the
filename could include information such as machine name, plan ID, number of fields,
energies, the word ‘concatenated’, etc.
6 The following message is displayed “ArcCHECK movie lite (.acml) file has been saved.” Click
OK.
Composite
The Composite feature is used to combine multiple ArcCHECK measurements into a single, com-
posite measurement. Dose values at each spatial location are summed, not averaged.
When acquiring the measurements to combine into a composite file, the ArcCHECK must remain
in the same position (no shift).
For ArcCHECK, this feature is typically used to combine an ArcCHECK IMRT delivery that consists
of multiple measurement files into a single integrated file which can be compared to a composite
dose from the planning system.
Concatenate 115
the selected patient plan. Select the ArcCHECK measurements (*.txt) that you want to
combine (hold down the CTRL key while selecting), and then click Open.
4 The selected measurements are displayed in the ‘Combine Measured Files’ dialog box. Click
Composite.
5 A ‘Save As’ dialog box opens. The default location is the MapCHECK Measured folder in the
selected Patient Plan. Enter a descriptive filename and then click Save. The file is saved in
*.txt format.
6 In the Combine Measured Files dialog box, select the Open in Set 1 or Open in Set 2 button.
7 Compare the composite ArcCHECK measurement to the composite dose from the planning
system.
Split Feature
An ArcCHECK or MapCHECK 2 IMRT delivery can be split into multiple files by separating the data
at each location where the beam-off duration exceeds a user-specified minimum value.
The movie file contains updates every 50 ms as well as information about beam-on and beam-off.
Users can specify how the software splits the beams by setting a minimum time between beams.
For example, if the minimum time between beams is set to 10 seconds, this means that when
there is at least 10 seconds of beam off data, a new delivery was started.
A setting in the ‘Split Composite Into Single Beams’ dialog box offers an option to integrate all
beams at the same gantry angle. This only applies to ArcCHECK movie files since ArcCHECK is
capable of measuring gantry angles.
Procedure
1 In the SNC Patient software, select Tools > Split Composite Into Single Beams.
2 Click the Browse button and select an ArcCHECK or MapCHECK 2 movie file for the
composite delivery.
Figure 9-44. Split Composite Into Single Beams
3 Select the options for splitting the beams:

• Minimum Time Between Beams: Enter the minimum number of seconds between
beam-on and beam-off that signifies a new delivery.

• Integrate Beams At The Same Angle: Select the check box to integrate all beams at the
same gantry angle (for ArcCHECK movie measurement only).
4 Examine the data in the table. From left to right, the columns show:
• The number of beams determined by the software
• How long the beam was on for a particular beam
• The time between the beams
• The gantry angle (for ArcCHECK only)
• Maximum dose in each beam
5 If you are satisfied that the software has calculated the beams correctly, click Confirm Split.
Note: If you think the split is not correct, adjust the Minimum Time Between Beams
setting and then click Recalculate to refresh the split using the new criteria.
6 The software saves the individual files in the same directory as the composite movie file. Files
are saved in the following formats:
• ArcCHECK movie files: <MovieFileName>_DeliveredBeamNN_XXX.Xdegs.txt 
(where NN = the beam number, XXX.X = the gantry angle)
• MapCHECK 2 movie files: <MovieFileName>_DeliveredBeamNN.txt
(where NN = the beam number)
Note: Each file is assigned a 2-digit number. When the files are loaded into File Man-
ager for batch analysis, they are displayed in sequential order. Also, selecting Add All
in batch analysis loads the file pairs in sequential order.
7 Analyze the saved beams in the SNC Patient software:
• In set 1, right-click and select Open Device Measured. Select a beam
• In set 2, right-click and select Open Planned Dose/Image Data. Select the TPS
calculated file.
Note: If a Patient Plan was selected, after Confirm Split the user can click the BA but-
ton to perform Batch Analysis with the split beams. See Batch Analysis on page 77.
Machine QA
The Machine QA feature allows you to perform quality assurance tests on the delivery system.
Following are the tests that can be performed using the ArcCHECK instrument:
• Beam Delivery System Reproducibility
• Gantry Speed QA
• Gantry Rotation QA
• Gantry Angle QA
• MLC/Collimator QA
• Beam Profile Flatness and Symmetry
Beam Delivery System Reproducibility

The Beam Delivery System Reproducibility test compares two treatment deliveries for the same
patient plan, measured with the same Sun Nuclear instrument, but collected at different times.
This comparison provides a quality assurance test of the treatment unit’s stability over time.
Procedure
1 In the SNC Patient menu, select Tools > Machine QA.
2 In the Machine QA window, select ArcCHECK > Beam Delivery System Reproducibility.
Note: The measurements must be acquired using SNC Patient software version 6.2 or
later. Also, absolute dose is required for the Beam Delivery System Reproducibility cal-
culations. If relative dose measurement data is loaded, a dialog box will prompt for the
Dose Per Count number.
Machine QA 117
3 Load the comparison data. Click Comparison in the File Handling panel or right-click in the
comparison panel and select Load Comparison Movie Data (.acm) from the context menu.
Then, navigate to the ArcCHECK comparison measurement and select it. The data is
displayed in the upper left panel.
4 Load the reference or baseline data. Click Reference in the File Handling panel or right-click
in the reference panel and select Load Reference Movie Data (.acm) from the context menu.
Then, navigate to the ArcCHECK reference or baseline measurement and select it. The data
is displayed in the upper right panel.
5 Select the Analysis Criteria. The defaults are Threshold: 10.0%, Dose: 3.0%, and Time: 1.0
second. If desired, select the Global checkbox. For details about the Analysis Criteria panel,
see Analysis Criteria and Results Panels on page 119.
Note: Quantitative analysis between the two ArcCHECK measurements is performed
using a new analysis technique called Time Gamma (T), which uses a time variable
instead of distance criteria. For details, see Time Gamma Analysis on page 124.
6 Click Compare. The comparison data is analyzed against the baseline data quantitatively, and
then the analysis results are displayed in the Analysis Results panel on the left and the charts
and histograms panels. For details about the Analysis Results panel, see Analysis Criteria and
Results Panels on page 119. For chart and histogram information, see Charts and Histograms
Panels on page 120.
Display tools
Comparison Reference
Panel Panel
Charts and
Histograms
Analysis Results
Figure 9-45. Example of Beam Delivery System Reproducibility Window After Comparison
7 If desired, change the display of the two upper panels. For details, see Display Toolbar on
page 122.
8 Optional — Select a detector to be analyzed. Right-click in the comparison or reference panel,
choose Select Detector from the context menu, and then left-click on the desired detector.
For details about the context menu options, see Comparison and Reference Panel Context
Menu Options on page 119.
9 If desired, save the analysis results as a PDF report.
a. Click the Generate Report button.
b. In the comment window, enter a comment to add to the report or leave the window
blank, and then click OK.
c. In the report preview window, click the Export button, select PDF from the export
options, choose a filename and location, and then click Save.
d. For an example of the report format, see PDF Report on page 124.

Analysis Criteria and Results Panels
Analysis Criteria
Threshold (%) — The detector will only be counted during analysis if the
dose is above this threshold in either the reference or comparison dose.
The valid threshold range is 0 to 100. The default value is 10.0%.
Dose (%) — The dose difference criteria. The valid range is 1 to 100. The
default value is 3.0%.
Time (sec) — The time tolerance criteria used during analysis. This is an
absolute value, defined in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 60. The default
value is 1 second.
Global — When this option is enabled, the analysis uses the maximum
dose from the reference data as the normalization dose. When the option
is disabled, analysis will use the dose at the point being analyzed in the
reference measurement as the normalization dose.
Analysis Results
Evaluated Detectors — The number of detectors that have a dose above
the threshold.
Detectors (T γ ≤1) — The number of detectors that have a time gamma
value less than or equal to 1.
Pass Rate (Tγ ≤1) — The time gamma index analysis pass rate percent-
age for the dose.
Detectors  T  1 
PassRate  T  1  = -----------------------------------------------------  100
EvaluatedDetectors
Maximum Tγ — The maximum time gamma from the Time Gamma
Analysis.
Beam On (Ref) — The total beam-on time in the reference measurement.
Beam On (Comp) — The total beam-on time in the comparison
measurement.
Figure 9-46. Analysis Criteria and Results Panels
Comparison and Reference Panels

The display of the comparison and reference panels can be changed using the tools in the Display
Toolbar (see Display Toolbar on page 122.) When 3D view is selected, the comparison and
reference panels display the ArcCHECK cylinder with lines representing the couch coordinate
system. If the Detectors checkbox is enabled, the detectors are displayed on the ArcCHECK. The
Legend in the Reference panel changes depending on the selected view option in the upper right
of the window (Reference dose map or Time Gamma dose map).
Legend
Couch
coordinate
system (3D
view only)
Display the path to Maximize

the loaded data set the panel
Figure 9-47. Comparison and Reference Panels
Comparison and Reference Panel Context Menu Options

Right-clicking on the comparison or reference panel displays options to load or clear data, rotate
the display, rotate around the Y axis, zoom in/out, or select a detector.
Load Comparison (or Reference) Movie Data — This option clears any existing analysis results
and then displays a dialog box to select measurement data for the selected panel (comparison or
reference).
Rotate — This option enables full 360 degree rotation of the ArcCHECK 3D display. Click and drag
the cursor in any direction.
Machine QA 119
Rotate Y Axis — This option enables ArcCHECK rotation around the Y-axis. Click and drag the
cursor.
Zoom — This option is used to resize the contents of a panel. After selecting this option, click and
drag the cursor from left to right to zoom in, or right to left to zoom out.
Select Detector — Select this option then left-click on a detector to select it as the intersection
of the helical and longitudinal dose profiles (3D view), or the horizontal and vertical dose profiles
(2D view). The keyboard arrow keys can be used to select a neighboring detector.
the cursor over the detector. The detector is highlighted and displays a pop up form with
the helix/row index, longitudinal/column index, Y location, theta (angle), measured dose,
and comparison dose. If the Time Gamma Map option is selected in the Display Toolbar,
the pop-up form also displays the time gamma index at the detector.
Clear Comparison (or Reference) Movie Data — This option clears any existing analysis results
and the contents of the selected panel.
Charts and Histograms Panels

The following view options are available in the charts and histograms panels:
Zoom In — Click and drag the cursor from left to right.
Zoom Out — Click and drag the cursor from right to left.
Pan — Click and hold the right mouse button in the panel and then drag the cursor in either
direction.
Relative Cumulative Time Gamma Chart and Absolute Differential Time Gamma Histogram
The Relative Cumulative Time Gamma chart and Absolute Differential Time Gamma histogram
offer two different static displays of the Time Gamma values. To view the Relative Cumulative
Time Gamma chart and the Absolute Differential Time Gamma histogram, click
in the lower left panel and
in the lower right panel, respectively.

For a detailed view of the Relative Cumulative Time Gamma values at each detector, select the
Time Gamma option in the display toolbar. The results are displayed in the Reference panel.
Figure 9-48. Time Gamma Histograms

Dose Profile
The horizontal and vertical dose profiles (2D view) or helical and longitudinal dose profiles (3D
view) intersect at the selected detector. To choose a different detector, right-click in the
comparison or reference panel, choose Select Detector from the context menu, and then click on
the desired detector.
To view the horizontal and vertical dose profiles, click
in the lower left and right panels. The lower left panel displays the horizontal dose profile, and the
lower right panel displays the vertical dose profile.
The right-click menu options can be used to display the dose difference between the two profiles
(C-R Difference), or the dose ratio (C/R Ratio); represented by a green curve. The dose difference
profile shows the difference between dose from the comparison and reference data at each
detector. The dose ratio for the horizontal and vertical dose profiles can also be displayed
independent from the profiles by selecting
in the lower left or right panel.
Figure 9-49. Horizontal and Vertical Dose Profile
Dose Functions at a Selected Detector

The analysis options for an individual detector are:
Lower Left Panel Selected Detector Dose versus Time
Lower Right Panel Selected Detector Dose Rate versus Time
Time Gamma for Selected Detector
The Dose versus Time chart shows how the dose accumulated at a selected detector. The Dose
Rate versus Time chart shows the dose rate curves for the selected detector over time. The dose
rate is averaged using neighboring updates (default value of 3 updates).
Figure 9-50. Dose and Dose Rate as a Function of Time (Selected Detector)
Machine QA 121
The Selected Detector Time Gamma Vs. Time chart shows the progression of a detector’s time
gamma value over the entire treatment. The default selected detector is the detector with the
maximum Time Gamma value. To select a different detector, right-click in the comparison or
reference panel, choose Select Detector from the context menu, and then click the desired
detector.
Figure 9-51. Selected Detector Time Gamma Versus Time Chart
Time Versus Gantry Angle Chart

The Time Versus Gantry Angle chart shows the gantry angle as a function of time for both the
comparison and reference data.
Figure 9-52. Time Versus Gantry Angle
Display Toolbar
Tool Description
Changes the comparison and reference panels from 3D to 2D view.
View Dose Map in 2D
3D view 2D view
2D view projects the ArcCHECK cylindrical surface into a plane. The helices
are displayed as horizontal lines, and each ArcCHECK detector is associ-
ated with a row number and column number, similar to the MapCHECK 2D
plane.
Note: When 2D view is enabled, the Rotate in All Directions and Rotate
Around Y-Axis options are disabled. These options are only available for 3D
view.
Changes the comparison and reference panels to 3D view. In 3D view, the
View Dose Map in 3D lines representing the couch coordinate system are displayed in the com-
parison and reference panels.

Tool Description
Detectors check box Show/hide detectors in the comparison and reference panels.
Enabled Disabled
Display Color
Colorwash White Hot Black Hot

This option is only available when viewing the ArcCHECK data in 3D view.
Rotate in all directions
For full 360 degree rotation, select this option, click and drag the cursor in
any direction.
Note: This option can also be enabled by right-clicking in the comparison or

reference panel and selecting ‘Rotate’ from the context menu.
This option is only available when viewing the ArcCHECK dose map in 3D
Rotate around Y-axis view.
To rotate the ArcCHECK around the Y-axis, select this option, click and drag
the cursor.
Note: This function can also be activated by right-clicking in the comparison

or reference panel and selecting ‘Rotate Y Axis’ from the context menu.
To zoom in or out, select this button, click the left mouse button in the com-
Zoom In/Zoom Out parison or reference panel, and then drag the cursor from left to right to
zoom in, or right to left to zoom out.
Note: Zoom can also be activated by right-clicking in the comparison or ref-
erence panel and selecting ‘Zoom’ from the context menu.
Resets the comparison and reference panels to their original orientation
Reset Zoom & Rotation and size.
You can also reset the zoom and rotation by clicking the middle mouse but-
ton in the comparison or reference panel.
Reference Dose Map and Time
Gamma Map
Reference Dose Map Time Gamma Map

The Reference Dose Map is displayed when the reference measurement is
loaded. After analysis, the Time Gamma view is displayed by default. The
Time Gamma map displays cumulative Time Gamma values at each
detector.
Machine QA 123
PDF Report
The Beam Delivery Reproducibility report displays the comparison and reference measurement
filenames, the analysis criteria and analysis results, and images of the comparison and reference
panels and the chart and histogram panels. An example report is shown in the figure below.
Figure 9-54. Example of Beam Delivery Reproducibility Report
Measurement Processing
Dose versus Time and Beam-On Time

When comparing two measurements, the dose at a detector may match exactly (ideal scenario),
or it may vary (the dose is different, the delivery time is different, or both). The software assumes
that the beam-on time is the same in both measurements. The calculations only consider the
beam-on time, not the entire measurement time.
The dose at each detector can be expressed as a function of time. Before the beam is turned-on,
there is background data. It is likely that the first beam-on time for each measurement is slightly
different. When this occurs, the movie data is synchronized to the first beam-on time.
Time Gamma Analysis

This function is conceptually similar to Gamma Analysis commonly used in medical physics. The
difference between Gamma Analysis and Time Gamma Analysis is that Time Gamma Analysis
uses time instead of distance.
Equations (8) and (9) are used to calculate Time Gamma Index values at each detector for a
specific time.

Local
RD – MD 2 TR – TM - 2
T =  -------------------------------------------------
- +  ---------------------------------- (8)
 RD  DoseCriteria  TimeCriteria
Where,
RD = Reference Measurement Dose
MD = Comparison Measurement Dose
TR = Time of Reference Measurement
TM = Time of Comparison Measurement
The test passes if the time gamma index is less than or equal to one.
Global
When the analysis type is set to Global, the equation becomes:
RD – MD 2 TR – TM - 2
T =  ------------------------------------------------------------
- +  ---------------------------------- (9)
 RDmax  DoseCriteria  TimeCriteria
Where,
RDmax = Maximum dose from the reference measurement.
Time Analysis for a Selected Detector

While Equations (8) and (9) calculate Time Gamma Index values at each detector for a specific
time, Equations (10) and (11) are used to calculate the final Time Gamma value assigned to a given
detector.
Local
2
 RD p – MD t  TR p – TM t 2
T  pt = min  ---------------------------------------------------- +  ----------------------------------- (10)
 RD p  DoseCriteria TimeCriteria
p {t - TimeCriteria, t + TimeCritera}
Where,
RDp = dose from the reference measurement at the selected detector at a time equal to p. This
is a cumulative dose that includes the beam-on time between the first beam-on time and timep.
MDt = comparison dose at timet, which is the cumulative dose that includes the beam-on time
between the first beam-on time and timet.
TRp = the beam-on time from the reference measurement to timep.
TMt = the beam-on time from the comparison measurement to timet.
Global
2
 RD p – MD t   TR p – TM t  2
T  pt = min  ----------------------------------------------------------------
-  + ----------------------------------- (11)
 RD p MAX  DoseCriteria  TimeCriteria
Where RD p,MAX = the maximum dose in the reference measurement. In summary, similar to the
traditional gamma index, the time gamma index for an individual detector is the minimum of the
ensemble of all time gamma values for that detector.
Machine QA 125
Example of Searching Reference Dose Along Time Axis
In the figure below, the time criteria is 5 seconds. At time t = 40 seconds, searching will be
between 35 and 45 seconds (t - 5 and t + 5). The step size is the time (update) interval (50
milliseconds). At each 0.05 second mark between 35 and 45, the software calculates the time
gamma index using Equations (10) or (11). When the gamma index values at each 0.05 second
mark are calculated, the software finds the minimum gamma index among them and saves it as
time gamma index at time 40 seconds.
Figure 9-55. Searching for Minimum T ,pt along the Time Axis Inside the Time Criteria
Gantry QA
The Gantry QA tests allow you to view errors in gantry angle and gantry rotation and assess how
accurately the gantry moves around the isocenter. The Gantry QA test can be performed with data
from arc (dynamic) delivery or static delivery (step and shoot). For step and shoot deliveries, you
can also load TPS plan data (optional) to view the gantry angle difference between measured and
planned data.
The Gantry QA results for both dynamic and static deliveries display gantry angle per update and
the location of the calculated isocenter with respect to the ArcCHECK isocenter. Additionally,
when arc delivery data is loaded the display shows gantry speed with respect to gantry angle and
the shortest distance from the calculated isocenter to each beam. Gantry isocentricity results are
displayed in the X and Z directions for 2D input data (SNC Patient software versions prior to 6.5)
and the X, Z, and Y directions for 3D input data (SNC Patient software version 6.5 or later). The
gantry isocentricity results in the Y direction are accurate to 0.5 mm.
To use the Gantry QA tests, you will need to collect an ArcCHECK multi-frame (movie)
measurement using a specific field size and position. Click the Instructions button to view
measurement collection instructions. Load the movie file in the Gantry QA tool and note the status
bar as the software analyzes the data and calculates gantry angles. Since the ArcCHECK
measurement is collected using a known beam shape and position, the software is able to
calculate the entry and exit points and the beam angle and offset with a very high degree of
accuracy. The error of the reported position of each beam in relation to the gantry angle is 0.5
degrees.
Procedure
2 In the Machine QA window, select ArcCHECK > Gantry QA.
3 Click the Instructions button to display instructions for acquiring the ArcCHECK
measurement needed to perform Gantry QA. Save the measurement as an ArcCHECK movie
(.acm) file.
Note: The ArcCHECK measurement must be acquired using SNC Patient software 
version 6.2 or later.
4 Click Load File. The ‘Load Files for Gantry QA’ dialog box is displayed.

Figure 9-56. Load Files Dialog Box
5 Load the desired files.

a. Click Browse next to the ArcCHECK Movie File box and select the desired ArcCHECK
measurement.
b. If you loaded a measurement of a static delivery and RT Plan data is available for the deliv-
ery, click Browse next to the RT Plan File box and select the desired RT Plan.
c. Click OK. Allow a few minutes for processing to complete. The status is displayed in the
lower left of Machine QA window.
Gantry Angle
6 When processing is complete, the Gantry Angle tab is displayed by default.
• If you loaded arc delivery data, the display will be similar to the example in the figure
below. The table on the left side of the window is populated with the angle at approxi-
mately every 20 degrees, and the shortest distance from the center of the beam to the
calculated isocenter. The graph on the right side of the window displays red lines that
correspond to the center of each beam, as defined by the midline between the 80% val-
ues of the beam profile.
Beam angle
and distance
from calculated Graph
isocenter (zoomed out)
Legend
Path to
loaded file(s)
Location of the calculated isocenter (relative to the physical
center of the ArcCHECK), and radius of the smallest circle that
encompasses all the beams
Figure 9-57. Gantry Angle Tab When Arc Delivery Data is Loaded
• If you loaded static delivery data, the display will be similar to the example in the figure
below. In the graph on the right side of the window, each beam is displayed as a red line
with a beam number label. The table on the left side of the window lists the following
information about each beam:
• Beam number
Machine QA 127
• Ref. Angle — If you loaded an RT Plan file, this column is populated with the angles
found in the plan file. Otherwise, the angles will be in 45 degree increments. To man-
ually edit the reference angles, select the contents of a Ref. Angle cell and then type
a new value.
• Beam Angle — The beam angles calculated from the ArcCHECK measurement.
• Difference — The angle difference between the beam angle and reference angle
(IEC fixed coordinate system).
• Distance — The shortest distance from the beam to the calculated isocenter.
• To export the contents of the table to a text file, click Export to Text.
Beam Data
Graph
(zoomed out)
Legend
Path to
loaded file(s)
Location of the calculated isocenter and radius of the

smallest circle that encompasses all the beams
Figure 9-58. Gantry Angle Tab When Static Delivery Data is Loaded
7 To view the calculated and ArcCHECK isocenter, right-click on the image and select Zoom
from the context menu. Then, click and drag from bottom to top to zoom in to the center of
the image.
• The calculated isocenter and ArcCHECK isocenter markers are displayed.
• The yellow circle shows the location of the calculated isocenter, and the green square
shows the physical ArcCHECK isocenter.
• The blue circle is the smallest circle that just encompasses all of the beams. The radius
of the circle is equal to the maximum distance value in the table, displayed in mm.
• The text below the table shows the XY coordinates of the calculated isocenter relative to
the ArcCHECK physical center. It also shows the radius of the blue circle, which is the
maximum radius of all the beams (updates). The table only displays beams every ~20°.

Blue circle
(touches all of
the beams)
Calculated
Isocenter
(yellow)
ArcCHECK
Physical
Center or
“Geometrical
Center”
Figure 9-59. Example of Gantry Angle Graph for Arc Delivery Data- Zoomed In
Blue circle
(touches all of
the beams)
ArcCHECK
Isocenter
(green)
Calculated
Isocenter
(yellow)
Figure 9-60. Example of Gantry Angle Graph for Static Delivery Data- Zoomed In
Gantry Speed
8 If you loaded arc delivery data of 2D or 3D gantry isocenter measurements, the Gantry Speed
tab displays graph of the gantry speed with respect to gantry angle. By analyzing the vertical
spread of the graph, you can determine if the gantry speed was accurate during the delivery.
See the figure below for an example of the Gantry Speed display.
• The left panel displays the gantry start and end angles, the total angle traveled, the
beam-on time, the average gantry speed in degrees per second, and the maximum
deviation of gantry speed with respect to the average.
• The right panel displays a graph of the gantry rotation speed with respect to gantry angle.
Each point in the graph represents one update (50 ms). A trend line (yellow) is also
displayed.
• To zoom in on a portion of the graph click and drag the cursor from upper left to lower
right around the angle of interest. Click and drag in the opposite direction to zoom out.
Machine QA 129
Figure 9-61. Example of Gantry Speed Tab - Only Displayed when Arc Delivery Data is Loaded
Gantry Rotation
9 Click the Gantry Rotation tab to view graphs of the center of each beam in relation to the
calculated isocenter.
Note: If the point of interest is not displayed in the left graph, you can change the view
by clicking and holding the right mouse button and dragging the cursor.
• If you loaded arc delivery data of a 2D isocenter measurement (using input files from SNC
Patient software V6.4 or earlier), the Gantry Rotation display will be similar to the example
in the figure below. Each red and blue point in the graphs represents results per update
(50 ms.). The left graph (red) shows the location of the center of each beam in relation to
the ArcCHECK isocenter (0,0). If the point of interest is not displayed in the left graph,
change the view by clicking and holding the right mouse button and dragging the cursor.
The right graph (blue) shows the shortest distance from each beam to the calculated iso-
center, but with respect to the gantry angle. The distribution of points in the graphs
reveals any trends that are occurring during gantry rotation, such as gantry sag.

Location of beam center
in relation to ArcCHECK
isocenter
Shortest distance
from each beam to
calculated isocenter
versus gantry angle
Figure 9-62. Example of Gantry Rotation Tab when Arc Delivery Data of a 2D Isocenter
Measurement is Loaded
Note: The zeros in the center of the polar graphs mark the central crossing of the axis
lines.
• If you loaded arc delivery data of a 3D isocenter measurement (using input files from SNC
Patient V6.5 or later), the Gantry Rotation 3D tab reports offsets in the IECx, IECy, and
IECz directions as well as total offset (see the figure below). Similar to the 2D gantry iso-
centricity display, each red and blue point in the graphs represents results per update (50
ms.). The polar graphs display values on a positive scale; however, red indicates positive
values and blue indicates negative values. The distribution of points in the graphs reveals
any trends that are occurring during gantry rotation, such as gantry sag.
Machine QA 131
Overall Isocenter
Isocenter distance in
distance IECx dimension
versus gantry versus gantry
angle angle
Isocenter Isocenter
distance in distance in IECz
IECy dimension dimension
versus gantry versus gantry
angle angle
Figure 9-63. Example of Gantry Rotation 3D Tab when Arc Delivery Data of a 3D Isocenter
Measurement is Loaded
Generate Report
10 If desired, the Gantry QA results can be exported to a PDF report. Each tab in the Gantry QA
user interface is saved as a separate page in the report.
MLC/Collimator QA
The MLC/Collimator QA tool is used to analyze and locate differences between the leaf bank
positions and jaw positions of the linac, using the ArcCHECK instrument. This tool is designed for
use with linear accelerators that have an MLC and jaws. Two measurements are required for
analysis. The first measurement moves the jaws to the specified location (MLC retracted), and the
second measurement retracts the jaw and uses only the MLC leaf banks. If the two
measurements are perfectly aligned, the response of detectors at the beam edge should be
identical. Any deviation corresponds to MLC leaf bank/jaw positioning error.
Procedure
2 In the Machine QA window, select ArcCHECK > MLC Collimator QA.
3 In the text box next to 'Enter Gantry Angle' (left panel), type the gantry angle at which you wish
to perform the test and then click Generate Position Guide. The software displays the
allowed positions for the left MLC bank/jaw and the right MLC bank/jaw.

• Selecting the allowed positions ensures that ArcCHECK diodes will be positioned in the
penumbra region as required by the MLC QA algorithm.
• All combinations of the left and right bank positions are allowed, except for the two small-
est values, which cannot be used at the same time.
• Additional gantry angles that can be used with the same MLC/Jaw positions are dis-
played below the left and right bank position lists.
4 Click the Instructions button and follow the instructions to acquire the ArcCHECK
measurements that are needed to perform the MLC QA test. Save the measurements in
ArcCHECK movie file format (.acm). Assign descriptive filenames that identify the gantry
angle of each measurement and differentiate the Jaw measurements from the MLC
measurements.
later.
5 Select the Penumbra Transfer Function (PTF) for the linac. If a PTF needs to be generated, see
Penumbra Transfer Function on page 136.
6 Click Load Jaw File, select one of the ArcCHECK measurements with the Jaw, and then click
Open. The Jaw panel is populated.
CAUTION: Loading the wrong file (Jaw instead of MLC or vice-versa) could lead to
erroneous results. Ensure that you load the correct file.
7 Click Load MLC File, select the ArcCHECK measurement of the MLC leaf bank that is at the
same gantry angle as the measurement with the Jaw, and then click Open. The MLC panel is
populated and the MLC/Jaw Coincidence Difference panel displays the difference between
the two measurements. See also Analysis Results Display on page 134.
Jaw Panel MLC Panel
Analysis
Results
Buttons to select dose map view or grid view
Coincidence
Difference
Gantry
Angle/Field
Size Guide
Path to
loaded files
Figure 9-64. Example of MLC QA Analysis Results (Distance Difference shown)
8 Click the Percent Diff and Distance Diff tabs in the Analysis Results panel to toggle the
display.
9 If desired, click the Grid View button to display a grid of difference values in the MLC/Jaw
Coincidence Difference panel.
Machine QA 133
Analysis Results Display

If the Distance Diff tab is selected in the Analysis Results panel, then the maximum positive and
negative difference in distance is displayed in the Analysis Results panel, and the MLC/Jaw
Coincidence Difference panel shows a graph of all the distance differences (see the figure below).
If the Percent Diff tab is selected in the Analysis Results panel, then the maximum positive and
negative percent difference is displayed in the Analysis Results panel, and the MLC/Jaw
Coincidence Difference panel shows a graph of all the percent differences (see the figure below).
The vertical lines in the MLC/Jaw Coincidence Difference panel represent the beam edge
coincidence. If the MLC is perfectly aligned with the corresponding jaw, the difference will be
close to zero (green). Any deviation from zero indicates an error in the MLC or Jaw. To find the
position of the error, examine the difference over the length of the measured field. The intensity
of the difference is shown in the horizontal scale.
Once you find the general location of the error, switch to grid view and compare the values directly.
Note that the grid view displays distance difference values if the Distance Diff tab is selected in
the Analysis Results panel, or percent difference values if the Percent Diff tab is selected in the
Analysis Results panel.
Vertical scale: field of

measurement (cm)
Beam center
Horizontal scale:
distance difference
(mm)
Figure 9-65. Example of Distance Difference Results

Vertical scale: field of
measurement (cm)
Beam center
Horizontal scale:
percent difference
Figure 9-66. Example of Percent Difference Results
Grid view button

Horizontal scale:
diode distance from
center of X axis (mm)
Center (0,0)
Vertical scale: diode

distance from center
of Y axis (mm)
Figure 9-67. Example of Distance Difference Results in Grid View
Analysis Method
The software performs the following functions:
a. Reads both measurements (jaw and MLC bank) and normalizes them to their maximum
value (the maximum value of each measurement is 1).
b. Analyzes the data points that are located on the top of the ArcCHECK, provided that the
value of the data point is within the thresholds. The default threshold values are 0.15 (Bot-
tom Threshold) and 0.85 (Top Threshold).
c. Calculates the percent difference between the jaw and MLC bank (one result).
d. Uses the Jaw and MLC Penumbra Transfer Function (PTF) to calculate the distance dif-
ference between the MLC and Jaw.
e. Saves the difference between the distances as the second result.
Machine QA 135
Penumbra Transfer Function
The Penumbra Transfer Function (PTF) is a fit of the penumbra shape that is used to convert the
percent difference between the MLC and Jaw measurements to distance in mm. Each PTF is
specific to a linear accelerator. Once the PTF is generated, the parameters are saved on the local
computer in *.ASCII file format.
Generating a PTF
1 To generate a PTF for the linac, you will need two ArcCHECK measurements: one of the full
arc with just the Jaw, and one of the full arc with just the MLC. Click the Instructions button,
review the PTF instructions, and then collect the measurements. Save each measurement in
ArcCHECK movie format (.acm), and assign a descriptive filename, such as “<linac
name>-ArcCHECK-PTF-Jaw.acm” and “<linac name>-ArcCHECK-PTF-MLC.acm”.
2 Click the Create Penumbra Function button. In the ‘New Penumbra Transfer Function’ dialog
box, assign a descriptive name to the PTF so it can be identified for future use with the linac,
such as “<linac_name>-PTF-Date”. Load the full arc Jaw and MLC measurements that will
be used to generate the PTF, and then click OK. The new PTF is added to the Select
Penumbra Function drop-down list.
PTF Calculation
The SNC Patient software performs the following steps to generate the PTF:
a. Normalizes each detector to its maximum value.
b. Locates data suitable for interpolation (a full diode profile).
c. Calculates PTF fit for all suitable detectors using a simple arctangent function with three
different variables (12).
PTF = C + A  arc tan  B  x  (12)
d. Calculates the average of all final PTF variables (A, C, and B) and saves them on the local
computer.
PDF Report
The MLC/Collimator QA report displays the analysis results values, graphs of the Jaw and MLC
panels, graphs of the MLC/Jaws Coincidence Difference panel (showing distance difference and
percent difference views), the names of the files being analyzed, comments, and a Reviewed By
signature line. An example report is shown in the figures below.

Figure 9-68. Example of MLC QA Report (Page 1)
Machine QA 137
Figure 9-69. Example of MLC QA Report (Page 2)
Flatness & Symmetry

The Flatness & Symmetry test allows you to quantify beam flatness and symmetry in the IEC-y
direction, and symmetry in the IEC-x direction, using the ArcCHECK instrument. The Flatness &
Symmetry test can be performed for static or dynamic delivery.
If desired, a cross-plane flatness test (x-axis) can be performed by rotating the ArcCHECK around
the Z-axis by 90 degrees.
CAUTION: When performing a cross-plane flatness test, keep the gantry at 0 degrees
to avoid direct radiation to the ArcCHECK electronics.
Procedure
2 In the Machine QA window, select ArcCHECK > Flatness & Symmetry.
3 Click the Instructions button to display instructions for acquiring the ArcCHECK
measurement(s) needed to perform the Flatness & Symmetry test. Acquire the
measurements as directed, and then save them in ArcCHECK movie format (.acm).
• Measurement does not need to be stopped for a static delivery with multiple angles. The
software intelligently removes any non-data between measurements.

later.
4 Click Load File, select the desired ArcCHECK measurement, and then click Open. The results
are displayed (see Flatness & Symmetry Results Display below.)
6 If desired, export the results to a text file that can be imported into a spreadsheet application
such as MS Excel. Data is saved in four columns: Gantry Angle (IEC), Flatness, Symmetry X,
Symmetry Y.
a. Click the Export to Text button.
b. In the Save As dialog box, select a file save location and file name and then click Save.
Flatness & Symmetry Results Display

The results display changes depending on the type of delivery (static or dynamic).
To zoom in on the graph, click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor from top to
bottom. To pan, click and hold the right mouse button and drag the cursor. To reset the display,
click the hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor from bottom to top.
Dynamic Delivery
Dynamic delivery results in three different graphs that show the flatness and symmetry as a
function of gantry angle.
• If one update exists at each angle, the graphs display standard deviation of the Flatness and
Symmetry values.
• If there are multiple updates at the same angle, then the average of standard deviation of all
updates at that angle is displayed. This happens because a data point is displayed for integer
angle values; however, data is collected every 50 msec.
Flatness and symmetry values from 0 to 5% are displayed in the graphs. Values greater than 5%
are displayed at the 5% line.
Machine QA 139
Average and Standard
Deviation
Flatness graph
Path to loaded file.
Figure 9-70. Example of ArcCHECK Results for Flatness, IEC-y

Deviation
Symmetry graph
Path to
loaded file.
Figure 9-71. Example of ArcCHECK Results for Symmetry, IEC-x
Note: The IEC-x symmetry is not performed along the direction traditionally used for
this measurement. It is analyzed along the circumference of the ArcCHECK rather than
a flat plane.

Deviation
Symmetry graph
Path to
loaded file.
Figure 9-72. Example of ArcCHECK Results for Symmetry, IEC-y
Static Delivery
When a static delivery measurement is loaded, the display will be similar to the figure below. The
beam data table displays one row for each beam found in the measurement, and displays the
following for each beam: measured beam number, calculated gantry angle, % flatness (IEC-y), %
symmetry (IEC-x), and % symmetry (IEC-y).
Beam data Entry dose X

profile for the
selected beam
Beam center
(0 cm)
Entry dose Y
profile for the
selected beam
Beam center
(0 cm)
Path to
loaded file.
Figure 9-73. Example of Flatness and Symmetry Results for a Static Delivery
Machine QA 141
Note: The IEC-x symmetry is not performed along the direction traditionally used for
this measurement. It is analyzed along the circumference of the ArcCHECK rather than
a flat plane.
Analysis Method
Flatness
Flatness is calculated as:
MX – MN
FLAT = 100  ------------------------ (13)
MX + MN
where MX is maximum dose in the profile and MN is the minimum dose.
Symmetry
Symmetry can be calculated along the Y and X axes using the ArcCHECK. Experimental results
show that symmetry calculated along the X axis must be corrected by the angular dependence
(AD) and individual deviation (ID) factors.
Symmetry along the Y axis is calculated as:
 max  D CAX – j ,D CAX + j  

SYM = 100  max  ----------------------------------------------------------- – 1  , for all symmetrical detectors (index ±j) (14)
 min  D CAX – j ,D CAX + j  
DCAX+j is the dose of the j-th detector from the CAX detector.
Calculating symmetry along the X axis with an ArcCHECK requires more points. The calculation
performs ‘semi-area symmetry’ using a modified symmetry equation:
  max  D i CAX – j D i CAX + j   

SYM = median  max i  --------------------------------------------------------------------  – 1  (15)
  min  D i CAX – j  D i CAX + j   
Where i reaches values from -3 cm to +3 cm in the Y direction.

3DVH Software
3DVH is a radiotherapy dose delivery quality assurance (QA) software application intended to
estimate the dosimetric impacts of the deviations and imperfections of a treatment delivery
device, and its accessories, on the 3D patient dose volume as defined by a treatment planning
system (TPS). These dosimetric impacts are based upon QA measurement of the radiation dose
distributions that are delivered to a phantom.
To collect ArcCHECK measurements that can be analyzed in 3DVH software, the center cavity
must be filled with a solid homogeneous core such as a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory. For
details about ArcCHECK accessories, see Accessories on page 197.
When measurement is complete, load the resulting movie lite (*.acml) file in 3DVH software. The
*.acml contains calculated gantry angles (see Device Measured Files on page 35.)
Note: TomoTherapy users: SNC Patient software V6.7 supports acquiring

TomoTherapy measurements with ArcCHECK electronics facing the gantry. If an
ArcCHECK measurement is collected in this position, 3DVH cannot sync the measured
(.acml) file with the RT Plan. For more information on the compatibility of inverted
ArcCHECK measurements with 3DVH, contact Sun Nuclear Support.
For details about 3DVH , see the 3DVH User’s Guide or the 3DVH online Help in the 3DVH
software.

ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios
The ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratio feature is used to view the ratio of diode readings at the exit and
entrance points for each angle of measurement using data from an ArcCHECK movie file (*.acm).
For a text file (*.txt), the Exit/Entry ratio for 0 degrees (IEC angle) is displayed in the main window.
Entry dose is calculated from the two diodes closest to the center of the beam while exit dose is
calculated from the four diodes closest to the center of the beam, with the distance from the
beam center used to weight each value. Calculations are performed at each Virtual Inclinometer
angle and at each Virtual Inclinometer angle + 180 degrees. For open fields, a desirable ratio is
between 0.22 and 0.32.
Requirement: ArcCHECK open field measurement to ensure that each update has a uniform field
size.
1 Select Tools > ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios. The ‘ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios’ dialog box is
displayed.
2 Click Browse, navigate to the *.acm file for the desired measurement, and then click Open.
The gantry angles and exit/entry ratios are calculated and displayed in the dialog box.
3 Double-click a row in the gantry angle/ratio table. A vertical green line is displayed in the graph
at the selected angle.
Selected
angle
Green vertical line

at selected angle
Figure 9-74. Example of Calculated ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios
4 To zoom in on a portion of the graph, click and drag from left to right. To zoom out, click and
drag from right to left.
ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios 143


10 Post Measurement Processing
Overview
As part of SNC Patient’s post processing step (after acquisition), the software calculates beam
angle and applies angular, field size, heterogeneity, and out of beam correction factors to the
ArcCHECK measurement.
SNC Patient software V6.5 or later includes three sets of predetermined correction factors which
were calculated using data collected on Varian, Elekta, and TomoTherapy delivery systems. Users
should note that the Elekta correction factors differ from the Varian correction factors by less than
0.5%. Siemens users are recommended to select the Elekta correction factors since the beam
spectrum (based on PDD shape) of Siemens linear accelerators is closer to those used with Elekta
delivery systems than those used with Varian.
To select the appropriate correction factors in SNC Patient V6.5 or later, choose a delivery system
from the ‘Measurement Parameters’ dialog box that is displayed when you click ‘Stop’ to complete
a measurement. The options are Varian, Elekta or Siemens, or TomoTherapy.
If TomoTherapy is selected, an RT Plan option appears in the Measurement Parameters dialog
box. The software uses the information in the TomoTherapy RT Plan file to apply angle-dependent
corrections by checking if the time based data in the RT Plan matches the measured data and
notifying you if the time differs by more than 6 seconds. If you do not select an RT Plan file, a
warning is displayed and post measurement corrections are not applied. For details, see
Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Details on page 187.
If desired, you can specify which of the corrections (Angular, Field Size, Heterogeneity, Out of
Beam) will be applied to the ArcCHECK data. See Program Preferences on page 178.
IMPORTANT! In SNC Patient software version 6.4.1 or earlier, post measurement correction
factors based on ArcCHECK Virtual Inclinometer (VI) gantry angle calculations were incorrect for
TomoTherapy due to the small field sizes used by these systems. When collecting ArcCHECK
measurements using SNC Patient V6.0 to 6.4 for comparison to TomoTherapy planned data, select
the ‘TomoTherapy Measurement Mode’ option in Program Preferences to ensure that angular,
heterogeneity, and field size correction are not applied to the measurement.
Heterogeneity Correction
The ArcCHECK is not a homogeneous phantom. It contains diodes, air cavities, and PCB boards,
all with different densities. Starting with SNC Patient software version 6.0, heterogeneity
correction factors can be applied to the measurement are applied to the ArcCHECK measured
values such that the new values are equal to those measured in a PMMA phantom with a uniform
density. To take advantage of the heterogeneity correction, the ArcCHECK must be treated as a
homogeneous phantom in the treatment planning system and the phantom density must be
overridden with the uniform bulk density correction that is best suited for the TPS.
Sun Nuclear provides virtual CT images of ArcCHECK that can be imported into the TPS. When
using these images, it is not necessary to model any deviations from the uniform density. For
details, see ArcCHECK Images on page 40.
The heterogeneity correction factor in SNC Patient software applies to the diode array section of
the ArcCHECK, not the center cavity.
Heterogeneity correction factors are stored in a text file in the SNC Patient application folder
(C:\SNC\SNC Patient\ArcCHECK Factors by default).
Overview 145
Angular Correction
This section describes the factors that are used to calculate angular correction.
WARNING: Angular correction is not applied if external beam radiotherapy includes

one or more beam angles for which primary radiation passes through the ArcCHECK
cylinder’s flat surface.
Angular Dependence (AD) and Individual Deviation (ID)

• AD factors — these factors are determined with Monte Carlo calculations and confirmed
with experiment. Diode angular dependence is caused by internal structure of the diode
which is not invariant to rotation.
• ID factors — these factors are determined during calibration at the SNC factory; they
represent the deviation of the detector's angular dependence with respect to the average
angular dependence.
Figure 10-1. Angular Dependence of ArcCHECK Diodes
Virtual Inclinometer (Angle)

ArcCHECK can reconstruct gantry angle based on spatial dose distribution in ArcCHECK every 50
ms. This information is vital for applying other correction factors. The illustration below depicts a
projection plane dividing the ArcCHECK into two parts.
Beam Beam
projection
plane
projection
plane
Image 1 Image 2
Figure 10-2. ArcCHECK Projection Plane Comparison
146 Section 10. Post Measurement Processing

If there is no beam attenuation, an image created by projecting one half of ArcCHECK on the
projection plane will be the same as an image created by projecting the second half of ArcCHECK,
when the orientation of the projection plane is correct. The images will be identical only at two
angles (angle a and a+180). In the illustration above, the image on the left demonstrates a case
where two images are different; the image on the right demonstrates a case where the images
are the same.
Beam attenuation is approximately an exponential function, which starts at maximum and
attenuates to zero with distance. The beam attenuation in ArcCHECK is significant and cannot be
ignored.
Figure 10-3. 6 MV beam attenuation in ArcCHECK on CAX location (no shift or ArcCHECK rotation),
with respect to the beam located at 0 degree
When the projection image is being calculated, it is compensated for attenuation. Compensation
is accomplished by multiplying the image value by the attenuation value at a particular angle.
When the projection plane has a good orientation, the compensated images will be the same. Due
to the non symmetrical shape of the attenuation profile, the second solution that was possible
previously (a and a+180), is no longer possible because at a+180 degrees, the top of ArcCHECK
will be at the bottom and will be corrected by the wrong attenuation value.
A gantry angle can be determined from a relationship between the projection plane angle in
ArcCHECK and the gantry angle. The right angle of the projection plane is found as the best
agreement in images from the two sections of ArcCHECK.
Field Size Dependence (FS)
The field size correction factor calculated for an ArcCHECK measurement depends on several
factors, such as diode location, angle, energy, whether a cavity accessory is used, etc.
A field size correction factor lookup table, field_size_dependence.txt, is stored in the SNC Patient
application directory (typically C:\SNC\SNC Patient\ArcCHECK Factors).
Field Size Calculation

The software calculates field size for each 50ms update using the following steps:
• Construct a field size isocenter plane with resolution of 1x1 cm.
• Project the dose distribution of the upper half of ArcCHECK onto the field size isocenter plane
using the Virtual inclinometer information.
• Normalize the field size isocenter plane to the maximum value.
Field Size Dependence (FS) 147

• Calculate the surface of all points above 50% and the circumference of the image on the field
size isocenter plane.
Surface
• Calculate the field size (one side of a square) as R = 4  --------------------------------------- , where
Circumference
• R = length of one of the square sides,
• Surface = total surface of all points above 50% signal,
• Circumference = overall circumference of the beam as painted onto the field size
isocenter plane.
• Store R for each update in the *.acm file.
Field Size Correction Factor Calculation

The software calculates a field size correction factor for each diode (total of 1386 diodes) using
the following steps:
• Calculate angle between gantry angle and diode location with respect to the ArcCHECK cen-
ter: DiodeAngle = GantryAngle – DiodePosition
• Scale the calculated field size based on diode location, where,
SAD – ArcCHECKRadius  cos  DiodeAngle 
FsizeDetector = Fsize  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SAD
• Fsize = field size at isocenter stored in the *.acm file,
• ArcCHECKRadius = radius of ArcCHECK (10.4 cm),
• SAD = Source to ArcCHECK axis distance.
• Interpolate the field size correction factor from the stored look up table (field_size_depen-
dence.txt, located in the application directory [C:\SNC\SNC Patient\ArcCHECK Factors, by
default]). The interpolation is field size and diode angle dependent. There are also two rules:
• If the measured field size is smaller than the smallest field size in the look up table, the
correction for the smallest field size is used.
• If the measured field size is larger than the largest field size in the look up table, the cor-
rection for the largest field size is used.
• The field size correction factor is applied to Equation (19).
The figure below shows the effect of diode angle and field size on field size correction factor for
an ArcCHECK without a CavityPlug (6 MV).
Figure 10-4. Example of ArcCHECK Field Size Dependence

Out of Beam Correction
ArcCHECK Out of Beam correction is intended to compensate for the diode over-response to
scatter radiation. The correction is effected using the following steps:
• In each measurement update, the attenuation-corrected readings for each diode are
compared against the maximum reading in that update. If a diode reading is less than a
pre-defined fraction of the maximum reading, the diode is considered to lie outside the
primary beam.
• All out-of-beam diodes in a given update are multiplied by a correction factor.
Out of Beam correction factors are disabled in Program Preferences by default. To use Out of
Beam correction, enable the option in Program Preferences before acquiring measurements. See
Program Preferences on page 178.
If using a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK (serial number on product label starts with ‘1222’), only
enable the Out of Beam correction factors if you observe a systematic bias in IMRT or VMAT
measurement results, specifically if the ArcCHECK dose, measured using an accurate absolute
dose calibration, is consistently greater than plan dose.
If using an original Model 1220 ArcCHECK (serial number on product label starts with ‘1220’), use
the following test to determine if Out of Beam correction factors should be applied.
Out of Beam Correction Test for Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK

1 In SNC Patient software, ensure Out of Beam corrections are disabled in Program
Preferences (select Setup > Program Preferences > Other).
2 Plan the following on the ArcCHECK phantom in your TPS.
a. Open 10x10 AP field.
b. Open 10x10 arc over 360 degrees.
3 Set up the ArcCHECK for measurement then deliver the 10x10 AP field. Measurement results
are displayed in Set 1.
4 Load the corresponding treatment plan in Set 2 (see Importing Planned Dose on page 37).
5 If Detector locations are not displayed in Set 1, click Show Detectors (see Show Detectors
on page 62).
6 Click Dose at the bottom of Set 1, then click a detector nearest to central axis to display the
dose pop-up box (see Display Dose at Selected Point on page 66). Record the Set 1 and Set
2 dose values in the pop-up box.
Show
Detectors
button
Dose
pop-up
box
Dose
button
Figure 10-5. Display Dose of Selected Detector
7 Calculate the ratio of Set1/Set2 (e.g., 238.7/235.5 = 1.014 in the figure above).
8 Deliver the 10x10 arc field.
9 Load the corresponding treatment plan in Set 2.
10 When the Dose Conversion pop-up prompts for MUs or scaling factor, enter the ratio from
Step 5. If a scaling factor other than 1 needs to be entered in order to report single-fraction
absolute dose, multiply this scaling factor by the ratio from Step 5 and enter the product in
Out of Beam Correction 149

the pop-up box. This scaling factor accounts for any output deviation from the treatment plan
at the time of measurement.
11 Set the Analysis parameters as follows.
• Gamma
• AD
• Threshold - 50%
• Dose diff - 1%
• Distance to agreement - 1 mm
12 Click Compare.
If the agreement is greater than 95% OR if the majority of failed points are red, indicating that
the measured dose is higher than the plan, as shown below, the Out of Beam correction
factors will likely improve measurement accuracy.
Pass rate
>95%
Failed
points
mostly red
Figure 10-6. Sample Analysis Results for device/linac combination that would benefit from Out of
Beam Correction
If the agreement is less than 95% AND if the majority of the failed points are blue, as shown
in the figure below, do not use the Out of Beam correction factors.
Failed
Pass rate points
<95% mostly
blue
Figure 10-7. Sample Analysis Results for device/linac combination that does not benefit from Out
of Beam Correction

Post Measurement Processing Calculations
The following calculations are performed at the end of each ArcCHECK measurement.
Measurement corrected for background:
Mbcg i j =  Mraw i j – bcg  j   time i   cf  j  (16)
where:
Mraw i j = Mraw i j – Mraw i – 1 j (17)
time i = time i – time i – 1 (18)
where:
• i = update index
• j = detector index
• delta = net counts
• Mrawi,j = Raw data of detector j at update i
• Mbcgi,j = Detector data corrected for background and ASIC/diode sensitivity.
• bcg = Background and ASIC/diode sensitivity corrections
• cf(j) = Correction coefficient (factor) of the j-th detector; derived during user calibration.
Measurement corrected for background then corrected by the following factors:
(19)
M i j = Mbcg i j  ID  j Angle i   AD  Angle i   HF  E Plug  Angle i / FS(E Plug  Angle i 
where:
• Mi,j = Measured value of detector j at update i
• Mbcgi,j = Detector data corrected for background and ASIC/diode sensitivity.
• ID (j,Anglei) = Individual deviation from the average of the detector j at the angle Anglei
with respect to the detector i.
• AD (Anglei) = The average angular dependence of surface mount diode at angle Anglei
with respect to the detector i.
• HF = heterogeneity factor
• FS = Field size factor
Total Corrected Signal:
Mj =  Mi j (20)
i
where:
• Mj = Measurement corrected for angle dependency, individual variations, heterogeneity,
and field size dependence
• Mi,j = Measured value of detector j at update i
Post Measurement Processing Calculations 151


11 Interpreting Results
Eliminating Sources of Error
If results fall significantly below your established passing criteria, then further investigation is
necessary to determine the cause.
Sources of Error
Failure to achieve reasonable analysis results can be categorized as follows:
• A pattern of red and/or blue points that fall on high dose gradient regions, with either red on
one side of a dose plateau and blue on the opposite side, or blue and or red on both sides.
• Cross hairs alignment error causing spatial shift or slight rotation
• Wrong SDD or plan depth, causing beam divergence error
• MLC or machine delivery error
• Large ion chamber used in beam scan for planning system data
• A random occurrence of red and blue points that fall throughout the dose region with no
apparent pattern.
• Wrong planned dose file
• Improper normalization selected
• Improper ArcCHECK array calibration or wrong array calibration selected
• ArcCHECK setup error (cross hairs alignment, SDD, orientation to gantry)
• Incorrect plan parameters (QA phantom SSD, depth in phantom)
• MLC or machine delivery error
• Plan error or change in planned dose file format that is not compatible with the TPS
import filter
• Failure in SNC Patient software or ArcCHECK hardware
• Dose error
• Dose errors may not cause a DTA failure, but they may provide a hint of where to
investigate. For example, a significant dose error in a plateau region may indicate that the
detector distance (SDD) may not match the dose map distance, as specified by the QA
phantom SSD and depth calculation.
Steps to Eliminate Errors

An investigation of a DTA analysis failure should start with a review by inspection of the setup
conditions, followed by re-normalization, re-installation, re-calibration, and finally a check with
historical performance as outlined below.
1 Verify the correspondence between the device measured and planned dose data.
2 Inspect the dose maps for similarity. If not similar, perhaps the wrong plan was executed.
3 Verify the setup conditions.
• Cross hairs aligned, +Y toward gantry
• Correct SSD and SDD
• Accelerator energy, MU selection
• Gantry angle should be such that the beam is normal to the ArcCHECK surface.
• Array calibration, and if applicable, dose calibration
Eliminating Sources of Error 153

4 Select different normalization points, try to select in high dose regions where the gradient is
low.
5 Close the SNC Patient software, re-open the software, wait for the background measurement,
verify the array and dose calibration (if applicable), and then re-measure the plan.
6 Perform ArcCHECK array calibration with the accelerator energy being measured. After
calibration, repeat plan execution and dose map measurement. If comparison is now
successful, re-calibration solved the problem.
7 Are there past measurements where the analysis performed well, i.e., successful Benchmark
Standard? If yes, then open those past files and compare using the same analysis criteria as
previously recorded. If the results are different from the records, then the SNC Patient
software has changed. Re-install the software and try again.
8 If available, execute a successful Benchmark Standard IMRT plan and measure the dose
map(s).
• If analysis of the re-measured Benchmark Standard plan is successful and compares well
to past analysis, then the ArcCHECK and delivery system are functioning properly. An
investigation of the planning system should then proceed. Have there been any changes
to the planning software or the beam data stored in the system? Is it possible to re-plan
the previous Benchmark Standard?
• If analysis of the re-measured Benchmark Standard plan is not successful, then either the
ArcCHECK is not functioning properly or the delivery system has changed. This is where
it would be beneficial to have a compensator standard to compare against. Successful
re-measurement of a compensator standard would indicate if there is a problem in the
delivery system.
• Successful measurement of open fields indicates proper ArcCHECK function. Test sev-
eral field sizes: 10 x 10 cm, 15 x 15 cm, and 20 x 20 cm.
Ion Chamber Measurements in CavityPlug or MultiPlug
The ArcCHECK CavityPlug and MultiPlug accessories are both constructed of PMMA. Because the
measurement and calculation of dose in a PMMA phantom is not the same as in a
water-equivalent phantom, the following dose calculation information and recommendations may
be helpful.
Dose-to-Medium
Dose to medium is expressed as:
Q
z D
med
Based on AAPM TG-51 formalism, dose to medium at depth z and for the user's beam quality Q,
is calculated as follows:
L med
--- P
Q Q Co – 60   air Q med
D z = M N k Q -------------------------------------- (21)
med med D w L w
---
  air P Q w
where,
Q is the ion chamber reading at depth z in medium, corrected for temperature,

M pressure, ion collection efficiency, polarity, chamber leakage, and stem
med effects
Co – 60
N is the absorbed dose to water calibration coefficient
D w
kQ is the beam quality conversion determined per AAPM TG-51 protocol
154 Section 11. Interpreting Results

The average restricted collision mass stopping power ratios of medium-to-air and of water-to
air are shown below.
medium-to-air:
L med
---
  air
water-to-air:
L w
---
  air
The combined perturbation correction factors for ionization chamber in medium and in water
are:
ionization chamber in medium:
ionization chamber in water: P Q med
P Q w
The latter factor is a product of Prepl, and Pwall as defined in AAPM TG-21 protocol (Med Phys
10 (741), 1983). Subscripts med and w indicate medium and water, respectively.
Dose-to-Water
Dose to water at water-equivalent depth z can be calculated from dose to medium:
Q Q  en w
D z = D  z   -------- (22)
w med    med
where,
The ratio of the average mass energy absorption coefficient for water to that for plastic is
shown below:
 en w
 -------
-
   med
Substituting Eq (21):
L med
--- P
Q Q Co – 60   air Q med   en w
D z = M N k Q --------------------------------------  -------- (23)
w med D w L w  med
--- P
  air Q w
Recommendations for 6 MV and 10 MV beams

While stopping power ratios and perturbation correction factors in principle depend on various
delivery parameters such as beam quality, chamber type, and field size, reasonable
approximations can be obtained using published data for PMMA (Med Phys 10 (741), 1983, Med
Phys 32 (2945), 2005).
For 6 MV beam (%dd(10)x=66.7) and 10 MV beam (%dd(10)x=73.0), the ratio:
L PMMA
--- P Q PMMA
  air
----------------------------------------------------
L w
---
  air P Q w
is 0.970 and 0.968, respectively (Med Phys 32 (2945), 2005); therefore, the dose to PMMA can be
estimated as follows:
Dose to medium, 6 MV beam:
Ion Chamber Measurements in CavityPlug or MultiPlug 155

Q Q Co – 60
D z = M N k  0.970 (24)
PMMA PMMA D w Q
Dose to medium, 10 MV beam:

Q Q Co – 60
D z = M N k  0.968 (25)
PMMA PMMA D w Q
Mass energy absorption coefficient ratio (shown below) is 1.031 for 6 MV beam (%dd(10)x=66.7)
and 1.037 for 10 MV beam (%dd(10)x=73.0) (Med Phys 32 (2945), 2005).
Mass energy absorption coefficient:
 en w
 -------
-
   PMMA
Dose to water, 6 MV beam:

Q Q Co – 60
D z = M N k  1.000 (26)
w PMMA D w Q
Dose to water, 10 MV beam:

Q Q Co – 60
D z = M N k  1.004 (27)
w PMMA D w Q
Dose for other energies can be calculated using this approach.
Gamma Analysis
The following excerpt from D. Low, A technique for the quantitative evaluation of dose
distributions”1, provides a succinct description of the Gamma analysis method.
“A technique is developed to unify dose distribution comparisons using the acceptance
criteria. The measure of acceptability is the multidimensional distance between the
measurement and calculation points in both the dose and the physical distance, scaled as a
fraction of the acceptance criteria. In a space composed of dose and spatial coordinates, the
acceptance criteria form an ellipsoid surface, the major axis scales of which are determined
by individual acceptance criteria and the center of which is located at the measurement point
in question. When the calculated dose distribution surface passes through the ellipsoid, the
calculation passes the acceptance test for the measurement point. The minimum radial
distance between the measurement point and the calculation points (expressed as a surface
in the dose–distance space) is termed the Gamma index. Regions where Gamma>1
correspond to locations where the calculation does not meet the acceptance criteria. The
determination of Gamma throughout the measured dose distribution provides a presentation
that quantitatively indicates the calculation accuracy.”
Summary
Dose difference and DTA is a simplified method of Gamma and more stringent in some cases. If
the dose difference does not meet the specified criteria, then somewhere within the radius of the
point of analysis, the dose difference must be zero. Whereas, the allowed dose difference in
Gamma is a function of the distance from the point, being dose difference criteria at the point and
trending to zero at the distance criteria.
The map comparison extends from normalized maps which do not consider absolute dose, to
absolute dose where normalization does not occur. Normalized maps consider shapes in 2D or 3D
but not the scalar dose magnitude. Absolute dose comparison is an extension of the map shape,
and absolute dose is of primary importance in treatment accuracy.
1 D. A. Low, W. B. Harms, S. Mutic, and J. A. Purdy, “A technique for the quantitative evaluation of dose distri-
butions,” Med. Phys. 25 (5), 656-661 (1998).

Further to this there are other factors such as local or global analysis. For example, if two points
are compared in a lower dose region, the normalized values may be 0.30 and 0.32. These two
points differ by 2% relative to the normalization point (global), and 6.7% locally (0.32 is 6.7% larger
than 0.30).
Detailed Description
For a (typical) 3%/3mm criterion, at a given detector point, if the dose difference (d) between the
device measured and the TPS calculated values is less than or equal to ±3%, it is determined that
the measured and calculated dose values match well at the same point, and the
distance-to-agreement (DTA) = 0.00 mm. Then the gamma is calculated simply as shown in the
below equation, which will be less than or equal to 1.00, and the point passes.
2 2
SQRT  d  3  = ABS  d   3 (28)
If for the same 3%/3mm criterion and at the same given detector point, the dose difference (d)
is found to be larger than ±3%, then the system will search for the (nearest) point on the TPS
calculated dose grid with the same calculated dose value as the given detector point. If the point
is found and it has a DTA value less than or equal to 3 mm, the dose difference (d) for the point
= 0.00% and the gamma is calculated as shown in the below equation, which is less than or equal
to 1.00. Again, the point passes.
2 2 (29)
SQRT  DTA  3  = DTA  3
By default, SNC Patient software interpolates TPS data to 1mm for DTA and Gamma analysis.
When searching for the DTA, a further interpolation may be performed on the 1 × 1 mm TPS grid.
This is why DTA values are often less than 1 mm, while many users may have thought that 1 mm
is the lowest possible value for DTA.
If, by using d or DTA alone, the software cannot arrive at a gamma value less than or equal to
1.00 for the given detector point, a combination of d or DTA parameters is used to search for a
point on the TPS dose grid (without further interpolation) such that the value calculated as shown
below is at the minimum.
2 2 2 2
SQRT  d  3 + DTA  3  (30)
This minimum value will become the gamma value, displayed for the given detector point. Here
the published method developed by D. A. Low et al is applied.
For more information about Gamma Analysis, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See Contacting Sun
3D Gamma Analysis for ArcCHECK

3D Gamma calculations in SNC Patient software are performed as pass/fail analysis only, and the
values of gamma indices are not stored. For each point, the search terminates when a gamma
value less than or equal to 1 is found or if the search distance becomes large enough that the DTA
would prevent the point from passing. The gamma value from SNC Patient software for a specific
point may not be comparable with those from third-party QA software, or calculation by hand
using the (original) published method by Low et al.
Gamma Analysis 157

Distance to Agreement
The distance to agreement (DTA) quantitative evaluation technique has been described by J. Van
Dyk, et al1 and Daniel Low, et al2. The following excerpts provide a succinct description of
Distance to Agreement, as cited from the D. Low paper, referenced below in the Gamma Analysis
discussion.
“Quantitative evaluation methods directly compare the measured and calculated dose
distribution values.”...“The criterion for acceptable calculation performance is generally
defined as a tolerance of the dose and distance to agreement (DTA) in regions of low and high
dose gradients, respectively. The dose difference and DTA distributions complement each
other in their useful regions.”
“Van Dyk describes the quality assurance procedures of treatment planning systems and
subdivides the dose distribution comparisons into regions of high and low dose gradients,
each with a different acceptance criterion. In low gradient regions, the doses are compared
directly, with an acceptance tolerance placed on the difference between the measured and
calculated doses. In high dose gradient regions (assuming that the spatial extent of the region
is sufficiently large), a small spatial error – either in the calculation or the measurement –
results in a large dose difference between measurement and calculation. Dose differences in
high dose gradient regions may therefore be relatively unimportant, and the concept of a
distance-to-agreement (DTA) distribution is used to determine the acceptability of the dose
calculation. The DTA is the distance between a measured data point and the nearest point in
the calculated dose distribution that exhibits the same dose. The dose-difference and DTA
evaluations complement each other when used as determinants of dose distribution
calculation quality.”
In SNC Patient software, DTA is implemented on dose points at or above the user specified
threshold, TH(%). The software investigates the dose difference between each measured point
(Set 1) and the corresponding TPS point (Set 2).
1 If the difference is within the user-defined Diff% criteria, the point passes.
2 Distance search - If the difference exceeds the Diff % criteria at the investigated point, a
distance search is performed. This search stops when either a sign change in difference
occurs or the search distance would exceed the Dist (mm) radius around the measured point
under investigation.
a. If a sign change occurs, the point passes. A change in difference sign (+ to –, or – to +)
associated with a TPS point within the neighborhood of the measured point implies a TPS
location in the neighborhood is equal to the measured dose point, i.e., the difference
must be zero at some point if the difference changed sign.
b. If no sign change occurs, then no TPS points in the neighborhood are equal to the mea-
sured point and the point fails.
1 J. Van Dyk, R. B. Barnett, J. E. Cygler, and P. C. Shragge, DTA i.e., Dose Difference and Distance to Agreement,
“Commissioning and quality assurance of treatment planning computers, “Int. J. Radiat. Oncol., Biol., Phys.
26(2), 261-273 (1993).
2 D. A. Low, W. B. Harms, S. Mutic, and J. A. Purdy, “A technique for the quantitative evaluation of dose distri-
butions,” Med. Phys. 25 (5), 656-661 (1998).

Figure 11-1. Distance to Agreement Diagram
3D DTA for ArcCHECK

By default, SNC Patient software uses 3D DTA analysis for ArcCHECK. In 3D DTA analysis, the TPS
3D dose grid data is interpolated to 1x1x1 mm3, and then the software finds the smallest value of
DTA for each detector point using the 3D interpolated dose grid. The search stops at 5 mm.
Relative/Absolute DTA Comparison

Relative dose DTA comparison can be used with all measured and planned dose data. The
software compares the corresponding normalized values.
Absolute dose DTA comparison is performed if both the measured and the planned dose files
contain absolute dose data and Absolute Dose mode (AD) is selected in the Compare panel. If
absolute dose data does not exist in one or both files, an error message is displayed.
The following parameters are applied for relative or absolute dose DTA comparison:
• Dose Difference % — the user-defined dose difference % tolerance between measured and
planned points (see Comparing Device Measured with Planned on page 51.)
• Distance (mm) — the radius of a circle centered at the detector within which points will be
examined for agreement with the user defined acceptance criteria (see Comparing Device
Measured with Planned on page 51.).
• Measurement Uncertainty — If the ‘Apply Measurement Uncertainty’ option is enabled in Pro-
gram Preferences, a flat uncertainty value is added to the user-defined acceptance criteria
(Diff %). The measurement uncertainty value is device-specific and RD/AD mode specific.
See Measurement Uncertainty on page 160.
For more information about Distance-to-Agreement, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See Contacting
Sun Nuclear Support on page 228.
Distance to Agreement 159

Global % (Van Dyk %) Difference
If the Global % checkbox is selected in the Analysis panel, Van Dyk1 comparison is used during
DTA and gamma analysis.
Global % Difference for DTA Analysis

Global % Difference for DTA analysis is defined as the following expression in the SNC Patient
software:
M g  h – P k l
PDE k l = 100  --------------------------- (31)
P norm
where,
Mg,h, is the measured value at point (g,h)
Pk,l is the planned value at point (k,l)
Pnorm is the planned value at the normalization point.
PDEk,l is the percent dose difference between Mg,h and Pk,l .
Note: In Program Preferences, the user can select if the maximum dose value in the
planned dose corresponds to a detector location or the overall maximum value from
the planned dose for global normalization.
Global % Difference for Gamma Analysis

Global % Difference for Gamma Analysis is defined as the following expression in the SNC Patient
software:
P k l – M g h
PDE k l = 100  --------------------------- (32)
P norm
where,
Mg,h, is the measured value at point (g,h)
Pk,l is the planned value at point (k,l)
Pnorm is the planned value at the normalization point.
PDEk,l is the percent dose difference between Mg,h and Pk,l .
Note: In Program Preferences, the user can select if the maximum dose value in the
planned dose corresponds to a detector location or the overall maximum value from
the planned dose for global normalization.
Measurement Uncertainty
When the ‘Apply Measurement Uncertainty’ checkbox in Program Preferences is selected, SNC
Patient software applies a measurement uncertainty to all detectors and adds it to the
user-defined acceptance criteria. The calculation is slightly different for relative (normalized) and
for absolute dose (cGy) measurements, as well as for MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2 and ArcCHECK
measurements. The measurement uncertainty is calculated as the root mean square (RMS) of the
possible error sources in decimal, listed below:
• Measurement electronics error: 0.08%
• Array calibration uncertainty: 0.5%
• Angular dependence uncertainty: 0.5 % (only ArcCHECK, and after angular correction)
1 J. Van Dyk, R. B. Barnett, J. E. Cygler, and P. C. Shragge, “Commissioning and quality assurance of treatment
planning computers, “Int. J. Radiat. Oncol., Biol., Phys. 26(2), 261-273 (1993).

• SDD uncertainty (2 mm at 100 cm SDD): 0.4% (combination of two setups – QA and
calibration)
• Linac output fluctuation: 0.15%
• Diode temperature dependence: 0.5% (room fluctuation and array gradients of 1 degree C)
For relative dose comparison, only the first three uncertainties apply because the last three cancel
through the dose map normalization process. For absolute dose comparison, all uncertainties
apply.
Table 11-1. Measurement Uncertainty Values
Measurement Uncertainty (eg,h) ArcCHECK (%) MapCHECK and MapCHECK 2 (%)

Absolute Dose 1.0 0.8
Relative Dose 0.7 0.5
Percentage Acceptance:
D' M = D M + e g h (33)
where,
DM is the maximum allowed dose difference percentage (Diff %) defined by the user.
D’M is the total percentage of dose difference allowed
eg,h is the measurement uncertainty calculated in the table above.
Gradient Compensation (GC)
When Gradient Compensation is enabled, the software computes the gradient compensated dose
difference distribution per the technique outlined in J. M. Moran, J. Radawski, and B. A. Fraass,
“A dose-gradient analysis tool for IMRT QA”, J. Appl. Clin. Med. Phys. 6, 62-73 (2005). Namely, the
dose difference is diminished by the product of the local gradient and the uncertainty parameter
entered by the user.
To enable Gradient Compensation, select the ‘Use Gradient Compensation Analysis’ option in Pro-
gram Preferences and then select ‘GC’ in the Analysis panel prior to comparison. See Program
Preferences on page 178. The GC Program Preferences option is not selected by default. When
Gradient Compensation analysis is enabled, the DTA analysis button in the Analysis panel changes
from ‘DTA’ to ‘GC’.
When Gradient Compensation analysis is selected instead of DTA, the default distance criteria is
1 mm and the default difference criteria is 3%. The distance parameter cannot be more than 5 mm
for 2D GC analysis and 8 mm for 3D GC analysis. Other software changes for GC analysis are listed
below:
• The Calc Shift button is hidden. Calc Shift is not applicable when performing GC analysis.
• Reports display GC analysis related results.
• Batch analysis uses GC analysis. The Auto Calc Shift option in the Batch Analysis dialog box
is hidden.
• The detector pop-up box displays the Gradient value (cGy/mm). See Display Dose at Selected
Point on page 66.
Introduction
The Gradient Compensation technique was developed specifically for IMRT field evaluation
because the significance of differences may depend on the local gradients. Known geometric
effects and small spatial misalignments may dominate the quantitative analysis of any of these
comparison techniques and therefore bias or confuse the assessment of calculation and
measurement dose differences. When the effects of the local dose gradient are taken into
account, these known effects can be removed from the dose distribution comparison, making
evaluation of the remaining differences more obvious and straightforward. The dose error at a
measured point, compared to the calculated dose at that point, is simply the difference between
the two dose values. The uncertainty of this error is related to the position errors of the point
Gradient Compensation (GC) 161

(measured or calculated) and the dose gradient at this point. In a dose distribution that does not
change with position, the position error does not contribute to the error uncertainty. For a point
measurement, the error is simply stated as the difference, Measured - Planned.
Specification
The software will calculate gradient at each calculated point. The gradient used in this case is
generalized gradient which is the sum of squares of all the local gradients around each point. To
calculate the dose gradient for 2D or 3D grid (TPS Calculated grid), the dose difference is
calculated between each dose grid point and its nearest neighbors on the calculation grid. The
gradient at each point is then calculated with the following equation:
d ij 2
G i = Gradient =   ---------
x ij 
 (34)
where,
Gi (cGy/mm) is the generalized gradient at grid point i
∆dij is the difference in dose between the grid point i and each of its nearest neighbors j
∆xij is the distance between the grid point i and each of the nearest neighbor points j used in the
calculation
Four neighboring points are used for the gradient calculation in 2D and six points for the calcula-
tion in 3D.
The gradient compensation method modifies the dose difference distribution created by
subtracting a measurement and calculation to remove differences that may be caused by
geometrical mismatches of a given size (1mm by default) that can be due to small misalignment
or dose calculation grids. There are many geometrical discrepancies between measured and
calculated dose distributions, which may lead to rather large differences in the dose difference
distribution, especially in large gradient regions of the dose distribution. The gradient
compensation over a distance of interest allows the analysis of the dose difference with those
differences removed. Gradient compensation is performed with the following steps:
1 Calculate the gradient map for the TPS dose based on the equation above.
2 Choose a distance parameter dgc (typically 1 mm), which is the size of the geometric
uncertainty (dose differences caused by a geometric shift of this distance will be removed
from the dose-difference distribution by the gradient compensation).
3 Calculate DoseDifferencegc (∆Dgc) as described below:
Negative case: If (∆D < 0 and Gijdgc < | ∆D|), then ∆Dgc = ∆D + Gijdgc
Positive case: If (∆D > 0 and Gijdgc < | ∆D|), then ∆Dgc = ∆D - Gijdgc
Else: ∆Dgc = 0

12 Hardware Reference
ArcCHECK Instrument
The ArcCHECK has a phantom area and an electronics area with a connector panel. The phantom
area center cavity may be filled with a cavity accessory. See Accessories on page 197.
Phantom
area Cavity Panel
Electronics
area
Connector
Panel
Figure 12-1. ArcCHECK Instrument
CAUTION: The ArcCHECK has dosimeters between the electronics and phantom
areas. The dosimeters are read when the ArcCHECK is returned for service. An
indication of direct irradiation to the electronics will VOID the warranty.
Cavity Panel
The cavity panel has SAGITTAL and CORONAL markers.
SAGITTAL marker
CORONAL CORONAL
marker marker
SAGITTAL marker
Figure 12-2. ArcCHECK Cavity Panel
ArcCHECK Instrument 163

Phantom Area
The markers on the phantom area of the ArcCHECK indicate orientation (SAGITTAL, CORONAL, or
AXIAL) or shift/rotation. There are two SAGITTAL markers, one at zero degrees (top) and one at
180 degrees (bottom). The SAGITTAL marker at zero degrees is normally positioned at the top of
the instrument during measurement.
The shift/rotation markers allow precise positioning when collecting measurements that require a
specific shift or rotation, such as those required for the Merge feature. The shift/rotation markers
are:
• 5 mm, Y axis (to facilitate high density merge measurements)
• 10 mm increments, Y axis (for use during Sun Nuclear factory calibration)
• 6.2 mm, X axis (equals 2.72 degrees rotation to facilitate high-density merge measurements)
• 19.2 mm, X axis (for use during Sun Nuclear factory calibration)
• 105 mm from the center of the phantom (to facilitate large-field merge measurements)
• 95 mm from the center of the phantom (to mark the start and end of the first and last helix of
diodes)
• 80 mm from the center of the phantom (to facilitate large-field merge measurements)
• 10 mm x 12.4 mm rectangle at the center of the diode array (to facilitate high-density merge
measurements)
19.2 mm
+Y
10 mm
15 mm
10 mm
105 mm 80 mm
0 cm 5 mm
105 mm 95 mm
10 mm
-Y
Keep direct beam above this line

6.2 mm
-X 0 cm +X
Figure 12-3. Phantom Area - Markers
164 Section 12. Hardware Reference

Diode Geometry
The diodes in the phantom area are arranged in a helical pattern (HeliGrid™), as illustrated in the
following figure:
Figure 12-4. Detector Geometry
Electronics Area
The electronics area, located adjacent to the connector panel, contains ten diode detectors to
determine if critical ArcCHECK components are inside of the beam with dose rates that exceed
desired limits. The ArcCHECK firmware monitors accumulated charge collected by all electronics
in beam diodes over the lifetime of the instrument.
Do not allow direct radiation in the electronics area of the instrument. Keep the beam above the
line marked “KEEP DIRECT BEAM ABOVE THIS LINE”. Excessive radiation of electronic
components may void the warranty. See Minimizing Radiation Damage on page 219.
Connector Panel
The following figure shows the ArcCHECK connectors and indicators on the connector panel.
Rotate (Left) Rotate (Right)

LED LED
Tilt (Up) LED Tilt (Down) LED
Power LEDs
(one for each
microcontroller)
Power/Data
Port
Reference 
Port
Figure 12-5. ArcCHECK Connector Panel
ArcCHECK Instrument 165

• The Power/Data port connects to the power/data cable.
• The Reference port can be used to connect a diode detector (n-type). The detector output is
not displayed in the user interface; it is only visible in the multi-frame (movie) file. A reference
diode is used during array calibration at the Sun Nuclear factory; it is not needed to perform
the array calibration procedure in this guide (see Array Calibration on page 18.)
• For inclinometer LED status, see Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration on page 13.
For Power/Data LED status, see ArcCHECK LEDs (New Model 1220 ArcCHECK) on page 226.
Temperature Sensor
The ArcCHECK contains one thermistor that monitors the instrument temperature. The software
reads the thermistor and determines the equivalent instrument temperature.
ArcCHECK Cradle
The ArcCHECK cradle holds the ArcCHECK in a fixed position for measurement and supports the
ArcCHECK Scatter Accessory (see Scatter Accessory on page 206.) The ArcCHECK cradle can be
used with all new and existing ArcCHECK instruments.
Cradle Parts
Table 12-1. Parts Included in ArcCHECK Cradle Assembly, P/N 1220800Z
Part Number Quantity Description

1220392Z 2 Spacer, long
1220391Z 2 Spacer, short
1220396Z 1 End stop
1220393Z 2 Acrylic rod (2 cm diameter, inside spacers)
940121Z 4 Nut, cap, nylon
1220384Z 1 Cradle, middle
1220394Z Cradle, front (required for the Scatter Accessory)
978017Z 4 Leveling foot, 2 inch diameter
1220476Z 2 Support (required for Scatter Accessory)
940120Z 2 Plunger, ball
ArcCHECK
Middle cradle End stop
Spacer
Front (long)
cradle
Leveling
feet (4)
Spacer
(short)
Scatter
Accessory
Plastic nuts (4) Support ams for Scatter Accessory
Figure 12-6. ArcCHECK with Cradle Support Kit Installed

Installing Support Arms for Scatter Accessory
1 Loosen the ball plungers at the base of the front cradle.
Ball plungers
Figure 12-7. Loosen Ball Plungers on Front Cradle
2 Insert the support arms through the inner holes in the front cradle.
Support arms Front cradle

Figure 12-8. Attach Front Cradle to Cradle Assembly
3 Tighten the ball plungers on the front cradle, but do not over-tighten. You should be able to
reposition or remove the support arms without adjusting the ball plungers.
Cradle Rod and Spacer - Density

When modeling the ArcCHECK and cradle in the TPS, the density of the 2 cm PVC cradle rod is
1.4 g/cm3.
ArcCHECK Cradle 167

ArcCHECK Storage Case
The ArcCHECK storage and transport case is included with each new ArcCHECK. The case
features foam cutouts that support the ArcCHECK, Scatter Accessory, Cradle, and all other
peripherals and cables used with ArcCHECK. It also has four camlocks to secure the lid, two
wheels, two handles for lifting, and a retractable, telescoping handle for transport.
To purchase an ArcCHECK storage case, contact your Sun Nuclear Sales representative.
For ArcCHECK case specifications, see Specifications on page 215.
ArcCHECK
Scatter Accessories
Accessory Box
ArcCHECK ArcCHECK
Cradle
Figure 12-9. ArcCHECK Case (shown with ArcCHECK, Scatter Accessory, Cradle, & Accessories
Box)
Case Unpacking Instructions

1 Orient the case with the wheels and the telescoping handle toward the floor. Ensure that the
handle is fully retracted.
2 Open the four camlocks (two on each side and two in the front) that fasten the case top to
the case bottom.
To open each camlock, lift the wing handle out, rotate counterclockwise, and pull out and
down to release the lock from the catch.

Camlock and wing handle
Figure 12-10. Opening a Shipping Case Camlock
3 Open the case top.

4 Remove the ArcCHECK accessories box.
lifting. See the ArcCHECK weight in Specifications on page 215.
5 Carefully lift the ArcCHECK out of the case and place the ArcCHECK on a level surface with
the electronics end down for stability.
6 Remove the ArcCHECK cradle from the case and place it on a flat surface.
7 If using the Scatter Accessory, remove it from the case.
Case Packing Instructions

1 Disconnect the power/data cable from the ArcCHECK.
2 If transporting the ArcCHECK to another facility, gather the following parts and store them in
the ArcCHECK accessories box:
• Power/data cable, 8 pin DIN
• Power supply for PDI
• Power cord for power supply
• USB cable
• PDI
• ArcCHECK User’s Guide
3 If the Scatter Accessory is installed in the cradle, carefully pull the support arms away from
the Scatter Accessory until the Scatter Accessory can be lifted away from the cradle.
a. Place the Scatter Accessory in the case.
b. Carefully remove the support arms from the cradle and place them in the ArcCHECK
accessories box.
lifting. See the ArcCHECK weight in Specifications on page 215.
4 Place the ArcCHECK accessories box in the case.

5 Carefully remove the ArcCHECK from the cradle and place it on a level surface with the
electronics end down for stability.
6 Place the cradle in the case.
7 Carefully lift the ArcCHECK and place it in the case.
8 Close the case lid and secure it to the case using the four camlocks.
ArcCHECK Storage Case 169


13 Software Reference
Menu Options
This section describes the menu options in SNC Patient software.
Menu Item Sub-item Description

File Open Session Open a saved session configuration file.
DataSet 1 • Device Measured — Opens a MapCHECK, Map-
CHECK 2, or ArcCHECK measurement.
• Planned Dose/Image Data — Not used with Arc-
CHECK.
• ArcCHECK Planned Dose — Open a DICOM RT PLAN
and RT DOSE and extracts dose for comparison with
an ArcCHECK measurement.
• Film — Not used with ArcCHECK.
• Calculate and Open EPIDose — Not used with Arc-
CHECK.
• Open EPIDose — Not used with ArcCHECK.
• DICOM Plan/Dose FileSet — Not used with Arc-
CHECK.
• Film as MapCHECK (Set 1 only) — Not used with Arc-
CHECK.
See also Loading Data on page 60.
DataSet 2 Opens a submenu for Set 2 with the same menu options
as the DataSet 1 menu.
Save Session Save the comparison and analysis session to a file. See
also Sessions on page 55.
Device Measured Save device measured data. See also Device Measured
Files on page 35.
Plan as SunCOM (Set 2 Saves a copy of the imported planned dose data in Sun-
Only) COM file format (.snc). Although this option is available
for ArcCHECK, MapCHECK 2, and MapCHECK, it is not
needed for ArcCHECK data. When TPS data is imported
to SNC Patient using the ‘ArcCHECK Planned Dose’
menu option, a copy of the RT Data is automatically
stored in SunCOM format (.snc). For details, see Sun-
COM Format on page 39.
MapCHECK as TIFF File Not used with ArcCHECK. Saves a MapCHECK or Map-
(Set 1 Only) CHECK 2 measurement as a TIFF file (.tif) file and
calibration file (.cal) for use with a TomoTherapy DQA
system.For information about this option, see the Map-
CHECK 2 Reference Guide or online Help.
Clear Clear Set 1 Clears data from the Set 1 panel. For details, see Clear
Data on page 60.
Clear Set 2 Clears data from the Set 2 panel. For details, see Clear
Data on page 60.
Clear Set 3 Clears data from the Set 3 (Compare) panel. For details,
see Clear Data on page 60.
Clear All Clears data from all four panels. For details, see Clear
Data on page 60.
Figure 13-1. Menu Commands
Menu Options 171

File Print/Pre- Prints a report that shows all four graphs on a single
(Continued) view page. For details, see Reports on page 56.
File New Patient Plan for Opens a dialog box to create a new patient plan to be
Manager File Manager… displayed in the File Manager. For details, see Creating a
New Patient Plan on page 75.
Open Patient Plan in Opens a dialog box to select a patient plan from a list of
File Manager… existing plans. For details, see Adding Files to a Patient
Plan on page 76.
Patient Plan Opens a dialog box to select a patient plan to edit or
Maintenance… delete. For details, see Patient Plan Maintenance on
page 77.
Recently Displays a list of recently used files. Click filename to
Used Files open.
Exit Closes the SNC Patient application.
Setup Collect Used to collect a background measurement. For details,
back- see Collecting Background Manually on page 17.
ground…
Calibrate Opens the ArcCHECK Array Calibration dialog box. For
Array… details, see Array Calibration on page 18.
Calibrate Opens the ArcCHECK Dose Calibration dialog box. For
Dose… details, see Absolute Dose Calibration on page 29.
Program Opens the Program Preferences dialog box. For details,
Prefer- see Program Preferences on page 178.
ences…
Find Device Searches all ports for a connected device. For details,
see If the ArcCHECK is Not Found on page 10.
Map- Download Firmware to Opens a dialog box to download firmware to the Arc-
CHECK Device... CHECK. For details, see Upgrading Firmware on
2/Arc- page 220.
CHECK View Inclinometer Used to calibrate the (physical) ArcCHECK inclinome-
Readings... ters. For details, see Inclinometer Calibration on
page 15.
EPIDose Opens the EPIDose physics modeling window. Not used
Physics with ArcCHECK.
Modeling... If an EPIDose license is not installed, this menu option is
dimmed.
For details, see the EPIDose Reference Guide or online
Help.
Tools Combine SNC Device Data Opens a dialog box from which you can create merged,
composite, or concatenated ArcCHECK measurements
For details, see Merge (for Longer Field Size) on
page 111, Merge (for Higher Density) on page 113, Con-
catenate on page 115, or Composite on page 115.
Other Data Not used with ArcCHECK.
Split Com- Splits ArcCHECK or MapCHECK 2 IMRT delivery into
posite into multiple files such that a new beam file is created each
Single time the beam-off duration exceeds a user-specified
Beams... minimum value. For details, see Split Feature on
page 116.
ArcCHECK Provides the ability to determine the angle of incidence
Virtual Incli- to the ArcCHECK and view the gantry angle determined
nometer - by the measured data (stationary or moving gantry). For
Gantry details, see Virtual Inclinometer - Gantry Angle on
Angle page 110.
Create and Creates an SNCPDP file for use in 3DVH software. This
Export feature is not used with ArcCHECK and it is not required
SNCPDP since an ArcCHECK .acml file can be imported directly
File... into 3DVH. For details, see the MapCHECK 2 Reference
Guide or online Help.
ArcCHECK For ArcCHECK measurements, provides the ability to
Control analyze dose delivery in the full arc, in sub arcs defined
Point Dose by number of control points per arc, in sub arcs defined
Analysis... by start angle and end angle, or per control point.For
details, see ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis on
page 80.
Figure 13-1. Menu Commands (Continued)
172 Section 13. Software Reference

Tools ArcCHECK For ArcCHECK measurements, allows you to evaluate
(Continued) Plan MLC the difference between the planned and delivered MLC
QA pattern to check for inaccuracies in leaf positioning. For
details, see ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA (Per Control Point)
on page 105.
Batch Cal- If EPIDose license is installed, calculates EPID dose map
culate for selected files. This feature is not used with Arc-
EPIDose... CHECK. For details, see the EPIDose Reference Guide or
online Help.
Batch Cal- If EPIDose license is installed, uses Elekta log file to cal-
culate culate EPID dose map. This feature is not used with
EPIDose ArcCHECK. For details, see the EPIDose Reference
via Elekta Guide or online Help.
Log...
Scan Film Opens the ‘Film Analysis’ dialog box. The Film feature is
not used with ArcCHECK. For details, see Film QA in the
MapCHECK 2 Reference Guide or online Help.
Advanced Register Film Aligns a scanned dose film file to a TPS planned dose file
Film or a 3D dose extraction plane file from the 3D Dose
Functions Extraction software. The Film feature is not used with
ArcCHECK. For details, see Film Alignment (Register
Film) in the MapCHECK 2 Reference Guide or online
Help.
Extract plane from 3D Extracts a 3D dose plane from a CT data set or planned
Dose dose DICOM files and save the results to a file in Sun-
COM format. The extracted 3D dose plane can then used
as a reference dose for film alignment and analysis. The
Film feature is not used with ArcCHECK. For details, see
3D Dose Extraction Software Module in the MapCHECK
2 Reference Guide or online Help.
Scanner Calibrate Calibrates a Vidar scanner (Film Analysis feature). The
Function Film Analysis feature is not used with ArcCHECK.
Film analysis using a Vidar scanner is only supported
with MapCHECK. For details, see Supported Scan-
ners/Film in the MapCHECK Reference Guide or online
Help.
Unload Medium Unloads film from a Vidar scanner (Film Analysis fea-
ture). The Film Analysis feature is not used with
ArcCHECK.
Help.
Scanner Information Connects to a Vidar scanner (Film Analysis feature) and
retrieve information, such as Scanner ID, serial number,
resolution, etc. The Film Analysis feature is not used
with ArcCHECK.
Help.
Machine Provides delivery system QA tools. See Machine QA on
QA... page 117.
MLC QA… Opens the MLC QA Setup dialog box. This MLC QA fea-
ture is not used with ArcCHECK. For ArcCHECK MLC
QA, use the ArcCHECK Plan MLC QA feature.
For details about MLC QA for MapCHECK or MapCHECK
2, see MLC QA in the MapCHECK Reference Guide or
online Help or the MapCHECK 2 Reference Guide or
online Help.
Beam Provides a Beam QA tool. Beam QA is not used with
QA… ArcCHECK.
For details, see Beam QA in the MapCHECK Reference
Guide or online Help or the MapCHECK 2 Reference
Guide or online Help.
ArcCHECK Displays the exit/entry ratio for each gantry angle in the
Exit/Entry measurement. For details, see ArcCHECK Exit/Entry
Ratios... Ratios on page 143.
Menu Options 173

Help Map- Opens the MapCHECK online Help.
CHECK
Help
Map- Opens the MapCHECK 2 online Help
CHECK 2
Help
ArcCHECK Opens the ArcCHECK online Help.
Help
EPIDose Opens the EPIDose online Help.
Help
About… Displays various information about software, firmware,
and computer hardware. For details, see About SNC
Patient Dialog Box on page 188.
Main Toolbar
The following figure and table describe the toolbar at the top of the main SNC Patient window.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 Start Starts measurement.
2 Stop Left-click: Stop measurement and proceeds to ArcCHECK post-measure-
ment processing.
Right-click: Displays ‘Stop and Disconnect Device’ option which allows
you to physically disconnect the ArcCHECK without interrupting post-mea-
surement processing or closing the software. This option is useful, for
example, after the last ArcCHECK measurement of the day so you do not
have to wait for post-measurement processing to complete before discon-
necting the ArcCHECK. The ‘Disconnect Device’ option is only displayed
during measurement. Otherwise, the option is hidden.
If you selected ‘Stop and Disconnect Device’ by accident, you can recon-
nect to the ArcCHECK by selecting Tools > Find Device.
3 Background Displays a green “Yes” or a red “No” to indicate if a background measure-
ment has been collected.
4 Dose Calibration Indicates the name of the absolute dose calibration.
5 Array Calibration Displays the filename of the selected array calibration
6 Load Array Select an array calibration file.
Calibration
7 View Array Displays a profile of the selected array calibration and allows you to view a
Calibration profile of each step in the array calibration process. (MapCHECK and Map-
CHECK 2 only; this feature is disabled for ArcCHECK.)
8 Patient Plan Select the desired patient plan.
9 BA Opens the File Manager dialog box with the Batch Analysis tab selected.
10 FM Displays File Manager menu options.
11 PDF Select to save a PDF report.
12 Status Indicates status of system:
• ”Idle”— ready for measurement.
• ”Waiting for beam”— Start button has been pressed.
• ”Collecting Data”— beam detected, collecting data.
Figure 13-2. Toolbar Buttons and Indicators

Panel Toolbars - Details
Each panel has a left and bottom toolbar. The following figure and table identify the toolbar but-
tons and controls.
123
4
5
6
10 11
7
8 9
12
13
14
15
16
17
No. Control Button Function

1 Show Toggle between Chart view and Data view. See
Data/Chart Chart/Data on page 61.
2 Show Grid Toggle grid lines on or off. See Grid Lines on page 61.
lines
3 Show Show detector locations. See Show Detectors on

detectors page 62.
4 Edit Con- Displays a menu of contour options. See Edit Con-

tour/Select tour/Select Graph Mode on page 62.
View
5 CAX Offset Displays the offset from CAX. Click Edit to change the
offset. See Shift/Invert on page 65.
6 Exit/Entry Displays the exit/entry ratio at zero degrees (IEC). N/A

indicates that the ratio is outside of the desirable range
(0.22 to 0.32). See ArcCHECK Exit/Entry Ratios on
page 143.
7 Data type Displays the type of data that is loaded in the panel
(MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2, ArcCHECK, EPIDose, Plan,
etc).
8 File- Displays the path to the loaded file. See Loading Data
name/path on page 60.
Figure 13-3. Buttons and Controls in the Data Panel Toolbars
Panel Toolbars - Details 175

No. Control Button Function
9 Set 1 None — Clears the selection.
Options Dose — Select a specific detector on the graph and dis-
play dose values.
Norm — Select a detector to which other detectors will
be normalized.
Zoom — Select to magnify an area of the graph.
Profile — Select to select a detector through which a
profile will be drawn.
Ruler — Select to measure an area in the Set 1, Set 2,
or Compare panels.
Clear — Select to clears the selection.
See Tools on page 65.
10 Data Displays the properties of the data in Set 1. See Data

Informa- Information on page 71.
tion
11 Data type Use these options in chart mode to change the type of
data displayed. See Viewing Numeric Values on
page 54.
12 Analysis Select comparison criteria and analysis options. See
panel Comparing Device Measured with Planned on page 51.
13 Maximize Maximizes the selected panel. See Maximize and Mini-

mize a Panel on page 60.
14 Show  Displays a profile in the Profile/Histogram panel. See

Profile Profile Display on page 69.
Graph
15 Show Displays a zoom work area in the Profile/Histogram

Zoom panel. See Zoom Control - Profile/Histogram Panel on
Control page 67.
16 Show Displays a histogram in the Profile/Histogram panel.

Histogram See Histograms on page 72.
17 Dose See Dose Summary/Statistics on page 70.

Sum-
mary/Stati Dose — View absolute dose values.
stics BQA — Not used with ArcCHECK.
Gamma — Display a gamma index summary.
%Diff — Display a Percent Difference summary.
Figure 13-3. Buttons and Controls in the Data Panel Toolbars (Continued)

Context Menu Details
Right-clicking in a panel displays context menu options that provide quick access to
frequently-used commands. With the context menu displayed, left-click one of the menu options.
Set 1
Context
menu
Panel Item Description

Set 1, Set 2 Open Device Opens a MapCHECK, MapCHECK 2 or ArcCHECK measurement.
Measured
Set 1, Set 2 Open Planned Not used with ArcCHECK.
Dose/Image Data
Set 1, Set 2 Open ArcCHECK Select this option to extract a cylindrical dose plane from the TPS 3D vol-
Planned Dose ume for direct does comparison with ArcCHECK measured values. This
option prompts you for the DICOM RT Plan and DICOM RT Dose files
and it can automatically extract the isocenter coordinates from the
DICOM RT Plan file. See Importing Planned Dose on page 37.
Set 1, Set 2 Open Film Not used with ArcCHECK.
Set 2 only Calculate and Not used with ArcCHECK.
Open EPIDose
Set 1, Set 2 Open EPIDose Not used with ArcCHECK.
Set 1, Set 2 Open DICOM Select this option to extract a planar dose from the TPS data.
Plan/Dose FileSet
Set 1, Set 2, Clear Clears the data from the panel.
Compare
Set 1, Set 2, Copy All Data Copies all data values from the panel to the Windows clipboard.
Compare
Set 1 only Apply Dose Applies the dose calibration selected in the toolbar to the current
Calibration measurement.
Set 1 only Apply Array Applies the array calibration selected in the toolbar to the current
Calibration measurement.
Figure 13-4. Context Menu Commands
Context Menu Details 177

Program Preferences
Program preferences are default global settings for the SNC Patient software. Click Setup >
Program Preferences to display the dialog box.
Files Tab
Item Description Default

Treatment Plan These options are used to automatically invert treatment planning system No
Importing data on the X or Y axis. To enable inversion, select the desired TPS import inversion
filter, select the ‘Invert X’ or ‘Invert Y’ checkbox and then click Set. A red X
indicates no inversion; a green checkmark indicates inversion.
Decimal The decimal point style for device measured data and treatment plan data. Default
Separators • Default preserves the operating system settings. Select default unless
you are processing data with mixed formats.
• Period forces all data to display a period as the decimal point (USA style).
• Comma forces all data to display a comma as the decimal point (Euro-
pean style).
File Manager The directory where File Manager Patient Plans are stored. C:\SNC\
Directory Path Patient
Plans
Signature Image The signature image file that is inserted in the “Reviewed By” section of Blank
File SNC Patient reports.
The image file must be JPG or BMP format, and the size must be 1“ H x 5“
W.
SNC Patient software does not prompt for authentication before applying
the signature image in a report. Ensure that the correct image is selected
before saving the report.
License File Path The directory where SNC Patient license files are stored. C:\SNC\
SNC
Patient\
License
Figure 13-5. Program Preferences, Files Tab

Detectors Tab
The Detectors tab displays a map of the detector array and allows the user to manually disable or
re-enable individual detectors. For instructions, see Manually Disabling Detectors on page 226.
Example
of
disabled
detector
Item Description Default

Detector pattern ArcCHECK detector array. N/A
Save button Saves the configuration according to the instrument serial number. N/A
Discard button Discards the previously entered setup. N/A
Use Detector Map If checked, the user can disable detectors manually. If unchecked, the user set
cannot disable detectors manually.
Add button Adds a new instrument serial number to the drop-down list. N/A
Edit button Allows the user to select detectors on the screen (if “Use Detector Map” is N/A
selected).
Serial number list Select a serial number to view the corresponding detector map. Default
OK button Close and save the detector map. N/A
Cancel button Cancels any edits to the detector map and closes the Program Preferences N/A
dialog box.
Figure 13-6. Program Preferences, Detectors Tab
Program Preferences 179

Reports Tab
The Reports tab allows you to set default information for reports.
Item Sub-Item Description Default

Use Patient Infor- All available Plan Fields All patient information from the plan is used in Enabled
mation from Plan the report.
for: No Plan Fields Patient information from the plan is not used in Disabled
the report.
Selected Plan Fields Patient information from the plan is used in the Disabled
report if the field is marked as ‘Selected’
below.
Default Report Auto-Date Format <Month>/<Day>/<Year> or <Month>
Fields <Day>/<Month>/<Year>. /<Day>/
<Year>
Default Hospital Name Name of facility or clinic Blank
Default SDD The default Source-to-Detector Distance. Blank
Default SSD The default Source-to-Surface Distance. Blank
Default Depth The depth of the dose in the phantom or dmax. Blank
Default Energy Measurement energy. Blank
Default Gantry Angle Default gantry angle. Blank
Options Print Gamma Index Sum- If enabled, displays a summary of the average, Disabled
mary on Four Panel Report maximum, minimum, and standard deviation
of the gamma index in the four panel report.
Default Report Default comments to be entered in reports. Blank
Summary The default comments can be changed prior
to creating the report.
Figure 13-7. Program Preferences, Reports Tab

Other Tab

Measurement ArcCHECK Corrections Select the ArcCHECK corrections that you All correc-
Mode want to apply to measurements. For tions except
• Angular Corrections details, see Post Measurement Processing Out of Beam
• Heterogeneity Correc- on page 145. enabled by
default
tions
• Field Size Corrections
• Out of Beam Correction
Analysis Apply Measurement Applies a Measurement Uncertainty value Enabled
Uncertainty (SNC Device during comparison. Measurement uncer-
Measured Only) tainty is a factor used by the software in the
agreement test between measured points
and corresponding planned points.
NOTE: Measurement uncertainty is only
applied when device measured data is
loaded in Set 1.
See also Measurement Uncertainty on
page 160.
Always ask for Dose Scal- If this option is enabled, the software will Disabled
ing Factor prompt for MUs or dose scaling factor
before opening planned dose data.
Enabling this option allows absolute dose
analysis when the delivery dose is a frac-
tion of the total calculated dose, which is
common practice in some clinics. For
example, if the total planned dose is deliv-
ered 20 times and the measurement is one
fraction, enter a scale factor of 0.05 to scale
down the planned dose before performing
absolute dose analysis.
When this option is disabled, the program
will only prompt for dose scaling factor
when loading Pinnacle3 TPS data.
Figure 13-8. Program Preferences, Other Tab
Program Preferences 181

Analysis Use Gradient Compensa- When this option is enabled, the DTA but- Disabled
(Continued) tion Analysis ton in the Analysis panel is replaced with
GC (Gradient Compensation). See Gradient
Compensation (GC) on page 161.
Threshold Override (Map- Not used with ArcCHECK. Disabled
CHECK/MapCHECK 2
devices only)
Van Dyk (Global Max TPS Dose Corre- When this option is enabled, the maximum Enabled
% Difference) sponding to Detector dose value for Van Dyk % Difference corre-
Reference Point Location sponds to a detector location in the
planned dose data.
Max TPS Dose Overall When this option is enabled, the maximum Disabled
dose value for Van Dyk % Difference is the
overall maximum in the planned dose data.
Miscellaneous Display Electronics in When selected, a warning message dis- Enabled for
Beam Message plays if the electronics section of the ArcCHECK.
instrument is exposed to the direct beam. Disabled for
This option should always be selected to MapCHECK
prevent accidental damage to the elec- and Map-
tronic circuits. CHECK 2.
Figure 13-8. Program Preferences, Other Tab (Continued)
Array Calibration Dialog Box
Select Setup > Calibrate Array from the menu to view the ‘Array Calibration’ dialog box.
Control Name Description

ArcCHECK image Shows the orientation of the ArcCHECK and the location of the cross hairs during
each step of the array calibration.
Device Status Shows status of the ArcCHECK.
Beam status icon. Displays the beam status:
• GREEN - Beam is idle.
• YELLOW - Start button has been pressed.
• RED - Beam is on.
Exposures Lists the eleven steps required for array calibration (labeled A through K). An
arrow points to the current step.
Instructions Provides detailed instructions for each step of the array calibration.
Prev/Next buttons Changes to the next step or the previous step. The Prev button can be used to
return to a previous step and repeat an exposure, for example, if you did not
make the correct rotation or shift.
Beam Control (Start/Stop) Start and stop collecting dose for a calibration step.
buttons
Figure 13-9. Array Calibration Window Controls

Control Name Description
Finish button Initiates the array calibration calculations.
Set Default button Opens a dialog box to set the default calibration file to be loaded automatically
each time the SNC Patient software is launched.
Close button Closes the calibration window.
Reset button Clears all calibration and resets to step A.
Figure 13-9. Array Calibration Window Controls (Continued)
See also Array Calibration on page 18.
Dose Calibration Dialog Box
Select Setup >Calibrate Dose from the menu to view the ‘Dose Calibration’ dialog box.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No. Description
1 Instructions — tells the user how to create a dose calibration.
2 Dose (cGy) — enter the standard dose in cGy that corresponds to the machine settings selected
for the calibration exposure. The standard dose should be previously measured with an ion
chamber whose calibration is traceable to NIST or similar standardization agency.
3 Energy — enter the energy setting on the accelerator.
4 Comments — describe the dose calibration setup conditions as needed.
5 Device Serial — serial number of the device (entered automatically)
6 Add Dose Calibration — click to add the current dose calibration to the list of current calibrations.
7 Start and Stop buttons — click buttons to start and stop exposure.
8 Current Calibrations — shows all of the available dose calibrations.
9 Remove — click to remove the highlighted dose calibration from the list of calibrations.
10 Set as Default — click to set the highlighted dose calibration in the Current Calibrations list as
the default value. The default value will load automatically when the SNC Patient software is
launched.
Figure 13-10. Absolute Dose Entry Dialog Box Items
See also Absolute Dose Calibration on page 29.
Dose Calibration Dialog Box 183

File Manager Dialog Box
The File Manager dialog box has two tabs: Manage Files, and Batch Analysis. The contents of
each tab are described below. See also File Manager on page 75.
Manage Files Tab
Group Name Description

DICOM RT and DICOM RT PLAN DICOM RT PLAN files in the patient plan.
MLC Files DICOM RT STRUCTURES Not used with ArcCHECK.
MLC FILES Not used with ArcCHECK.
RT IMAGES & SUPPORT For ArcCHECK, can be used to store additional file types
FILES related to the patient’s treatment plan.
Measured DIODE ARRAY Device measurements in the patient plan.
Dose
EPIDose list Not used with ArcCHECK.
Calculated TPS DOSE TPS dose files in the patient plan.
Dose
Figure 13-11. Manage Files Tab

Batch Analysis Tab
See also Batch Analysis on page 77.
Name Description
Set 1 Select the type of data files to open in the Batch Analysis Set 1 panel: Mea-
sured: Diode Array, or Calculated: TPS. Files in the patient plan that match the
selected type are automatically loaded.
Vendor If Calculated: TPS is selected as the Set 1 data type, select the TPS vendor
(import filter) from the Vendor drop-down list.
Set 2 Select the type of data files to open in the Batch Analysis Set 2 panel: Mea-
sured: Diode Array, or Calculated: TPS. Files in the patient plan that match the
selected type are automatically loaded.
Vendor If Calculated: TPS is selected as the Set 2 data type, select the TPS vendor
(import filter) from the Vendor drop-down list.
ADD After selecting an item in Set 1 and an item in Set 2, click ADD to add the file
pair to the lower (comparison) panel.
ADD ALL If the files in Set 1 and Set 2 are in the desired order, click ADD ALL to auto-
matically create file pairs and add all of them to the lower (comparison) panel.
COMPARE Initiates comparison.
Dose Select Absolute or Relative.
Method Select DTA, Gamma, or Gradient Compensation (if enabled in Program
Preferences).
% Threshold Select the threshold analysis criteria. The default is 10%.
% Difference Select the % difference analysis criteria. The default is 3.0%.
mm Select the distance criteria for analysis. The default is 3.0 mm.
Auto Calc Shift Select if the data sets should be shifted automatically to find the best pass
rate.
Set 1 files (Comparison) The files selected from Set 1.
Set 2 files (Reference) The files selected from Set 2.
Shift (mm) The shift applied to the comparison (if Auto Calc Shift is selected).
Total Pts The total number of points analyzed.
Passing Pts. The number of points that passed the analysis criteria.
Passing % The percentage of points that passed the analysis criteria.
Delete Pair(s) Removes the selected pair from the comparison panel.
File Manager Dialog Box 185

Name Description
Open Pair Opens the selected pair in the main SNC Patient window.
Create Report Creates a separate PDF report for each comparison. If the Single Page Report
option is selected, includes all comparisons in a single PDF report.
Create Pair Report Creates a report of the selected comparison.
Profile Selects the axis for the profile shown in the report.
Single Page Report When this option is selected, clicking Create Report generates a single PDF
report that includes all of the comparisons.
Close File Manager Closes the File Manager dialog box.
Patient Information Dialog Box Details
The ‘Patient Information’ dialog box is used to add patient information to a report. Default values
can be loaded automatically as described in Program Preferences on page 178.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

1 Patient Name Patient name.
2 Patient ID Patient ID number.
3 Study Date QA date.
4 SSD Planned source to surface distance.
5 SDD Distance from source to detector plane.
6 Depth Dose depth.
7 Energy Accelerator energy.
8 Angle Wedge angle (if applicable).
9 Hospital Name Hospital name.
10 Summary Text field for comments (300 character maximum).
11 Load Defaults Click to load default patient information.
12 Load Plan Files Click to load patient information from the TPS data in Set 2.

13 Set1 Label User-editable. The label is displayed in the report Set 1 panel.
14 Set2 Label User-editable. The label is displayed in the report Set 2 panel.
Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Details
The Measurement Parameters dialog box is displayed during array calibration, dose calibration,
and measurement. During array calibration, only the Manufacturer and Beam Energy options are
relevant. During absolute dose calibration, the Manufacturer, Beam Energy, and Cavity Plug
Inserted options are relevant, and during measurement, all options in the dialog box are relevant.
The options in the Measurement Parameters dialog box vary depending on the selected delivery
system manufacturer, as described below.
Table 13-1. Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Options
Delivery System Beam Energy

Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Options
Manufacturer Options
Varian • Manufacturer - Select delivery system man- 6MV
ufacturer. Options are Varian, Elekta or Sie-
10MV
mens, or TomoTherapy. The selection
determines the post-measurement correc- 15MV
tion factors applied to the measurement.
18MV
• Load RT Plan (TomoTherapy only) - The RT 23MV
Plan file is used to apply angle-dependent
corrections after measurement. An RT Plan 6FFF
file is not required for array calibration or ab- 10FFF
solute dose calibration.
• Selected RT Plan (TomoTherapy only) - Read
only field that displays the selected RT Plan
filename. For more information, see Post
Measurement Processing on page 145.
Elekta or • Device Electronics Facing Gantry (Tomo- 4MV
Siemens Therapy only) - Select if the ArcCHECK is 6MV
physically inverted on the TomoTherapy
couch (electronics facing gantry). 8MV
10MV
• Beam Energy - Select delivered energy. If
the energy does not match any of the selec- 18MV
tions, select the closest energy. If using a
Flattening Filter Free (FFF) energy, then se-
lect the energy with the same or closest
nominal energy (e.g. 6 MV for 6FFF). Beam
energy is not required for TomoTherapy.
• Cavity Plug Inserted - Select if a CavityPlug
or MultiPlug accessory is inserted in the
TomoTherapy ArcCHECK. N/A
• Cavity Dose - This option is only displayed if
Cavity Plug Inserted’ is selected. Enter the
dose measured by a radiation detector
inserted in a CavityPlug or MultiPlug
accessory during measurement, The cavity
dose is saved in the measured file and
displayed in reports; it is not used in
calculations or analysis.
Measurement Parameters Dialog Box Details 187

About SNC Patient Dialog Box
To access the ‘About SNC Patient’ dialog box select Help > About from the menu. The dialog box
displays information about the current version of SNC Patient software, the connected device, and
the computer on which SNC Patient software is installed.
Figure 13-14. Example of ‘About SNC Patient’ Dialog Box
ArcCHECK File Formats
Starting with SNC Patient V6.0 software, ArcCHECK measurements are saved to three files by
default: a multi-frame (movie) file in ASCII format with raw values for each diode during each
update (*.acm file), a movie lite file in binary format that contains calculated gantry angles (*.acml)
file, and a file that integrates correction factors into the measurement (*.txt file).
CAUTION: Editing a *.TXT or *.ACM file could make it unusable. Always create a copy
of the file before viewing or editing.

Text File (*.txt)
An ArcCHECK *.txt file is saved in tab-delimited text file format. It can be viewed in the SNC Patient
software or using a text editor such as Notepad or spreadsheet application such as MS Excel.
Figure 13-15. Text File Opened in Notepad
A typical ArcCHECK *.txt file contains the following information:

• SNC Patient software version
• File Revision
• File Type
• Manufacturer
• Model and Product Name
• Original Filename
• Firmware Revision
• Hardware Revision
• Diode Type
• Temperature
• Inclinometer Tilt
• Inclinometer Rotation
• Background Threshold — background threshold count
• Measured Cavity Dose — cavity dose if this value is entered manually when the measure-
ment is saved.
• Date/Time Stamp
• Serial Number
• Overrange Error — a value of 0 indicates no overrange errors; a value of 1.1 indicates that
the device was overranged
• Cal File — the calibration file applied to the measurement
• Dose per count — absolute dose calibration
ArcCHECK File Formats 189

• Dose Info — information about the absolute dose calibration
• Dose IDDC — date code
• Time — time in milliseconds
• Orientation — degrees of rotation
• Rows — number of rows of data
• Columns — number of columns of data
• CAX X — position of the central detector on X axis
• CAX Y — position of the central detector on Y axis
• Background — background values
• Calibration Factors — calibration factors
• Offset — offset values
• Raw Counts — raw counts
• Corrected Counts — corrected counts
• Dose Counts — dose counts
• Data Flags — detector position flags
• Interpolated — relative interpolated data
• Dose Interpolated — absolute dose interpolated data
• Corrected Counts (No Angular Correction)

Movie File (*.acm)
An ArcCHECK movie file displays the measured data from each detector in 50 ms updates with
each update in a separate row. Each update contains the total integrated raw count from each
detector since the start of measurement. To calculate the net raw counts in a given update,
subtract the prior update data.
An ArcCHECK multi-frame (movie) file can be viewed using a 3rd party application such as
Microsoft Excel.
Note: The application used to open the movie file must be capable of displaying more
than 256 columns. If it is not, you may see a message that the file did not load
completely.
CAUTION: Editing the *.acm file could make it unusable.
Figure 13-16. Typical ArcCHECK Movie File Format
The movie file format is as follows:

• Header Information (file revision, filename, date/time, file description, institution name,
calibration file, and software version)
• The ArcCHECK Setup (orientation, SSD, alignment, device position QA, Shift X, Shift Y,
Shift Z, Rotation X, Rotation Y, Rotation Z)
• Collector Configuration (model, serial, firmware version, collection interval, background
threshold, plug present, measured cavity dose). Note that no processing or analysis is
performed on the measured cavity dose. It is only stored in the file for future reference.
• Linac Configuration (room, machine type, machine model, energy, machine serial num-
ber, collimator, wedge, rate, dose, gantry angle, collimator angle)
• Hardware Data (temperature, inclinometer tilt, inclinometer rotation, diode type)
• Dose Calibration (dose per count, dose, absolute calibration, energy, timestamp, tem-
perature during calibration, comments)
• Inclinometer Calibration (Point 1 and Point 2)
• Multi Frame (true or false)
• Number of Updates — number of 50 ms updates
• Number of Backgrounds
• Total Pulses
• Total Time

• Beam ON Time
• Detector Locations
• Detector Spacing
• Concatenation (true or false)
• Imported Data (true or false)
• XYZ detector coordinates in the ArcCHECK cylinder from the center of the cylinder array
• Data Headers
• Data for each detector in numeric order. The following information is captured for each
detector:
• xyz coordinates from the center of the ArcCHECK cylinder for each detector in the
array.
• Background leakage (dark current) of the detector, in units of count/Timetic.
• Calibration factor for the detector. If none exists, all are set to 1.000.
• Data rows — one for each 50 ms update, numbered in order starting with 1. Each
update is saved in the next row. Each update contains the total integrated raw count
from each detector since the start of measurement. The net raw counts in a given
update is found by subtracting the prior update data.
Table 13-1. Data Columns in the ArcCHECK Movie File
Heading Description
TYPE Background, Calibration, or Data.
UPDATE# Update number.
TIMETIC 1 The time elapsed since the start of the measurement (nominal units microseconds), as
calculated by board 1.
TIMETIC 2 The time elapsed since the start of the measurement (nominal units microseconds), as
calculated by board 2.
PULSES Number of pulses.
Status 1 Indicates ‘Beam On’ status for board 1 (see Beam On Status on page 192.)
Status 2 Indicates ‘Beam On’ status for board 2 (see Beam On Status on page 192.)
Virtual Inclinometer Virtual Inclinometer angle
Corrected Angle Angle after angular correction is applied.
Field Size Field size (cm) after field size dependence correction is applied.
Note: Beam angle and beam weight at zero (0) indicates that there was no beam or
not enough data for beam angle reconstruction.
Beam On Status
The Status columns in the ArcCHECK movie file contains a flag to indicate if the beam was on
during the update and if the channel was overranged (received dose rate higher than the instru-
ment can accept, over 4,000 cGy). If the instrument contains multiple boards (ArcCHECK or
MapCHECK 2), two Status columns will be displayed - one for each board.
The status flag will display one of the following numbers:
• 0=Beam off.
• 16=Beam off, but was previously on for current measurement.
• 20=Beam on and no overrange.
• 22=Beam on and is overranged.
The integrated (.txt) file is created using the updates with a “beam on” flag in the MapCHECK 2
movie file (.mcm), even if the user only saves the .txt file. This is intentional, and prevents updates
with greater background drift from being included in the integrated file.
If the accelerator delivers a very low signal beam (such as electrons at 400cm SDD), the software
may display “Waiting for Beam” while the beam is on. If this occurs, after post processing the
data, the software eliminates all of the updates because the movie file did not contain “beam on”
flags, and therefore the integrated file (txt) did not contain any data. In these cases, the software

can be modified to include all of the updates in the integrated file, not just the updates that have
a beam on flag in the movie file. Contact Sun Nuclear Support for more information (see Contact-
ing Sun Nuclear Support on page 228.)
Suspended Measurements
After a measurement is collected, the software examines the data for all beam-off updates and
the beam-off updates are removed. The .txt file is also based on the removed beam-off data.
The point at which the data interruption occurred can be observed in the movie file. A new
background is inserted at the point where the beam-off occurs for at least a minute and before
the data acquisition begins again (Figure 13-17). The new background is used for subsequent data.
Ten (half-second) updates are included before the inserted header data and ten (half-second)
updates after the header data.
Suspend also occurs when there is more than 1 second of beam-off but a new background is not
calculated unless the beam is off for more than a minute (Figure 13-17).
Beam off for more than one minute – new background

is inserted between beam off and beam on data
Beam off for less than one minute – new background is

not inserted between beam off and beam on data
Figure 13-17. Examples, Movie Files Showing Suspended Data Collection
Movie Lite File (*.acml)

Starting with SNC Patient software version 6.0, a “lite” version of each ArcCHECK movie file is also
created. The movie lite file (*.acml) contains calculated gantry angles for each measurement.
Calculated gantry angles are required for the Control Point Dose Analysis program and 3DVH
software (see ArcCHECK Control Point Dose Analysis on page 80 and 3DVH Software on
page 142.) In the 3DVH software, the *.acml file is used to calculate the PDP™ (Planned Dose
Perturbation).
ArcCHECK *.acml files are binary and cannot be viewed on the SNC Patient computer. They can
only be opened in the Control Point Dose Analysis feature or in 3DVH software.
Users who do not want to save a *.acml file with each measurement can disable the feature.
Contact Sun Nuclear Support for instructions (see Contacting Sun Nuclear Support on page 228.)

SunCOM File
When the software extracts a cylindrical dose plan from the imported 3D volume, the extracted
data is saved in a file with a *.snc extension (SunCOM format). This format includes a collection
of required keywords and comments in the header. Required keywords are preceded by *. Any
unexpected text, prior to the key words, is ignored.
Global requirements:
• Data values are tab delimited.
• All entries must be ASCII.
• All numeric values must contain a decimal, followed by at least one digit. EX 3.5, -8.4, 18.453,
6.0, 128.0, 0.0
• All comments must be contained in the header.
SunCOM Header Information (Optional)

ID: This could contain helpful identification information, such as ‘first 10x10 test on room 2’.
Date/Time:
Comment 1: SSD
Comment 2: Depth
Comment 3: Field Size
Comment 4: X1, X2 Collimator setting
Comment 5: Y1, Y2 Collimator setting
Comment 6: Gantry Angle
Comment 7: Collimator Angle
Comment 8: Wedge Type and Angle
Comment 6: Beam Type and Energy
Comment 7: Dose at normalization point
Comment 8: Composite of n Fields, or Field m of n
Comment 9: Planning System
SunCOM Required Keywords

The SunCOM file recognizes an asterisk (*) at the beginning of a new line as the start of a key
word. The following key words are contained in the file, in the order indicated.
• *Version: Tab following the colon, then SunCOM’s File version which is 1.0.2 for this writing
of the specification. Example -- *Version: (tab) 1.0.2
• *Dose Units: Tab following the colon, then indicate the units of dose values that populate the
2d Y\X data table. Allowable units are: cGy, Gy, relative. (Relative means there are no dose
units, such as a normalized file. Example -- *Dose: (tab) cGy
• *Dose Scalar Quantity: Tab following the colon, then indicate the scaling factor needed to
convert the Dose Units above to cGy. Example: if the Dose Units are already in cGy, enter 1;
if the Dose Units are in GY, enter 0.01.
• *Coordinate Units: Tab following the colon, then indicate the units of the spatial coordinates
for the dose values in the 2d dose map table. The coordinate values are located in the row
and column of the *Y\X: location. Allowable units are cm or mm. Example -- *Coordinate
Units: (tab) mm
The coordinate data must be evenly spaced and the spacing must be the same for both Y and
X coordinates, i.e., uniform grid. 1 mm spacing is preferred. All coordinate data must contain
a decimal, even integer values such as 10.0.
• *Hole Value: Tab following the colon. If any pixel value is the same as the hole value then the
value of that pixel is not included in the analysis.
• *Y\X No colon after the keyword. Tab following the keyword immediately followed by the low-
est value of the X coordinate in the dose table. All data in the Y\X row to the right of the

keyword “*Y\X<tab>” represent the X coordinate locations of the dose data in the columns
immediately following this row.
The first column of data directly below “*Y\X” contains the Y coordinate locations of the dose
data in the rows immediately following this column. The highest value for the Y coordinate of
the dose table must be immediately below the keyword “*Y\X:” (Note that there is no tab
preceding the Y coordinate of each row.
It is assumed that the 0.0,0.0 coordinate location is coincident to the crosshairs of the
machine, and that the +Y direction is toward the machine gantry.
The 2D dose must be tab delimited and contained in the table defined by the column and row
headings (i.e., Y and X coordinates.)
Example SunCOM File
Comment1: Picodose TA version 2.0

Comment2: original resolution 600 DPI
Comment3: "calibration ""provaieo"""
Comment4: "image file ""calibrazione-ugo.tif"""
Comment5:
Comment6:
Comment7:
Comment8:
Comment9:
*Version: 1.0.2
*Dose Units: cGy
*Dose Scalar Quantity: 1
*Coordinate Units: mm
*Hole Value: None
*Y\X -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
5 97.1 93.7 93.8 92.7 98.8 95.7 99.3 95.4 92.7 93.6 100.5
4 101.3 101.7 95.3 90.8 94.2 95.9 96 94.8 91.2 94.7 96.5
3 103.7 98.6 90.3 91.5 95.1 98.5 95 93.4 88 97.6 95
2 109.8 103.7 111.3 92.3 91.8 93.8 93.4 96.4 93.8 95 95.2
1 103.9 97.6 97.9 98.1 97.3 96.2 96.3 89.8 93.1 95.8 89.5
0 127.8 105.5 105.2 99.7 101.6 101.6 91.9 88.1 90.3 91.8 88
-1 117.3 106.8 106 100.6 107 110.8 103.8 95.4 128.3 92.3 93.7
-2 117.1 109.4 112.5 107.7 106.1 107.1 109 100.2 90.2 94.1 87.9
-3 119.4 109.3 109.6 103.4 105.2 102.4 100.5 105.4 96.1 95.1 94.7
-4 144.7 106 105.3 101.8 105.5 106.7 100.1 98.9 106.4 100.2 93.7
-5 113.5 109.7 104.3 97.7 99.4 99.8 96.9 97.8 99.6 101.2 86.6
SunCOM File 195


14 Accessories
Introduction
To order ArcCHECK accessories, contact your Sun Nuclear sales representative.
CAUTION: Only use Sun Nuclear approved ArcCHECK accessories with the
ArcCHECK instrument. Use with other accessories is prohibited and may void the
warranty.
Solid Cavity Insert Required for 3DVH Software
To collect ArcCHECK measurements that can be analyzed in 3DVH software, the center cavity
must be filled with a solid homogeneous core such as a CavityPlug or MultiPlug accessory. If you
use the MultiPlug accessory to collect the measurements that will be used with 3DVH software,
fill all of the openings with the solid inserts.
CavityPlug Accessory
The CavityPlug accessory, P/N 1220000-1Z, provides a PMMA core that is inserted in the
ArcCHECK’s center cavity. The PMMA core has a central hollow area that can be filled with one of
the following:
• a solid PMMA insert for uniform density through the ArcCHECK cavity
• a precision milled radiation detector adapter to measure dose at isocenter1.
The following figure shows the components of the CavityPlug accessory

1 1220520Z 1 Outer plug (PMMA)
2 1220510Z 1 Flange
3 975035Z 2 Oval handle
Figure 14-1. CavityPlug Accessory, PN 1220000-1Z
1 The ArcCHECK measures entry dose upstream from the isocenter and exit dose downstream from the isocen-
ter, yielding dose measurements at two effective depths for every angle. Measuring the dose distribution as a
function of angle is a more stringent measurement than a composite dose at the isocenter. Errors visible in the
isocenter will also be visible in the surrounding dose measurements, but in more detail. For those who prefer
to collect dose at isocenter, Sun Nuclear offers radiation detector adapters for the CavityPlug accessory.
Introduction 197
1220530Z 1 Inner plug (solid PMMA)
4
See table below. 1 Precision milled radiation detector adapter
Figure 14-1. CavityPlug Accessory, PN 1220000-1Z
For CavityPlug specifications, see Specifications on page 215.
CavityPlug Radiation Detector Adapters

CavityPlug radiation detector adapters have a hollow center for inserting a radiation detector.
Note: IBA diode detectors cannot be used with the PMMA CavityPlug due to their
shape. Parallel plate chambers also cannot be used due to their shape and size.
CavityPlug detector adapters are milled to the exact dimensions of the detector, eliminating any
significant air traps. Each adapter is labeled to identify the detector with which it is used. The
marks on the adapter indicate the effective point of measurement to help ensure that the detector
is inserted properly. The following table lists the most requested detector adapters, but adapters
for other detectors can be custom made to specifications.
Table 14-1. CavityPlug Radiation Detector Adapters
Manufacturer Supported Detector Adapter P/N

Sun Nuclear SNC125c thimble ionization chamber 1220578Z
SNC 600c farmer type chamber 1220566Z
IBA CC01 compact chamber 1220554Z
CC04 compact chamber 1220536Z
FC65-G 1220542Z
FC23-C 1220570Z
PTW Farmer chamber (0.6cc), 30012 1220566Z
Farmer chamber (0.6cc), 30013 1220531Z
Rigid Stem Chamber 30015 1220556Z
Rigid Stem Chamber 30016 1220552Z
SemiFlex (0.125) 31010 1220537Z
SemiFlex (0.125) 31011 1220555Z
SemiFlex (0.3) 31013 1220538Z
Pinpoint (0.015) 31014 1220535Z
Pinpoint (0.030) 31015 1220539Z
Pinpoint (0.016) 31016 1220541Z
microDiamond 60019 1220584Z
Standard  Exradin A1 1220567Z
Imaging
Exradin A1SL 1220533Z
Exradin A12 1220543Z
Exradin A12S 1220564Z
Exradin A14 Micro 1220553Z
Exradin A14SL Micro 1220548Z
Using the CavityPlug Accessory

1 Orient the CavityPlug vertically on a level surface then insert the CavityPlug accessory into the
ArcCHECK cavity until the edge of the flange meets the instrument end panel.
2 Insert a solid PMMA inner plug in the center hollow area of the CavityPlug accessory.
Alternately, insert a radiation detector adapter in the CavityPlug so a radiation detector can be
198 Section 14. Accessories

placed at isocenter. The resulting measurement can be used to verify that the TPS is properly
calculating dose distribution in the ArcCHECK phantom volume.
Do not insert the radiation detector until after the CavityPlug is inserted in the ArcCHECK.
3 With the ArcCHECK oriented vertically on a level surface, insert the CavityPlug accessory into
the ArcCHECK cavity until the edge of the flange meets the ArcCHECK end panel.
4 Place the ArcCHECK, with CavityPlug inserted, on the ArcCHECK cradle.
5 If using a radiation detector adapter, insert a radiation detector in the adapter. Each adapter
is sized for a specific radiation detector. Use the marks on the adapter to place the radiation
detector at the effective point of measurement.
6 Connect the radiation detector to the electrometer.
7 Acquire ArcCHECK measurements as normal. See Acquiring a Measurement on page 33.
8 Record the radiation detector measurement from the electrometer.
When referencing the radiation detector measurement in the TPS, a dose-to-medium or
dose-to-water conversion may be required. For more information, see Ion Chamber
Measurements in CavityPlug or MultiPlug on page 154.
9 When measurement is complete, disconnect the radiation detector from the electrometer
then remove the radiation detector and adapter from the CavityPlug.
10 Orient the ArcCHECK vertically on a level surface and then pull from both CavityPlug handles
to remove the CavityPlug.
MultiPlug Accessory
For MultiPlug specifications, see Specifications on page 215.
Introduction
The ArcCHECK MultiPlug, P/N 1220000-3Z, a modular insert for the ArcCHECK beam dosimetry
QA system, is intended for the positioning of radiation detectors at various locations within the
ArcCHECK cavity for target volume QA dosimetry, including film, ionization chambers, and diodes.
Heterogeneity inserts may also be positioned for research studies of a treatment planning system.
Measurements
The MultiPlug can be used with ArcCHECK to collect the following types of measurements with
radiotherapy photon beams:
• Measurements with a homogeneous, standardized phantom.
• Measurements with heterogeneities in the phantom. See Heterogeneity Inserts on page 202.
• Measurements of dose which are calculated for ArcCHECK with the PMMA MultiPlug acces-
sory inserted.
• Measurements of very small fields, such as SRS, in the center plane with film.
• Measurements at the center of the ArcCHECK with film, diode, or ion chamber.
• Off-axis measurements with a diode or ion chamber.
• Measurements at multiple cavity locations simultaneously with multiple diodes or ion
chambers.
Parts
Table 14-2. Parts In MultiPlug Set, P/N 1200000-3Z
P/N Qty. Description

1220610Z 1 PMMA MultiPlug outer shell with bezel and two handles
1220601Z 14 2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm solid PMMA insert
1220602Z 2 2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm solid PMMA insert with knob handle
1220605Z 1 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm solid PMMA insert with handle
1220606Z 1 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm film cassette lid handle
MultiPlug Accessory 199

Table 14-2. Parts In MultiPlug Set, P/N 1200000-3Z (Continued)
P/N Qty. Description

1220607Z 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm film cassette base
1220650 1 Storage case
Positioning of Inserts
Note: The MultiPlug inserts have a tight tolerance which is necessary to prevent shift-
ing during rotation and to minimize air gaps between insert pieces. Do not force plugs
when inserting.
When changing the positions of the insert pieces, orient the MultiPlug vertically. The MultiPlug
inserts can be arranged any way you like, provided that all of the spaces are filled.
There are 25 possible positions for the 2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm pieces. Two of the solid 2 cm x 2 cm
x 22 cm pieces have a knob handle for easy removal. There are two possible slots for the 2 cm x
14 cm x 22 cm solid insert or the 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm film cassette, both of which have handles
for easy removal. When removing pieces from the MultiPlug, remove pieces with handles first.
Note that the MultiPlug can be rotated to any angle, which provides additional flexibility when
placing the inserts.
2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm
2 cm x 6 cm x 22 cm
2 cm x 10 cm x 22 cm 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm
Figure 14-2. Four Sizes of MultiPlug Inserts

Figure 14-3. MultiPlug without Modular Inserts
2 cm x 10 cm x 22
cm solid insert
2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm
solid insert
2 cm x 6 cm x 22 cm 2 cm x 14 cm x 22 cm
solid insert Film Cassette
Figure 14-4. PMMA MultiPlug Accessory Inside ArcCHECK Cavity
Bezel
The MultiPlug bezel is made of clear acrylic and features angle markers from 0° to 360° on the
inside of the bezel to prevent refraction. The bezel has a major tic mark every 5° beginning with
0°, and a minor tic mark every 1°.
The bezel is normally aligned to the ArcCHECK such that the 0° mark corresponds with the
SAGITTAL marker on the ArcCHECK. If the film cassette is inserted in a horizontal position, this
alignment allows the film to be normally exposed to the beam at zero (IEC) gantry angle.
The bezel has two handles for ease of carrying or positioning the PMMA MultiPlug accessory.
Note: Grasp both bezel handles when transporting the MultiPlug.

0°
270° 90°
180°
Figure 14-5. Bezel with 360° Angle Markers
Heterogeneity Inserts
Optional heterogeneity inserts can be purchased for use with the PMMA MultiPlug accessory. The
heterogeneity inserts are 2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm with absorbtion characteristics of water, brain,
muscle, lung, breast, adipose tissue, bone, liver, and titanium.
Note: The heterogeneity inserts are not intended for CT density calibration. They are
for research studies of a treatment planning system only.
557 1481 452 455 454 453 450 482

Solid Water1 HE Muscle Lung Breast Adipose Bone Liver
HE Brain2
Titanium
Figure 14-6. Heterogeneity Inserts
1 Solid Water® is a registered trademark of Gammex Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Sun Nuclear Corp.
2 The ‘HE’ designation on the ‘HE Brain’ label indicates the unit was manufactured using a process similar to that
used for Solid Water HE material. It does not indicate the unit is constructed of Solid Water HE material. The
‘HE’ designation also differentiates this unit from previous Brain tissue mimicking units, which were manufac-
tured using a process similar to that used to make Solid Water (Standard Grade).

The following table lists the physical density and electron density (relative to water) of each
heterogeneity insert:
Table 14-3. Heterogeneity Inserts
Electron Density
Physical Density (relative to water)
P/N Label Type
(g/cm3) (e- )
1220000-3WZ 557 HE Solid Water Water 1.032 1.00
1220000-3HZ 1481 HE Brain (50/50) Brain 1.050 1.03
1220000-3MZ 452 Muscle (MS 11) Muscle 1.049 1.02
1220000-3UZ 455 Lung (LN-300) Lung 0.290 0.29
1220000-3RZ 454 Breast (BR12) Breast 0.981 0.96
1220000-3AZ 453 Adipose/Fat (AP6) Adipose 0.944 0.93
Tissue
1220000-3BZ 450 Cortical Bone (SB3) Bone 1.820 1.69
1220000-3LZ 482 Liver (LV1) Liver 1.090 1.06
1220000-3TZ None Titanium 4.506 3.731
Radiation Detector Adapters

MultiPlug radiation detector adapters have a hollow center for inserting a diode detector or
cylindrical ionization chamber.
Note: IBA diode detectors cannot be used with the PMMA MultiPlug due to their
shape. Parallel plate chambers also cannot be used due to their shape and size.
MultiPlug radiation detector adapters are designed to the exact dimensions of the ion chamber,
eliminating any significant air traps. Each adapter is labeled to identify the radiation detector with
which it is used. The marks on the adapter indicate the effective point of measurement to help
ensure that the radiation detector is inserted properly.
Figure 14-7. Example Detector Adapter for PTW 30013 Farmer Chamber, 0.6cc
Detector adapters are not included with the MultiPlug; they must be ordered separately. Adapters
for the most requested radiation detectors are listed in the following table. Adapters for other
radiation detectors can be custom made to specifications. Contact your Sun Nuclear sales
representative to inquire about adapters for other radiation detectors.
Table 14-4. MultiPlug Radiation Detector Adapters
Manufacturer Supported Detectors Adapter P/N
SNC125c thimble chamber 1220639Z
Sun Nuclear
SNC600c farmer type chamber 1220655Z
IBA
FC65-G farmer type chamber 1220613Z
FC23-C 0.2cc thimble chamber 1220637Z
FC65-P farmer type chamber 1220573Z

Table 14-4. MultiPlug Radiation Detector Adapters (Continued)
Manufacturer Supported Detectors Adapter P/N
Exradin A1 1220614Z
Exradin A1SL 1220638Z
Exradin A12 farmer type chamber 1220623Z
Exradin A14 microchamber 1220631Z
Exradin A14SL microchamber 1220628Z
Standard 
Imaging Exradin A16 microchamber 1220629Z
Exradin A18 microchamber 1220635Z
Exradin A19 farmer type chamber 1220624Z
Exradin 92705 1220619Z
30013 Farmer chamber (0.6cc) 1220655Z
30015 Rigid stem chamber (1.0cc) 1220633Z
30016 Rigid Stem chamber (0.3cc) 1220617Z
31010 SemiFlex (0.125cc) 1220608Z
PTW 31011 SemiFlex (0.125cc) 1220632Z
31013 SemiFlex (0.3cc) 1220621Z
31014 Pinpoint (0.015cc) 1220615Z
31015 Pinpoint (0.030cc) 1220622Z
31016 Pinpoint (0.016cc) 1220616Z
MultiPlug Storage Case

The MultiPlug storage case holds the MultiPlug, solid PMMA inserts, and up to four ancillary
items, such as heterogeneity inserts or radiation detector adapters.
Figure 14-8. PMMA MultiPlug Storage Case
Film Cassette
The Film Cassette is made of two PMMA plates. The lower plate has a cutout designed to hold
GAFCHROMIC® EBT, EBT2, or EBT3 film cut to 13 cm x 16.54 cm (film must be cut to size). The
upper plate has 5 registration holes. Cut the film to fit the cutout, and use a needle (not provided)
to prick the film through the holes.

Figure 14-9. Film Cassette Open
Using Films with SNC Patient™ Software

The film in the cassette captures a planar dose in the ArcCHECK cavity. The film can be converted
to dose using Sun Nuclear SNC Patient™ software and a flatbed scanner.
For details, see Film QA in the MapCHECK Reference Guide or online Help or the MapCHECK 2
Reference Guide or online Help.
Using the MultiPlug Accessory

1 Orient the MultiPlug vertically on a level surface then install the MultiPlug inserts and arrange
as desired. The MultiPlug inserts can be arranged any way you like, provided that all of the
spaces are filled. It is recommended to install the MultiPlug inserts while the MultiPlug acces-
sory is outside of the ArcCHECK.
• MultiPlug can be rotated to any angle, providing additional flexibility when placing the
inserts.
• If using the film cassette, cut the film to fit the cutout, and use a needle (not provided) to
prick the film through the holes. Place the cover on the film cassette, then insert in the
MultiPlug.
• Heterogeneity inserts can be positioned anywhere in the MultiPlug, and multiple inserts
may be used. For ease in contouring, leave sufficient space between heterogeneity
inserts.
• A radiation detector adapter can be inserted at the center of the MultiPlug so a radiation
detector can be placed at isocenter. The resulting measurement can be used to verify
that the TPS is properly calculating dose distribution in the ArcCHECK phantom volume.
• Do not insert the radiation detector in the adapter until after the MultiPlug is inserted in
the ArcCHECK.
2 With the ArcCHECK oriented vertically on a level surface, insert the MultiPlug accessory into
the ArcCHECK cavity until the edge of the flange meets the ArcCHECK end panel.
3 Place the ArcCHECK, with MultiPlug inserted, on the ArcCHECK cradle.
4 If using a radiation detector adapter, insert a radiation detector in the adapter. Each adapter
is sized for a specific radiation detector. Use the marks on the adapter to place the radiation
detector at the effective point of measurement.
5 Connect the radiation detector to the electrometer.
6 Acquire ArcCHECK measurements as normal. See Acquiring a Measurement on page 33.
7 Record the radiation detector measurement from the electrometer.
When referencing the radiation detector measurement in the TPS, a dose-to-medium or
dose-to-water conversion may be required. See Ion Chamber Measurements in CavityPlug or
MultiPlug on page 154 for more information.
8 When measurement is complete, disconnect the radiation detector from the electrometer
then remove the radiation detector from the MultiPlug.

9 Orient the ArcCHECK vertically on a level surface and then pull from both MultiPlug handles
to remove the MultiPlug. If the MultiPlug is difficult to remove from the ArcCHECK cavity,
remove the insert pieces with handles and then pull from both MultiPlug handles.
When removing inserts from the MultiPlug, remove the insert pieces with handles first.
Scatter Accessory
The ArcCHECK Scatter Accessory, P/N 1220492Z, adds 9.1 cm of material at the +Y end of the
ArcCHECK to account for scatter radiation contributions. It is intended for use with the ArcCHECK
when measuring fields that extend beyond the edge of the ArcCHECK phantom, such as those
required for the ArcCHECK Merge (longer field size) feature (see Merge (for Longer Field Size) on
page 111.) In this application, the Scatter Accessory provides more accurate dose measurements
from the exit diodes close to the +Y end of the ArcCHECK.
With the Scatter Accessory inserted in the ArcCHECK, the measurement error due to loss of
scatter radiation for a 21 cm x 40 cm 6 MV field is 2% or less (relative to a geometry that fully
accounts for scatter radiation.)
The figure below shows a cross section along the long axis of the ArcCHECK illustrating scatter
radiation generated in the Scatter Accessory that impacts exit diode signals.
Primary radiation
Scatter
Accessory ArcCHECK
Entrance
Scatter or diodes
Secondary
radiation Exit
diodes
Figure 14-10. Scatter Radiation Contribution to Exit Diodes

Physical Characteristics
The Scatter Accessory is machined from high density polyethylene (HDPE) with a density of 0.93
g/cm3, which is within ±0.3 g/cm3 of the density of the ArcCHECK PMMA (polymethyl
methacrylate) body and provides scatter conditions similar to those of the ArcCHECK body.
The Scatter Accessory is physically compatible with the ArcCHECK MultiPlug and CavityPlug
accessories. It has cutouts to accommodate the CavityPlug or MultiPlug handles and a hole in the
center to accommodate the cable if a detector is inserted in the center of the CavityPlug or
MultiPlug.
For Scatter Accessory specifications, see Specifications on page 215.

Front view Back view
Figure 14-11. Scatter Radiation Contribution to Exit Diodes
Installation
• The Scatter Accessory must be used with a front cradle that has two holes for the Scatter
Accessory support arms (provided). The support arms secure the Scatter Accessory to the
ArcCHECK and the Cradle Assembly (see the figure below).
• No tools are required for this procedure.
Scatter
accessory
Front
Support
cradle
arms
Figure 14-12. ArcCHECK and Scatter Accessory on Cradle
Procedure
1 If the support arms are installed on the Cradle Assembly, slide them away from the cradle or
remove them temporarily.
2 Place the ArcCHECK on the Cradle Assembly.
3 If you are using a MultiPlug or CavityPlug accessory, insert the accessory in the ArcCHECK
center cavity (see CavityPlug Accessory on page 197 or MultiPlug Accessory on page 199).
4 If you are using a detector in the center of the CavityPlug or MultiPlug, install the detector and
route the cable through the center of the Scatter Accessory.
5 Install the Scatter Accessory in front of the ArcCHECK, being careful to align the cutouts with
the MultiPlug or CavityPlug handles. The recessed area of the Scatter Accessory aligns with
the front edge of the front cradle.
6 Insert the support arms in the cradle assembly and align them as shown in the figure above.
7 Press the support arms tight against the Scatter Accessory until the gap between the top of
the ArcCHECK and the top of the Scatter Accessory is less than 2 mm.
8 If using a center detector, connect the detector cable to the electrometer.
9 Acquire ArcCHECK measurements. For instructions to the ArcCHECK Merge (longer field size)
feature, see Merge (for Longer Field Size) on page 111.
Scatter Accessory 207

Storing the Scatter Accessory
A storage case that supports the ArcCHECK, Cradle, Scatter Accessory and all other peripherals
is included with each new ArcCHECK (see ArcCHECK Storage Case on page 168.) Store the Scatter
Accessory in the ArcCHECK storage case, P/N 1220106Z.
To purchase an ArcCHECK storage case, contact your Sun Nuclear Sales representative.
When the Scatter Accessory is not in use, place it on its largest surface to prevent tipping.

ArcCHECK Trolley
The ArcCHECK Trolley, P/N 1220200Z, is a storage and transport accessory for the Model 1220
ArcCHECK. It supports the ArcCHECK and Cradle at treatment couch height, and allows users to
place the ArcCHECK and Cradle on the couch, or remove them from the couch, without manually
lifting and supporting the weight of the ArcCHECK and Cradle.
The Trolley is shipped unassembled. Assembly instructions, hardware, and tools are provided in
the shipping box.
An optional storage shelf is provided with the Trolley. The shelf features a glued-in foam insert
designed to hold the ArcCHECK Scatter Accessory. The optional storage shelf can be installed
during initial assembly (before Step 7b in separate assembly instructions) or after the Trolley is
fully assembled, as described in Installing Optional Storage Shelf on page 213.
CAUTION: Do not store or transport anything other than the ArcCHECK Scatter
Accessory in the Storage Shelf.
Top
plate
Optional storage
shelf for Scatter
Accessory
Figure 14-13. ArcCHECK Trolley
Prerequisite
The Cradle leveling feet must be upgraded before using the Cradle with the Trolley. The upgrade
allows sufficient distance between the Cradle and the leveling feet to accommodate the Trolley
top plate. ArcCHECK Cradles shipped after February 2016 have upgraded leveling feet. For more
information, see Cradle Upgrade on page 212.
WARNING: The ArcCHECK Trolley is MR Unsafe and must not be used with the
MR Unsafe
Do not use ArcCHECK-MR (Model 1220-MR) or in any strong magnetic fields.
this equip-
ment in the
MRI scan
room.
Using the ArcCHECK Trolley
Initial Placement of ArcCHECK on Trolley

1 Remove accessories (MultiPlug™, CavityPlug™, Scatter Accessory™) before placing Arc-
CHECK on Cradle. Remove Scatter Accessory support arms from Cradle before placing
Cradle on Trolley.
The Storage shelf is only for use with the Scatter Accessory. Do not store or transport other
accessories in the Storage Shelf.
ArcCHECK Trolley 209

2 Place ArcCHECK Cradle on Trolley such that front and middle supports rest on Trolley top
plate and Cradle leveling feet protrude into the top plate opening, as shown in figure below.
3 Gently place ArcCHECK on Cradle with cavity panel facing front support, as shown in figure
below.
CAUTION: Ensure fingers are not pinched between Cradle and ArcCHECK.
4 Place strap around ArcCHECK and Cradle then fasten buckle, as shown in figure below. If
needed, adjust strap length for secure fit.
Strap Cradle
Cradle support
support (middle)
Fasten (front)
buckle
Cradle
leveling
feet
Figure 14-14. Placing ArcCHECK and Cradle on Trolley
Note: During storage and transport, ensure strap is always wrapped around Cradle and
ArcCHECK with buckle securely fastened.
Moving ArcCHECK from Trolley to Couch

1 Position Trolley close to couch then unfasten strap. If desired, stow strap by wrapping around
upper cross bar, then re-fasten.
2 Move couch to approximately 85 cm from floor so couch is lower than Trolley top plate.
3 Roll Trolley to cantilevered side of couch, as shown in figure below.
4 Position Trolley such that Shelf Sides do not obstruct couch movement. See figure below.
Cantilevered
side of
couch
Strap
Shelf Sides
Figure 14-15. Position Trolley Next to Couch
5 Slowly raise couch until top surface of couch touches Cradle leveling feet, then raise couch
slightly higher until small gap appears between Cradle supports and Trolley top plate, as
shown in figure on next page. Leave gap between top plate and leveling feet, as shown in
figure on next page.

Cradle Trolley Cradle
support top support
plate
Leave gap
between Trolley
Shelf and Leveling
Feet
Small
Trolley top plate
gap
Leveling foot
Figure 14-16. Raise Couch to Leveling Feet
6 Note couch height for future reference.

7 Slowly roll Trolley backward, leaving ArcCHECK and Cradle on couch. Trolley should roll away
from couch easily. If ArcCHECK Cradle moves when rolling Trolley, cease movement then
adjust couch position again as described in step 5.
8 Remove Trolley from working area and ensure it is not in the path of gantry motion.
9 Adjust ArcCHECK to desired measurement position.
Moving ArcCHECK from Couch to Trolley

1 Remove accessories (MultiPlug, CavityPlug, Scatter Accessory) from ArcCHECK. If using
Scatter Accessory, remove support arms from Cradle. If Storage Shelf is installed, place Scat-
ter Accessory in Storage Shelf.
2 Slide ArcCHECK and Cradle toward edge of couch then move Trolley toward same edge, as
shown in figure below.
Figure 14-17. Position ArcCHECK and Trolley
3 Position couch at height noted in Step 6 of previous procedure. This height allows Trolley top
plate to slide between Cradle body and feet.
4 Position Trolley in front of Cradle and slowly roll forward. Resulting Trolley top plate, couch,
and leveling foot positions should resemble ‘Raise Couch to Leveling Feet’ figure above.
5 Slowly lower couch and allow Trolley to support ArcCHECK and Cradle as couch disengages
from leveling feet.
6 Roll Trolley away from couch then place strap around ArcCHECK and Cradle and fasten
buckle. If needed, adjust strap length for secure fit.
Trolley Specifications
Characteristic Specification
Dimensions 26” L x 24” W x 38” H (66 cm L x 61 cm W x 97 cm H)
Shelf material 3/16” steel (4.76 mm)
Weight ~60 lbs (~27 kg,)

Cradle Upgrade
If the ArcCHECK Cradle was shipped prior to February 2016, the leveling feet must be upgraded
before using the Trolley with the ArcCHECK and Cradle. The upgraded leveling feet allow sufficient
distance between the leveling foot and Cradle to accommodate the Trolley top plate, as shown in
Figure 15-1 below.
To purchase an ArcCHECK Cradle upgrade kit, P/N 1220801Z, contact Sun Nuclear Sales at
+1-321-259-6862.
Table 15. Parts Included in ArcCHECK Cradle Upgrade Kit
P/N Qty Description

978017Z 4 Leveling foot, 2” diameter, 1/4-20, 1.25”, stainless steel
934409Z 4 Set screw, 1/4-20 x 3/8”, stainless steel
860174Z 1 Hex (Allen) wrench
Gap between leveling

foot and Cradle
accommodates
Trolley top plate
Original leveling foot New leveling foot
Figure 15-1. Difference Between Original and New Leveling Feet
1 Remove ArcCHECK from Cradle, rotate such that electronics panel faces down, then place
ArcCHECK on level surface.
2 Turn ArcCHECK Cradle upside-down such that leveling feet are accessible.
3 Remove original leveling feet (4). Rotate each foot counterclockwise until fully disengaged
from Cradle.
4 Install one provided set screw in each threaded screw hole using provided hex (Allen) wrench,
as shown in figure below. Set screws should reach bottom of hole and be turned until finger
tight.
5 Install new leveling feet. Insert stud in threaded hole and rotate foot clockwise until finger
tight, as shown in figure below.
6 Discard original leveling feet.
Install set screws Install new leveling feet
Figure 15-2. Installing Set Screw and Leveling Foot

Installing Optional Storage Shelf
1 Remove eight button head screws from top and bottom of Trunk vertical supports using pro-
vided hex (Allen) wrench, as shown in figure below.
Trolley Trunk
Vertical Supports
Figure 15-3. Remove Eight Button Head Screws from Trunk Assembly
2 Remove Trunk Covers, as shown in figure below.
Upper Cross Tube
Trunk Covers
Figure 15-4. Remove Trunk Covers

3 Using provided button head screws(4), washers (4), nuts (4), and hex (Allen) wrench (1), install
storage shelf in mounting holes located above Upper Cross Tube, as shown.
Upper Cross Tube
Figure 15-5. Install Storage Shelf Above Upper Cross Tube
4 Install Trunk Covers and secure to Trunk Assembly using eight button head screws previously
removed. Storage Shelf is now installed on ArcCHECK Trolley.
Storage Shelf
Figure 15-6. Storage Shelf Installed
40 Meter Power/Data Cable
The 40 meter power/data cable, P/N 801074Z, increases the distance between the host computer
and the instrument to a maximum of 50 meters. It can be used with PDI 2.0 and PDI 3.0.
The 40 meter blue power/data cable has the same features as the 25 meter blue power/data cable,
such as heavier gauge wire to reduce resistive loss, improve impedance control, and increase
communication speed. See Power/Data Interface (PDI) on page 3.

16 Specifications
System Requirements
Table 16-1. System Requirements
Characteristic Details
Operating System Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows 7 (any edition), 32 or 64-bit
Regional Settings U.S. or International
Computer Minimum
• Pentium 4 Dual Core
• CPU Speed = 2.4 GHz
• Total RAM = 4 GB
• Free hard disk space = 5 GB
• USB port = one v2.0
• Video RAM = 32 MB
• Display resolution = 1280 x 1024
• Color depth = 32-bit
• OpenGL hardware accelerated video card
ArcCHECK Specifications
Table 16-2. ArcCHECK Specifications
Category Characteristic Specification

Detec- Quantity 1386 solid state SunPoint® Diode Detectors
tors/Array
Active Detector Size 0.8 x 0.8 mm2
Detector Spacing 1 cm along cylindrical length, 1 cm along circumference
Array Size/Distance • Detector Array length (spiral height): 21 cm
• Detector distance from center of cylinder: 10.5 cm (66
x 1 cm / 2)
• Distance from spiral band to spiral band (with respect
to the axis of the cylinder): 1 cm
• Distance between detectors along the length of the
spiral: 1 cm
• Diameter: 21 cm
Sensitivity 32 nC/Gy
Placement Accuracy 0.5 mm
Physical/Con- Phantom Material PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate)
struction
Physical Density 1.183 g/cm3
Weight 15.4 kg (33.9 lbs)
Dimensions Length:
• phantom section= 32.38 cm (12.75 in)
• total length = 44.29 cm (17.44 in)
Diameter:
• phantom section = 26.59 cm (10.47 in)
• electronics section = 28.42 cm (11.19 in)
• central cavity = 15 cm
Physical Depth • Outer cylinder: 2.9 cm
• Inner cylinder: 2.9 cm
Water Equivalent Depth • Outer cylinder: 3.3 +/- 0.01 g/cm2
• Inner cylinder: 3.3 +/- 0.01 g/cm2
ArcCHECK Specifications 215

Table 16-2. ArcCHECK Specifications (Continued)
Category Characteristic Specification

Radiation Measured Photons: Co-60 to 25 MV
Non-Pulsed Max Dose Rate 200 cGy/s
(Co-60)
Max Dose/Pulse 0.2 cGy
Pulsed Max Dose Rate (linac) Depends on pulse frequency.
Example: Varian 10 FFF/2400 MU/min beam operates at
360 pulses/second.
Maximum dose rate at 360 pulses/second is:
360 p/s * 0.2 cGy/pulse = 72 cGy/s = 4320 cGy/min
Dose Rate Dependence ±1% over the range 50 - 1400 cGy/min
Performance Update rate Concurrently collects and stores the data from 1386
detector diodes at an update rate of 20 samples per sec-
ond or slower.
Consistency Dose: consistently measures 100 mu to within 1% for 80
mu/min to 400 mu/min
Deviation: from a linear integration of dose to within
0.5% from 6 cGy to 30 cGy, and within 0.2% above 30
cGy at one dose rate, ~240 mu/min.
Electronics Optichromic dosimeter Two optichromic radiation dosimeters located between
the measurement field and the electronics area.
Inclinometers Qty 2 - one for rotation of the cylinder and one for angle
of coronal plane (tilt).
Range is 0 to +/-180 degrees, and accuracy is +/- 0.5
degrees
Power Mains Supply 90 - 240 Vac, 47 to 63 Hz.
Device Input 18 VDC ± 3.6 VDC
Operating Power < 12 Watts
Environment Operating • Ambient Temperature: 15° to 30° C (59° to 86° F)
• Relative Humidity: 30 to 60% (non-condensing)
Storage • Ambient Temperature: Storage: 10º C to +40º C (50 to
104° F)
• Relative Humidity: 30 to 60% (non-condensing)
Shipping and Transport (short • Temperature: –20 to 60 °C (–4 to 140 °F)
term exposure) • Relative humidity:10 to 70%, non-condensing
When the ArcCHECK arrives at its destination, it must be
stored 24 to 48 hours in a climate-controlled environment
that conforms to the storage conditions stated above prior
to use.
Service Life 10 years assuming 50 Gy per year.
ArcCHECK Storage Case Specifications
Table 16-3. ArcCHECK Storage Case Specifications
Dimensions 59.7 cm x 50.8 cm x 46.6 cm
Weight Case empty: 13.15 kg (29 lbs)
Case full: 37.20 kg (82 lbs)
216 Section 16. Specifications

CavityPlug Specifications
Table 16-4. CavityPlug Specifications
Diameter Plug: 150 mm (5.9 inches)
Bezel: 216 mm (8.5 inches)
Length Plug (excluding bezel): 255 mm (10.0 inches)
Plug (including bezel): 265 mm (10.4 inches)
Plug (including handle): 308 cm (12.1 inches)
Weight 5.9 kg (13 lbs.)
Material PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate)
MultiPlug Specifications
Table 16-5. MultiPlug Specifications
Diameter Plug: 14.5 cm (5.7 inches)
Bezel: 21.6 cm (8.50 inches)
Length Plug (not including bezel) = 25.3 cm (9.96 inches)
Plug (including bezel) = 26.3 cm (10.3 inches)
Plug (including handle) = 30.5 cm (12.0 inches)
Weight 5.44 kg (12 lbs) (with 10 solid 2 cm x 2 cm x 22 cm inserts, one film cassette,
one solid 2 cm x 10 cm x 22 cm insert, and one solid 2 cm x 4 cm x 22 cm
insert)
Material PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate), except for heterogeneity inserts. See Het-
erogeneity Inserts on page 202.
Tolerance MultiPlug to ArcCHECK cavity: within 0.25 mm.
Pieces inserted in MultiPlug: within ± 0.05 mm
Film GAFCHROMIC EBT, EBT 2, or EBT 3.
Scatter Accessory Specifications
Table 16-6. Scatter Accessory Specifications
Thickness 9.1 cm (3.58 inches)
Diameter 26.6 cm (10.5 inches)
Material High density polyethylene (HDPE)
Weight 4.3 kg (9.5 lbs.)
CavityPlug Specifications 217

218 Section 16. Specifications

17 Support and Maintenance
Minimizing Radiation Damage
The electronic circuits are located in the large base end of the instrument. To minimize damage to
the electronics:
• Keep direct radiation in the diode array area, on the phantom.
• Never expose the instrument electronics to the beam.
• Never leave the instrument on the couch during the delivery system warm up.
• Do not store the instrument in the treatment room.
CAUTION: The ArcCHECK contains radiation dosimeters in the electronics area. The
dosimeters are read during ArcCHECK service. An indication of direct irradiation to
the electronics will VOID the warranty.
Maintaining Hardware
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components in the ArcCHECK or its ancillary devices. If the
ArcCHECK does not function properly or cannot be calibrated to provide consistent
measurements with a known standard, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See Contacting Sun Nuclear
Support on page 228.
Inspection
Inspect ArcCHECK and cables periodically for damage. If the ArcCHECK housing is damaged such
as to compromise electromagnetic shielding or instrument integrity, contact Sun Nuclear Support.
If any mechanical or electrical degradation is suspected, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See
Contacting Sun Nuclear Support on page 228.
Cleaning
Clean ArcCHECK by vacuuming or wiping with a dry cloth. If necessary, external surfaces can be
cleaned with a slightly damp cloth, moistened with water and mild cleaning solution. Do not allow
any liquid to flow on the surface or into any cavity. Do not immerse ArcCHECK in any fluid. Do not
use solvents or abrasive cleaners.
Storage and Transport

Store the ArcCHECK in an indoor, climate-controlled environment. Choose a storage location
where the instrument will not be irradiated by the direct beam and where scattered radiation will
be kept at a minimum. See ArcCHECK Specifications on page 215 for storage, operating, and
transport environmental requirements.
When shipping or transporting the ArcCHECK, ensure the shipping temperature and humidity
meet the requirements in ArcCHECK Specifications on page 215. When the ArcCHECK arrives at
its destination, store it for 24 to 48 hours in a climate-controlled environment that meets the
requirements in ArcCHECK Specifications on page 215 prior to use.
Disposal and Recycling

The ArcCHECK contains electrical components. In some countries the disposal of electrical
components is subject to special requirements. When the components are no longer functional
or are otherwise ready to be discarded, recycle or dispose of them according to local waste
management or recycling regulations.
Minimizing Radiation Damage 219

Do not place in trash; dispose of in an environmentally friendly way.
Maintaining Software and Firmware
Determining Software and Firmware Versions

From the menu, select Help > About. The ‘SNC About’ dialog box displays the software and
firmware versions.
Obtaining the Latest Software

Download the latest software version from the Sun Nuclear Support website. See Support
Website on page 228.
Upgrading Software
The procedure to upgrade the SNC Patient software is the same as the procedure to install SNC
Patient software. See Install Software on page 8.
Upgrading Firmware
There are two different firmware upgrade utilities built into SNC Patient software, one to support
a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK instrument and another to support the original Model 1220
ArcCHECK (see Model 1220 ArcCHECK Versions on page 1). New Model 1220 ArcCHECKs use a
different firmware version than the original Model 1220 ArcCHECKs, and they contain a
field-programmable gate array (FPGA) integrated circuit. A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be
identified by the serial number on the product label (starts with ‘1222’). When you select Setup >
MapCHECK 2/ArcCHECK > Download Firmware to Device from the menu, the software
detects which ArcCHECK version is connected and then launches the appropriate firmware
upgrade utility based on the connected instrument. If you have a new Model 1220 ArcCHECK,
follow the firmware upgrade instructions below. If you have an earlier Model 1220 ArcCHECK,
follow the firmware upgrade instructions in Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK on page 223.
New Model 1220 ArcCHECK

1 With the ArcCHECK connected, select Setup > MapCHECK 2/ArcCHECK > Download
Firmware to Device from the menu. The Update ArcCHECK dialog box is displayed. To
upgrade the FPGA code, complete steps 2 to 5. To upgrade the firmware, complete steps 6
to 18.
Figure 17-1. Update ArcCHECK Dialog Box
220 Section 17. Support and Maintenance

Upgrade the FPGA Code
2 Click Browse below ‘Update FPGA Code’, navigate to the FPGA file
(1222_FPGA_Rev_105.dat), select it, and then click Open.
3 The path to the FPGA file is displayed in the dialog box. Click Update Device. The following
warning is displayed.
Figure 17-2. Warning Message
4 Click Yes to continue.

Note: The FPGA code update takes approximately 3-5 minutes. Messages are dis-
played below the Update Device button. When the update is complete, the message
“FPGA Update Successful” is displayed.
Figure 17-3. ‘FPGA Update Successful’ Message
5 Move the Update ArcCHECK dialog box to the left slightly so it is still visible after launching
the update utility.
Upgrade the Firmware

6 Select Help > About from the menu and write down the Firmware Version. The firmware
version will be checked again at the end of this procedure.
7 In the Update ArcCHECK dialog box, click Launch Update Utility. The following warning is
displayed.
Figure 17-4. Warning Message
Maintaining Software and Firmware 221

8 Click Yes to continue with the update. The Freescale - Universal Bootloader dialog box is
displayed.
.
Figure 17-5. Freescale - Universal Bootloader Utility
9 In the Serial Comport Selection list, select the COM port on which the ArcCHECK is
connected.
10 Click Open S19, navigate to the firmware image file (1222_Application_01000005.srec),
select it, and then click Open.
11 Unplug the power cable from the PDI 3.0, reconnect the power/data cable, and within 5
seconds click Connect.
Messages are displayed in the Freescale - Universal Bootloader dialog box.
Note: If you see the message “Error receiving reset ACK - TIMEOUT.”, the wrong COM
port may be selected.
When the firmware image is done loading the following message is displayed “The S19 image
also contains redirected vectors. The automatic redirection is skipped now.”
12 Click AutoProgram to install the firmware image on the ArcCHECK.
This process takes 1-2 minutes to complete. The Freescale - Universal Bootloader utility may
become unresponsive during this time.
13 When the message “Memory verified: OK” appears, the firmware update is complete. Click
Exit to close the Freescale - Universal Bootloader utility,
14 The Update ArcCHECK dialog box is still open. Click Close.
15 Select Setup > Find Device from the menu to reconnect to the ArcCHECK.
16 The Collect Background dialog box is displayed. Click Collect to start a background
measurement.
17 When the background measurement is complete, click Close.
18 Select Help > About from the menu and note the updated Firmware Version.

Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK
1 Connect the ArcCHECK, install the latest SNC Patient software version, and then launch the
software.
2 Select Help > About from the menu and check the Embedded Code version. If it is less than
2.2.2, the firmware needs to be updated.
3 Select the Setup > MapCHECK 2/ArcCHECK > Download Firmware to Device menu
option. The following screen is displayed:
Figure 17-6. ArcCHECK Firmware Update
4 Click the folder icon under Code Loader HEX File. When the “Open a Hex File” window is
displayed, navigate to the C:\SNC\SNCPatient\ArcCHECKFirmware directory and open the
“CodeLoader_10003.hex” file.
5 Click the folder icon under Boot Loader HEX File. When the “Open a Hex File” window is
displayed, select the “BootBlock_10003.hex.hex” file.
• If the checkbox at the right of the Boot Loader HEX area is not checked, select it.
6 Click the folder icon under Firmware Application HEX File. When the “Open a Hex File”
window is displayed, select the “1220_Application_20202.hex” file.
• If the checkbox at the right of the Application HEX area is not checked, select it.
Following is an example of the screen with all three hex files loaded:
Figure 17-7. ArcCHECK Firmware Update with Hex Files Loaded
7 Click the Download button. The progress bar updates several times then the following screen
is displayed:
Figure 17-8. Firmware Updated Message
8 Disconnect the ArcCHECK, close the software, reconnect the ArcCHECK, and then launch the
software.
Maintaining Software and Firmware 223

9 Select Help > About from the menu and verify that the Embedded Code version has been
updated.
Removing SNC Patient Software

The uninstall process removes all of the SNC Patient program files. Data files are not removed.
Software Removal (Windows 10 or Windows 8.1)

1 Click the upper right corner of the screen then select Settings > Control Panel > Programs
and Features.
2 In the list of installed programs, select SNC Patient then click Uninstall .
Software Removal (Windows 7)

1 Select Start > Settings > Control Panel then click Programs and Features.
2 In the list of installed programs, select SNC Patient then click Uninstall.
Shutting Down
The ArcCHECK does not have a power on/off switch. It is powered on by connecting the
power/data cable to the instrument and powered off by disconnecting the cable.
To fully shut down the ArcCHECK and isolate it from mains power, save any open files, close the
SNC Patient software, and then disconnect the power/data cable from the instrument.
Troubleshooting
SNC Patient Software Troubleshooting

Table 17-1. SNC Patient Software Troubleshooting
Indication Probable cause Remedy

New Model 1220 ArcCHECK will not Wrong PDI device and/or A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK
power on. power/data cable. must be connected to a PDI 3.0
and blue power/data cable. For
more information, see Model
1220 ArcCHECK Versions on
page 1 and Power/Data Interface
(PDI) on page 3.
The beam is on, but the software displays The software has not Stop the beam and measurement.
“Waiting for Beam”. detected beam due to very Setup for 10x10 cm field, maxi-
low signal. mum output. Start measurement
and turn on the beam. If no
response, contact Sun Nuclear
Support. See Contacting Sun
For more information, see Beam
On Status on page 192.
Check cable connections. See
Connect Hardware on page 8.
Cables not connected
properly. Disconnect USB cable from PDI,
reconnect, and wait 20 seconds
for the USB port to be detected.
No communication with instrument.
Incorrect USB drivers or See Technical Bulletin 2-09, Power
drivers not installed correctly. Data Interface.
Verify computer is running Win-
Wrong operating system. dows 10, Windows 8.1 or
Windows 7.
Warning message: “Device electronics One or more of the diode Move the instrument electronics
are in the beam.” detectors in the electronics out of the beam. See Minimizing
section of the instrument Radiation Damage on page 219.
detected direct radiation
from an entry or exit beam.
An error message appears after clicking Clicks are too fast for the sys- Slow down the period between
Start and immediately clicking Stop tem to accommodate. clicking Start and Stop so the sys-
tem can start collecting data.

Table 17-1. SNC Patient Software Troubleshooting (Continued)
Indication Probable cause Remedy

“Dissimilar Data Sets. Continue?” Two dissimilar files were The data sets are potentially from
selected in Set 1 and Set 2, different plans or orientations. To
when then the Compare but- compare anyway, click Yes.
ton was clicked.
“Array calibration cannot be performed One of more of the channels See Contacting Sun Nuclear Sup-
due to higher than normal leakage on one that are critical for ArcCHECK port on page 228.
or more channels that are critical for the array calibration (channels in
ArcCHECK array calibration. Please con- column 32) has higher than
tact Sun Nuclear Support. normal leakage.
“WARNING: Some ArcCHECK Coordi- May occur when opening Ensure that the entire ArcCHECK
nates Outside Plan Area (###). planned dose files if the cylinder fits inside the dose vol-
ArcCHECK areas outside plan will have a entire ArcCHECK cylinder ume so that diodes are not
value of zero.” does not fit within the dose outside of the plan area.
volume.
“The measurement is missing greater A device communication Close any non-essential computer
than 1000 milliseconds of updates. It is delay of one or more sec- applications (e-mail, web browser,
recommended that the measurement be onds occurred during etc.) then repeat the measure-
re-taken.” measurement. ment. If the message appears
again, contact Sun Nuclear Sup-
port. See Contacting Sun Nuclear
Support on page 228.
The file <file path\*.pdf>is currently The ‘Save to PDF’ command Close the PDF file and retry the
locked by another program. failed because the filename ‘Save to PDF’ command.
in the selected location is
open in another application.
TPS Filter Troubleshooting

The following table lists error messages that may appear when importing planned dose files.
Table 17-2. Import Filter Error Messages
Message Meaning
DICOM dose units expected cGy Dose units were not in cGy; change units and re-export dose
map
Did not find (name of field keyword) before Required keyword is missing; possibly not the correct type of
end of file file; wrong file selected; or file has been corrupted
Dose data is missing File may be corrupted; wrong file type
Error in grid min, max definition File may be corrupted; wrong file type
Expected file type RTDOSE; Filter expected RT Dose file but found another file type. The
found file type _____ file must be RT Dose file type.
First X, Y coordinate not same for all levels Grid spacing is not the same in all slices
Grid spacing not positive Grid spacing must be positive; plan may be rotated or flipped
Grid spacing not same for all levels Spacing of values different for different horizontal slices of
dose volume; reset plan and re-export dose map
Import file did not load Filter encountered an error; retry import or re-export dose
map
No depth interval or non-uniform spacing Cannot read file because spacing is not uniform
Number of X and/or Y dose points not greater Number of points in dose grid seems to be 0 or negative.
than one Must have a grid of positive value.
Spacing value not > 0 Bad data or grid flipped
Unable to open file (filename) Filter was not able to open selected file
Troubleshooting 225
License Troubleshooting
Table 17-3. License Troubleshooting
Cause Solution
By default, the software looks for license If the license files have been received:
files in the directory path,  • Move the license files to the default license directory:
C:\SNC\SNC Patient\License, but the C:\SNC\SNC Patient\License
license files are saved in a different directory – or –
• Click Browse on the right side of the License File Path field
and navigate to the location of the license files. Ensure the
check box is enabled for Make the selected path default for
loading license files.
Note: The person logged in to the SNC Patient software must
have write permissions to the directory in which the license
files are stored.
After upgrading the SNC Patient software, a Renew the license to upgrade to this software version. Follow
message states that the software cannot the instructions in the window to request a license. See Gen-
find a valid license erate Software License and Download Software on page 7.
A license file exists in the specified directory The license file is for a device whose expiration date occurred
path, but the software still displays a mes- before the software release date.
sage that the license is not found.
ArcCHECK LED (Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK)

The power LED indicator on the end panel can be used to check the operational status of the
ArcCHECK microcontrollers.
Status Meaning
Solid ON Power On (after 5 second power up).
Toggle (10 Hz) Acquiring measurements.
OFF Device fault
ArcCHECK LEDs (New Model 1220 ArcCHECK)

A new Model 1220 ArcCHECK can be identified by the serial number on the product label (starts
with ‘1222’) and the text on the electronics panel which states that the instrument must be used
with a PDI 3.0 and a blue PDI (power/data) cable. See Model 1220 ArcCHECK Versions on page 1.
The system LED indicators (A and B) on the electronics panel report the instrument status.
A B Status
Left to Right Toggle (4 Hz) Initializing / Boot Block
Both ON (Solid) * Initializing / Application
Both Fast Toggle (10 Hz) Acquiring Measurements
Both Slow Toggle (2.5 Hz) Device Error (memory/stack)
Both ON (Solid) Critical Device Fault
* Rotation and Tilt Status LEDs will also be OFF. LEDs A and B are temporarily ON between Initialization and Ac-
quiring Measurements.
Inclinometer LEDs
See Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration on page 13.
PDI Troubleshooting
See Bulletin 2-09, Power Data Interface that is provided with each PDI.
Manually Disabling Detectors
An individual detector may not respond as expected due to higher than normal leakage, problems
with supporting circuit components, etc. If this occurs, measurements will likely exhibit an
obvious anomaly that is specific to one or more detectors and does not change from exposure to
exposure. If you see evidence of this, it is recommended to contact Sun Nuclear Support to have
the instrument repaired (see Contacting Sun Nuclear Support on page 228). Alternatively, the
output from failed detectors can be removed from dose calculations using the procedure below.

The software identifies detectors that have higher than normal leakage and provides two ways to
view them:
• In Set 1, click the ‘Show Detectors’ button. Leaky detectors are shown in yellow. For details,
see Show Detectors on page 62.
• Open the device event log in the application directory. For details, see Device Event Log on
page 227.
Enable or Disable Detectors

Perform the following procedure to remove individual detectors from dose calculations or
re-enable previously disabled detectors. When a detector is disabled, the detector’s output is
removed from pass/fail consideration in the analysis.
CAUTION: Do not disable two adjacent detectors or more than 5 in the array. If
multiple detectors need to be disabled, contact Sun Nuclear Support. See
Contacting Sun Nuclear Support on page 228.
If the instrument has been repaired, enable any repaired detectors that were previously disabled.
1 Select Setup > Program Preferences then click the Detectors tab.
For details about the options in this dialog box, Program Preferences on page 178.
2 Select the Use Detector Map check box.
3 Choose the instrument’s serial number from the drop-down list. If the serial number is not in
the list, click Add, type the instrument serial number, and then click OK.
4 Click Edit then click the detector that you wish to disable or re-enable. Enabled detectors are
shown in blue and disabled detectors are shown in red.
5 Click Save.
6 The message Apply Detector Settings to Set 1 Data? is displayed. Click Yes.
7 Click Close.
Device Event Log
SNC Patient software saves diagnostic information for ArcCHECK and MapCHECK 2 in a log file
(Events.Log). The file is stored in the program files directory (C:\SNC\SNC Patient).
The Events.log file stores the following type of information: background threshold, array and dose
calibration dates, number of missed updates, number of channels with higher than normal
leakage, lifetime corrected counts at CAX, etc. Each entry includes a date and time stamp, build
number, device model, and serial number.
Device Event Log 227

Following is an example of the Events.Log file. Note that events for both ArcCHECK (Model 1220)
and MapCHECK 2 (Model 1177) are recorded in the same file.
Figure 17-9. Example of Events.Log File
Contacting Sun Nuclear Support
You may request support in two ways:

• Contact the Sun Nuclear Support team by telephone: +1 321-259-6862.
• Submit a support request using our online form. See Support Website below.
Support Website
1 Open an internet browser and navigate to www.sunnuclear.com/support.
2 Enter your email address and the serial number of any Sun Nuclear instrument used at your
facility, then click Log in.
• To download product information, click Products and Downloads, select the product,
and then select a download type.
• To open a Support request, click Open New Case, complete the form, then click Submit.
Warranty
The Sun Nuclear Product Warranty can be found on the Sun Nuclear Support website,
www.sunnuclear.com/support.

Appendix A: Regulatory Supplement
In addition to the regulatory information contained in the body of this manual, the following
supplemental regulatory information is provided.
Sun Nuclear Corporation Symbols
The following symbols are used in this document or in Sun Nuclear Corporation’s product labels.
WARNING: This symbol indicates a risk of electric shock. (EN ISO 7010, W012)
WARNING: This symbol indicates a hazard that could result in major injury or equip-
ment damage. (EN ISO 7010, W001)
WARNING: This symbol indicates MR Unsafe. Do not use the indicated equipment in
MR Unsafe
Do not use any strong magnetic fields. (ASTM F2503)
this equip-
ment in the
MRI scan
room.
CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potential hazard that could result in minor injury or
equipment damage. (EN ISO 15223-1, 5.4.4)
CAUTION: This symbol indicates a pinch or crush hazard. (EN ISO 7010, W024)
Note: Important or supporting information.
This symbol indicates a general mandatory action. (EN ISO 7010, M001)
Manufacturer’s Identification (name and address. (EN ISO 15223-1. 5.1.1)
Date of Manufacture. (EN ISO 15223-1, 5.1.3)
Serial Number. (EN ISO 15223-1, 5.1.7)
Catalog Number. (EN ISO 15223-1, 5.1.6)
Authorized representative in the European Community. (EN ISO 15223-1, 5.1.2)
229
Consult instructions for use. This equipment must be used in accordance with the
instructions in this manual. Read all instructions and safety labels before use. (EN ISO
15223-1, 5.4.3)
Do not throw in trash; dispose of in an environmentally friendly way. (EN 50419)
This symbol indicates conformity with EC directives.
Operator Responsibility
This manual is intended for an operator who has a working knowledge in radiation physics and
dosimetry and who has experience working with treatment machines and accessories. The
operator of the instrument bears the full responsibility for validating measurement results.
Reporting Health or Safety Related Issues or Concerns
Should the need arise to report any safety or health related issues or concerns regarding the use
of Sun Nuclear products, Sun Nuclear should be contacted directly.
In the case of our European customers, contact Sun Nuclear’s Authorized European
Representative.
EMERGO EUROPE
Prinsessegracht 20
2514 AP The Hague
The Netherlands
In the case of our Australian customers, contact Sun Nuclear’s Australian Sponsor.
alphaXRT Pty. Ltd.

Suite 1.15, Level 1, 90-96 Bourke Road
Alexandria NSW 2015
Australia
Modifications to Equipment
Any changes or modifications to the instrument that are not expressly approved by Sun Nuclear
Corporation could void your warranty.
Regulatory Testing/Compliance
The ArcCHECK instrument complies with the following standards:

• US Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices, Subpart B,
Unintentional Radiators (Class A device). Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK only.
• US Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 18, Radio Frequency Devices, Subpart B,
Unintentional Radiators (Class A device). New Model 1220 ArcCHECK only (see Model 1220
ArcCHECK Versions on page 1.)
• Industry Canada ICES-003 Issue 3: Digital Apparatus. All ArcCHECK models.
• EN 55011, Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency Equipment. Electromag-
netic disturbance characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement, Group 1, Class A,
Radiated Disturbance Emissions - 30 to 1000 MHz Electric Field. All ArcCHECK models.
• EN 60601-1-2. All ArcCHECK models.
230 Appendix A: Regulatory Supplement

Interaction with Other Electrical Equipment
The instrument can only be connected to external computer equipment that is compliant with
IEC 60950-1, Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
EMC Precautions
The electromagnetic compatibility information in this section is based on the guidance in
EN 60601-1-2.
Model 1220 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the tables below.
The operator should ensure that it is used in such an environment.
Table A-1. Manufacturer’s Declaration—Electromagnetic Emissions
Emissions Test Compliance Electronic Environment — Guidance

Radiated Emissions Class A, Group 1 The instrument uses RF energy only for its internal
EN 55011 function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
Conducted Emissions Group 1, Class A
EN 60601-1-2
Harmonic Current  Class A The instrument is suitable for use in all establish-
Emissions ments other than domestic and those directly
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic
Voltage fluctuations and Pst <=1.0 purposes.
flicker Plt < =.65
EN 61000-3-3 dc <= 3.3%
dmax <= 4%
Table A-2. Manufacturer’s Declaration—Electromagnetic Immunity for All Equipment
IMMUNITY Test IEC 60601 Test Compliance Level Electronic Environment — Guidance
Level
Electrostatic  ±6 kV Contact Complies Floors should be wood, concrete or
Discharge ±8 kV Air ceramic tile. If floors are covered with syn-
thetic material, the relative humidity
IEC 61000-4-2 should be at least 30%.
Electrical Fast Tran- ±2 kV for power Complies Mains power quality should be that of a
sients/burst supply lines. typical commercial or hospital
environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/
output lines
Surge ±1 kV line(s) to Complies Mains power quality should be that of a
line(s) typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-5
±2 kV line(s) to environment.
earth
±1 kV I/O
Interfaces
Voltage dips and 0% of Vnom Complies Mains power quality should be that of a
interruptions typical commercial or hospital environ-
.5 Cycles
IEC 61000-4-11 ment. If the user of the instrument
40% of Vnom requires continued operation during
5 Cycles power mains interruptions, it is recom-
70% of Vnom mended that the instrument be powered
from an uninterruptible power supply or a
25 Cycles battery.
0% of Vnom
250 Cycles
Power frequency - 3 A/m (50 Hz, 60 Complies Power frequency magnetic fields should
magnetic field Hz) be at levels characteristic of a typical com-
IEC 61000-4-8 mercial or hospital environment.
Operator Responsibility 231

Table A-3. Manufacturer’s Declaration—Electromagnetic Immunity for Systems that Are Not Life
Supporting
IMMUNITY Test IEC 60601 Test Compliance Level Electronic Environment — Guidance
Level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to
any part of the instrument including
cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
RF common mode .15 to 80 MHz Complies
d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 3 Vrms
80% AM1kHz
Radio-frequency 80 MHz to 2.5 Complies Recommended separation distance
Electromagnetic GHz
Field Amplitude
3V/m d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
Modulated
80% AM1kHz d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3
where P is the maximum output power rat-
ing of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and d is the recommended separation dis-
tance in meters (m)
Field strength from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
surveya should be less than the compli-
ance level in each frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
the equipment marked with the following
symbol:
1
NOTE 1. At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency applies.

NOTE 2. These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorp-
tion and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theo-
retically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
instrument is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the instrument should be observed
to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary,
such as re-orienting or relocating the instrument.
b Over the frequency range of 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Table A-4. Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communica-
tions Equipment and the Instrument - for Systems that are Not Life Supporting
The instrument is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the instrument can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmit-
ters) and the instrument as recommenced below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated Maximum Output Power Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
of Transmitter m
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
W
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.68 7.3
100 12 12 23

Table A-4. Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communica-
tions Equipment and the Instrument - for Systems that are Not Life Supporting (Continued)
The instrument is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the instrument can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmit-
ters) and the instrument as recommenced below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated Maximum Output Power Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
of Transmitter m
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
W
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance
d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P
is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE 1. At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency applies.
NOTE 2. These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorp-
tion and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
Operator Responsibility 233


Index
Symbols auto directory structure 179 change calibration factor 32
*.acm file (movie) 191, 193 auto-normalization point 52 known dose 29
*.mcs file (session) 55 procedure 30
*.txt file (device measured) 189 B remove value 32
% difference back/next buttons 182 set default value 32
setting 53 background CAUTION
box 174 an indication of direct irradiation to
A measurement, automatic 9, 17 the electronics will void the war-
about, menu command 174 measurement, manual 17 ranty 14
absolute dose batch analysis 77 annual array calibration recommend-
calibration (about) 29 batch analysis tab 185 ed 28
calibration (procedure) 30 batch calculate EPIDose applying the wrong array calibration
change calibration factor 32 menu command 173 file will cause erroneous results.
of detector, view 66 batch calculate EPIDose via Elekta log 33
remove calibration value 32 menu command 173 applying the wrong dose calibration
set default value 32 beam delivery system reproducibility, will cause erroneous results. 33
absolute dose DTA comparison machine QA 117 ArcCHECK may be heavy to some in-
parameter, measurement beam on status 192 dividuals. Use caution when lift-
uncertainty(%) 160 beam QA, menu command 173 ing 169
absolute dose values 54 bin size, histogram 73 ArcCHECK may be heavy to some in-
accessories blended contours 63 dividuals. Use caution when lift-
CavityPlug 197 blue points (comparison) 51 ing. 8
MultiPlug 199 buildup, inherent 33 direct radiation of electronics will
Scatter Accessory 206 buildup, physical distance 33 void the warranty 163
always ask for dose scaling factor buttons do not disable two adjacent detec-
checkbox 181 calc shift 52 tors or more than 5 in the array
analysis details 176 cax offset control 175 227
angle 186 chart/data 61, 175 do not use HU to electron density
annual recalibration 28 clear 66 conversion tables in MV CT imag-
apply array calibration, context menu data information 71 es to edit kV CT curves 41
option 177 dose 65 dosimeters in ArcCHECK are read
apply dose calibration, context menu edit contour settings 62, 175 during ArcCHECK service. 219
option 177 grid lines 61, 175 editing a measurement file can make
apply measurement uncertainty histogram 176 it unusable. Copy the file before
checkbox 181 load defaults 186 viewing or editing 188, 191
ArcCHECK load plan file 186 ensure ArcCHECK is securely in-
accessories and options 3 maximize/minimize 176 stalled in cradle 8
calibration 17 none 65 ensure correct file type loaded (Jaw
connector panel 165 norm 65 or MLC) 133
description 1 profile 66 ensure fingers are not pinched be-
end panel template 163 ruler 66 tween Cradle and ArcCHECK. 210
geometry 165 show detectors 62, 175 federal laws restrict this device to
LEDs 226 show profile graph 176 sale by or on the order of a physi-
measured file, compare 53 zoom 65 cian. iii
phantom section 164 zoom control 176 if system requirements warning dis-
positioning for measurement 13 played, upgrade computer hard-
ArcCHECK control point dose analysis C ware as soon as possible 11
172 cables 4 keep ArcCHECK electronics out of
ArcCHECK help, menu command 174 data 4, 5 the direct beam iv
ArcCHECK image in array calibration power cord 4, 5 keep gantry at 0 degrees when per-
window 182 USB 4, 5 forming cross plane flatness test
ArcCHECK plan MLC QA 173 calculated shift (Calc Shift) 52 138
array calibration 18 calibrate array, menu command 172 keep the direct beam above the line
factors 54 calibrate dose, menu command 172 shown on the ArcCHECK 14
factory default file 18 calibration interval 28 trolley storage shelf may only be
load calibration file 33 calibration, array 18 used to transport the scatter ac-
window details 182 apply 28 cessory. 209
file name 174 use only Sun Nuclear approved Arc-
load calibration file 33 CHECK accessories 197
set default file 28 CavityPlug accessory 197
calibration, dose CAX offset control
about 29 button 175
Index 235
CAX shift 65 Van Dyk Difference 89 command 172
chart appearance buttons 61 corrected counts 54 error, sources of 153
chart/data button 61, 175 create and export sncpdp file 172 events log file 227
cleaning 219 exit, menu command 172
clear button 66 D exporting data from TPS 37
clear data from screen 60 data information button 71, 176 extended warranty 220
clear, context menu option 177 data mode (numeric values) 54
clear, menu command 171 data points, profile 69 F
close button (calibration) 183 data type selection 54, 176 file manager 75, 184
collect background manually 17 decimal separators 178 add files 76
collect background, menu command depth 186 batch analysis 77
172 description, ArcCHECK 1 create 75
colors of status light 174 detector, view absolute dose 66 delete or rename files 77
combine, menu command 172 device not found 10 directory path 178
compare diagnostic maintain patient plan 77
ArcCHECK measured files 53 log file 227 menu command 172
dissimilar files 52 diode aging 28 open patient plan 75
measured to planned 51 display file manager tab 184
toolbar settings 53 panel toolbars 175 file menu 171
compare panel toolbar 51 display window 59 file name, display 175
compare toolbar settings 53 disposal 219 file path, license 178
compared data 59 dissimilar files, comparison 52 file type, *.acm 191, 193
comparison, relative or absolute 52 distance to agreement (DTA) 54 file type, *.txt 189
connection issues 10 diagram 159 files
context menu 177 technique 158 opening 60
context menu option distance to detector junction 33 find device, menu command 172
apply array calibration 177 dose firmware 220
apply dose calibration 177 box 174 firmware updates 220
clear 177 value display 70 flatness and symmetry, machine QA 138
open ArcCHECK planned dose 177 values display 176
open device measured 177 dose button 65 G
open DICOM plan/dose file set 177 dose calibration gamma analysis 156
open EPIDose 177 absolute 29 gamma index 54
open planned dose or image data change calibration factor 32 gantry QA, machine QA 126
177 dialog box, details 183 graphical user interface 59
contour settings known dose 29 greyscale 63
dialog box 64 procedure 30 greyscale with isodose 63
control point analysis 172 remove value 32 greyscale, layered (comparison) 63
absolute dose local percent compar- set default value 32 grid lines button 61, 175
ison 91 values stored in dose.dat 29
always ask for dose scaling factor 89 dose difference (comparison) 64 H
analysis criteria options, details 93 dose maps, importing 37 hardware
analysis histogram panel, details 98 dosimeters 163 connector panel 165
analysis type options, details 92 download firmware to device end panel template 163
apply measurement uncertainty 88 menu command 172 geometry 165
ArcCHECK dose panel, details 96 DTA phantom section 164
display toolbar, details 94, 122 (distance to agreement) 54 help menu 174
dose difference results, details 94 technique 158 histogram
dose difference threshold 89 bin size 73
loading data files 82 E display 72
menu options 87 edit range 73
min arc length 89 contour settings button 62, 175 window details 74
movie (lite) file 82 electromagnetic emissions 231 histogram and profile panel
movie control buttons 100 electronics area 163 data 59
PDF report 102 eliminating sources of error 153 histogram button 176
Plan dose panel, details 97 EMC precautions 231 hospital name 186
polar graph control panel, details 100 energy 186
program preferences 88 environmental requirements 230 I
requirements 82 EPID files 60 image file, signature 178
resizing panels 101 EPIDose help, menu command 174 import
RTPlan 82 EPIDose physics modeling, menu DICOM files 37
selecting analysis options 83 import filter, error messages 225
synchronization 82 inclinometer
user interface 87 virtual 110
using min arc length for AD 89
236 Index
information button 71, 176 program preferences 172 patient plan toolbar 174
inherent buildup 33 recently used files 172 PDF, print to 56
initial setup position 13 save 171 percent difference (%diff) 53
installing software 8 view inclinometer readings 172 phantom area 163
intended use 1 merge, higher density 113 phantom area, markings 164
interpreting results 153 merge, longer field size 111 plan MLC QA, ArcCHECK 173
invert check box 65 MLC QA 173 PNG125 191
isodose overlay 64 MLC QA, ArcCHECK 173 positioning for measurement 13
MLC/collimator QA, machine QA 132 power data interface (PDI) 3
K modifications to equipment 230 powering off (shutting down) 224
known dose, dose calibration 29 movie (multi-frame) file preface iii
beam on status 192 print
L movie file 191, 193 batch analysis report 80
launching software 9 MRI safety information iv print, menu command 172
layered contours 63 multiple instruments or computers 7 printing, reports
LEDs, status, ArcCHECK 166, 226 MultiPlug accessory 199 patient information 56
license file path 178 print preview 56
licensing N to PDF 56
expiration date notice 10 navigating to other maximized panels 60 profile
load none button 65 data points 69
an array calibration file 28 norm button 65 selecting 69
load array calibration 174 normalization profile and histogram panel, data 59
load defaults button 186 auto-normalization, compare 52 profile button 66
load plan files button 186 normalized values 54 program preferences 178
log file, events 227 numeric values (data mode) 54 detectors tab 179
files tab 178
M O menu command 172
machine QA 117 offset counts 54 other tab 181
beam delivery system reproducibility open reports tab 180
117 device measured file 60
flatness and symmetry 138 files 60 Q
gantry QA 126 session file 56 quality and regulatory systems iii
menu option 173 treatment plan file 60 quick start instructions 5
MLC/collimator QA 132 open ArcCHECK planned dose
maintenance 219 context menu option 177 R
MapCHECK 2 help, menu command 174 open device measured raw counts 54
MapCHECK help, menu command 174 context menu option 177 recalibration interval 28
markings, phantom area 164 open DICOM plan/dose file set recently used files, menu command 172
maximize/minimize button 176 context menu option 177 recycling 219
maximizing/minimizing, panel 60 open EPIDose, context menu option 177 red points (comparison) 51
measurement open planned dose or image data relative DTA comparison
positioning 13 context menu option 177 parameter, difference (%) 159
save 34 open, menu command 171 parameter, measurement uncertain-
measurement uncertainty 160, 161 options and accessories, ArcCHECK 3 ty(%) 159
apply 181 orange detector (selected, absolute parameter, mm 159
menu command dose) 66 relative or absolute comparison 52
about 174 repair/service, user 219
ArcCHECK help 174 P reports
batch calculate EPIDose 173 panel, maximizing/minimizing 60 patient information 56
batch calculate EPIDose via Elekta panels, navigating to other maximized print preview 56
log 173 60 print to PDF 56
beam QA 173 patient ID 186 right-click menu 177
calibrate array 172 patient information rotation 65
calibrate dose 172 dialog box, details 186 RT DOSE files
clear 171 reports 56 importing 37
collect background 172 patient name 186 RT PLAN files
combine 172 patient plan 75 importing 37
download firmware to device 172 add files 76 ruler button 66
EPIDose Help 174 batch analysis 77
EPIDose physics modeling 172 create 75 S
exit 172 delete or rename files 77 save
file manager 172 maintain 77 measurement 34
find device 172 open plan 75 menu command 171
MapCHECK 2 help 174 session 55
MapCHECK help 174 Scatter Accessory 206
open 171 SDD 186
print 172 serial number, ArcCHECK 18, 29, 183,
Index 237
189 software/firmware, version 220 use detector map 179
session 55 sources of error 153 user interface 59
file (.mcs) 55 specifications 215 user service/repair 219
file, open 56 split composite 172
save 55 split composite into single beams 172 V
set SSD 186 Van Dyk DTA analysis 160
array calibration file 28 start button 174 version, software/firmware 220
calibration file 183 start button, calibration 182 view array calibration 174
set 1 panel status box 174 view inclinometer readings
bottom toolbar 65, 176 steps to eliminate errors 153 menu command 172
data displayed 59 stop button 174 virtual inclinometer 110
set 2 panel storage 208, 219
data displayed 59 study date 186 W
setup 178 summary 186 WARNING
setup menu 172 SunCOM file 39 angular correction not applied under
show detectors button 62, 175 example 195 certain conditions 146
show profile graph button 176 optional header information 194 ArcCHECK must be connected to
shutting down (powering off) 224 required keywords 194 mains with protective earth
signature image file 178 SunMETRIC 80 (ground). iv
smooth greyscale 63 support do not modify a treatment plan
smooth greyscale (comparison) 63 website 228 based on results from a single QA
sncpdp file 172 support, technical 219 device. iii, 51, 153
software ensure file name contains patient ID,
for two or more ArcCHECK units 7 T plan name, and date 35
installing 8 technical support 219 external computer equipment must
launching 9 text file 189 be compliant with IEC 60950-1. iv
reference 171 threshold (TH) 53 grid spacing of imported TPS data
removing 224 toolbar must be less than or equal to 4
updates 220 compare 53 mm. 37
compare settings 53 model 1220 ArcCHECK is MR unsafe
details 174, 175 and must not be used in any
set 1, bottom 65, 176 strong magnetic fields iv
tools menu 172 trolley accessory is MR unsafe and
treatment plan must not be used in any strong
import, about 37 magnetic fields 209
import, preferences 178 warranty 228
import, troubleshooting 225 extending 220
troubleshooting 224
Z
U zoom
updates button 176
firmware 220 control 67
profile 69
zoom button 65
238 Index
4VO/VDMFBS$PSQPSBUJPO +1 321 259 6862
3275 Suntree Boulevard www.sunnuclear.com
Melbourne, FL 32940 USA

ArcCHECK Reference Guide RevP July

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ArcCHECK Reference Guide RevP July

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title

ArcCHECK® 7JKJWJSHJ Guide

Sun Nuclear Corporation

ArcCHECK, Model 1220 is a three-dimensional (3D) ionizing radiation measurement device

Quality and Regulatory Systems

Sun Nuclear Corporation is an ISO 13485 certifiedcompany

Health and Safety Instructions

WARNING: The instrument can only be connected to external computer equipment

The ArcCHECK is a water-equivalent phantom with a three-dimensional array of SunPoint® Diode

Model 1220 ArcCHECK Versions

New Model 1220 ArcCHECK

No. Part Number Qty. Description

Figure 1-1. Parts Included with New Model 1220 ArcCHECK

Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK

No. Part Number Qty. Description

Figure 1-2. Parts Included with Original Model 1220 ArcCHECK

Options and Accessories

Power/Data Interface (PDI)

Figure 1-3. PDI 3.0

Power/Data Interface (PDI) 3

Gray Power/Data Cable Blue Power/Data Cable

Figure 1-4. Power/Data Cables

PDI Power Supply

New Model 1220

ArcCHECK Quick Start Instructions

ArcCHECK Quick Start Instructions 5

Generate Software License and Download Software

Note: DICOM Listener software can be downloaded separately, or it can be installed

Multiple Instruments or Computers

Install and License Software 7

2 Place the assembled ArcCHECK cradle on the treatment couch.

Figure 2-1. ArcCHECK Positioned in Cradle

Model 1220 Cabling

8-pin DIN power/data

Connect and Launch Software

Connect and Launch Software 9

If the ArcCHECK is Not Found

Check Firmware Version

SNC Patient Software License

Figure 2-4. SNC Patient Licensing Window

Figure 2-5. System Requirements Warning - ArcCHECK

CAUTION: If the warning is displayed, the computer hardware should be upgraded

1 Ensure that all steps in Connect Hardware on page 8 are complete.

Rotate Counter Rotate Clock-

Tilt (Up) Tilt (Down)

Condition LED Balance Angle

Initial Position for Measurement or Calibration 13

Align sagittal and

Keep the direct beam above this line

Figure 3-1. Alignment to Lasers (Top View)

Figure 3-2. Setup - ArcCHECK Cavity End

Figure 3-3. Example of ArcCHECK Inclinometer Readings Display

Electronics end too high = positive tilt

Electronics end too low = negative tilt

Figure 3-5. Confirm Inclinometer Calibration

Background must be collected before radiation measurement to establish a background correc-

Note: If sequential measurements are collected without interruption, the software

Background not applied Background applied

Collecting Background Manually

Figure 4-2. ‘Collect Background’ Dialog Box

Factory Array Calibration

Array Calibration Conditions

Array Calibration Procedure